summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/tex-refs
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2009-05-23 00:17:44 +0000
committerKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2009-05-23 00:17:44 +0000
commitcfd5aee575d84f09834ffcf92e5ad51c7cac38ca (patch)
tree9bb827d3c2a6f3d57148a6b4c9312a9f559acaaa /Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/tex-refs
parentac7c62d7555a6cebca926dc51ebc39cb235982db (diff)
move tex-refs and knuth out of texmf-doc
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@13409 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/tex-refs')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/tex-refs/README61
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/tex-refs/tex-refs-source.tar.gzbin0 -> 130491 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/tex-refs/tex-refs.css124
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/tex-refs/tex-refs.html14590
4 files changed, 14775 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/tex-refs/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/tex-refs/README
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..90313b718a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/tex-refs/README
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+README file for tex-refs
+========================
+
+$Id: README 146 2005-05-14 15:34:22Z mw $
+
+This file contains very brief instructions on how to build the
+various output formats (in case you want to do this yourself for
+some reason or just want to see how we handle all the 'magic').
+
+
+Where to find
+-------------
+
+You'll find the latest version of 'tex-refs' at
+http://www.miwie.org/tex-refs/
+
+
+Requirements
+------------
+
+- DocBook XML V4.3
+ Your Linux distribution should provide an up-to-date package for this.
+
+- DocBook XSL Stylesheets (V1.68.1 as of this writing)
+ Your Linux distribution should provide a package for this.
+ If you only find an older version, try it or get the tarball
+ from »http://sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/«, install it
+ at some place and adjust some pathnames in Makefile.cfg.in
+
+- XSLT processor
+ At least »xsltproc« from libxslt/libxml2, and »Saxon« should work.
+
+- make
+ Should already be installed on your system
+
+- db2latex (http://db2latex.sourceforge.net)
+ If you want to generate PDF output you'll need this
+
+
+Usage
+-----
+- Use the "catalog.xml" file as a hint how to setup your own
+ XML catalog or edit the XSL files to use absolute pathnames.
+
+- Run 'make targets'
+ This lists the most important targets of the Makefile
+
+- Run 'make'
+ This will generate all currently supported output files
+
+- Read over 'Makefile' if you want to know more details
+
+
+Contact
+-------
+
+Contact the authors if you have any suggestions, enhancements,
+corrections, etc. Your contribution is very welcome.
+
+--
+Michael Wiedmann <mw@miwie.in-berlin.de>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/tex-refs/tex-refs-source.tar.gz b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/tex-refs/tex-refs-source.tar.gz
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..85f7e85cad8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/tex-refs/tex-refs-source.tar.gz
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/tex-refs/tex-refs.css b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/tex-refs/tex-refs.css
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c4d1e1bdc53
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/tex-refs/tex-refs.css
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+/* $Id: tex-refs.css 120 2004-03-26 20:19:43Z mw $ */
+
+body { background-color: whitesmoke;
+ }
+
+h1.title { background-color: gainsboro;
+ text-align: center;
+ font-family: sans-serif;
+ color: black;
+ }
+
+h2.title { background-color: gainsboro;
+ font-family: sans-serif;
+ color: black;
+ }
+
+h3.title { background-color: gainsboro;
+ font-family: sans-serif;
+ color: black;
+ }
+
+h4.title { background-color: gainsboro;
+ font-family: sans-serif;
+ color: black;
+ }
+h5.title { background-color: gainsboro;
+ font-family: sans-serif;
+/* font-size: small; */
+ color: black;
+ }
+h6.title { background-color: gainsboro;
+ font-family: sans-serif;
+/* font-size: x-small; */
+ font-size: small;
+ color: black;
+ }
+span.title { background-color: gainsboro;
+ font-family: sans-serif;
+/* font-size: x-small; */
+ font-size: small;
+ color: black;
+ }
+
+.title { background-color: gainsboro;
+ font-family: sans-serif;
+ }
+
+.authorgroup {
+ background-color: #EEEEEE
+ }
+
+.copyright {
+ }
+
+.legalnotice {
+ }
+
+.revhistory {
+ }
+
+.abstract {
+ margin-top: 1em
+ }
+
+.toc {
+ }
+
+.itemizedlist {
+ }
+
+.orderedlist {
+ }
+
+.variablelist {
+ }
+
+.term { background-color: #EFEFEF
+ }
+
+pre.programlisting
+{
+ background-color: #E0E0E0;
+ border: thin solid gray;
+ margin-top: 1.33ex;
+ margin-bottom: 1.33ex;
+}
+
+
+.footer-date { font-size: xx-small;
+ font-family: monospace;
+ }
+
+
+#customheader, #customfooter
+{
+ /* list of fonts provides fallbacks if a font is not present */
+ font-family: Verdana, Arial, Helvetica, Sans-Serif;
+ /* font size, relative to body font size */
+ font-size: 80%;
+
+ /* line height, relative to body font size */
+ line-height: 200%;
+
+ text-align: center;
+ vertical-align: middle;
+ color: #fff;
+ background-color: #009;
+}
+
+/* leave more space between last paragraph and footer */
+/* some browser do not add up the bottom margin of the prior element */
+/* and the top margin of the footer */
+#customfooter {
+ margin-top: 15px;
+}
+
+/* define special font for logo */
+/* list of fonts provides fallbacks in case selected fonts are not present
+*/
+.logo
+{
+ font-family: Lucida Console, Verdana, Arial, Sans-Serif;
+}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/tex-refs/tex-refs.html b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/tex-refs/tex-refs.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..34dfbf0e52c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/tex-refs/tex-refs.html
@@ -0,0 +1,14590 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN"
+ "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd">
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+<head>
+<meta content="HTML Tidy for Linux/x86 (vers 1st February 2003), see www.w3.org"
+ name="generator" />
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type"
+content="text/html; charset=us-ascii" />
+<title>References for TeX and Friends</title>
+<link rel="stylesheet" href="tex-refs.css" type="text/css" />
+<meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.66.1" />
+</head>
+<body>
+<div class="book" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h1 class="title"><a id="id2405204"></a>References for TeX and
+Friends</h1></div>
+<div>
+<div class="author">
+<h3 class="author"><span class="firstname">Michael</span>
+<span class="surname">Wiedmann</span></h3>
+<div class="affiliation">
+<div class="address">
+<p>
+<tt class="email">&lt;<a href="mailto:mw%20at%20miwie%20dot%20in-berlin%20dot%20de">
+mw&nbsp;at&nbsp;miwie&nbsp;dot&nbsp;in-berlin&nbsp;dot&nbsp;de</a>&gt;</tt></p></div></div></div></div>
+<div>
+<p class="copyright">Copyright &copy; ? Stephen Gilmore</p></div>
+<div>
+<p class="copyright">Copyright &copy; ? Torsten Martinsen</p></div>
+<div>
+<p class="copyright">Copyright &copy; 1988, 1994 Free Software
+Foundation, Inc.</p></div>
+<div>
+<p class="copyright">Copyright &copy; 1994 - 1996 Torsten
+Martinsen</p></div>
+<div>
+<p class="copyright">Copyright &copy; 2002, 2003 Peter Karp,
+Michael Wiedmann</p></div>
+<div>
+<p class="copyright">Copyright &copy; 2004, 2005 Michael
+Wiedmann</p></div>
+<div>
+<div class="legalnotice"><a id="id2451479"></a>
+<p class="legalnotice-title"><b>License</b></p>
+<p>Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
+document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
+Version 1.2 or any later version published by the Free Software
+Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and
+no Back-Cover Texts.</p></div></div>
+<div>
+<div class="revhistory">
+<table border="2" cellspacing="4" width="100%"
+summary="Revision history">
+<tr>
+<th align="left" valign="top" colspan="2"><b>Revision
+History</b></th></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">Revision 0.3.9</td>
+<td align="left">2005-05-14</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" colspan="2">Consistent naming scheme of IDs to
+ease the use of this reference for other projects; added new
+section <a href="#float" title="3.3 float">float</a> in chapter
+<a href="#latex" title="2 LaTeX">LaTeX</a>.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">Revision 0.2.0</td>
+<td align="left">2003-01-11</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" colspan="2">License changed to
+<a href="http://www.gnu.org/licenses/fdl.html" target="_top">GNU
+Free Documentation License</a>.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">Revision 0.0.1</td>
+<td align="left">2002-06-21</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" colspan="2">This version was adapted from the
+edition 1.6 of the LaTeX2e documentation, converted to DocBook XML
+using <a href="http://www.tldp.org/downloads/"
+target="_top">texi2db</a>, and further edited
+manually.</td></tr></table></div></div></div>
+<hr /></div>
+<div class="toc">
+<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="preface"><a href="#preface">Preface</a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="preface"><a href="#credits">Credits</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#tex">1 TeX</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#plaintex">1
+PlainTeX</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#plaintex-ovw">1.1
+Overview</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#latex">2 LaTeX</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#opt-latex">2.1
+Options</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#overview">2.2 Overview of LaTeX
+and Local Guide</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#commands">2.3
+Commands</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#parameters">2.4
+Parameters</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#latex-packages">3 LaTeX
+Packages</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#amsmath">3.1
+<tt class="filename">amsmath</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#dcolumn">3.2
+<tt class="filename">dcolumn</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#float">3.3
+<tt class="filename">float</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#fontenc">3.4
+<tt class="filename">fontenc</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#german">3.5
+<tt class="filename">german</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#graphics">3.6
+<tt class="filename">graphics</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#hyperref">3.7
+<tt class="filename">hyperref</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#inputenc">3.8
+<tt class="filename">inputenc</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#komascript">3.9
+<tt class="filename">KOMA-Script</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#mathpazo">3.10
+<tt class="filename">mathpazo</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#varioref">3.11
+<tt class="filename">varioref</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#small-packages">3.12 Several
+Small Packages</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#generic-packages">4 Generic
+Packages</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pictex">4.1 PiCTeX
+(tbd.)</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pstricks">4.2
+PSTricks</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#fontinst">5
+<tt class="filename">fontinst</tt> (tbd.)</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#context">6 ConTeXt
+(tbd.)</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#context-ovw">6.1
+Overview</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#texinfo">7 Texinfo
+(tbd.)</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#pdftex">2
+pdfTeX</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-options">1
+Options</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-file-line-error-style">
+1.1
+<tt class="filename">--file-line-error-style</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-fmt">1.2
+<tt class="filename">--fmt format</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-help">1.3
+<tt class="filename">--help</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-ini">1.4
+<tt class="filename">--ini</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-interaction%20mode">1.5
+<tt class="filename">--interaction mode</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-ipc">1.6
+<tt class="filename">--ipc</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-ipc-start">1.7
+<tt class="filename">--ipc-start</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-jobname-name">1.8
+<tt class="filename">--jobname name</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-kpathsea-debug">1.9
+<tt class="filename">--kpathsea-debug bitmask</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-maketex">1.10
+<tt class="filename">--maketex fmt</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-no-maketex">1.11
+<tt class="filename">--no-maketex fmt</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-output-comment">1.12
+<tt class="filename">--output-comment string</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-parse-first-line">1.13
+<tt class="filename">--parse-first-line</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-progname">1.14
+<tt class="filename">--progname name</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-recorder">1.15
+<tt class="filename">--recorder</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-shell-escape">1.16
+<tt class="filename">--shell-escape</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-translate-file">1.17
+<tt class="filename">--translate-file tcxname</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-version">1.18
+<tt class="filename">--version</tt></a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-environment">2
+Environment</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#metafont">3 Metafont
+(tbd.)</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#metapost">4
+MetaPost</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-options">1
+Options</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-file-line-error-style">
+1.1
+<tt class="filename">--file-line-error-style</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-help">1.2
+<tt class="filename">--help</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-ini">1.3
+<tt class="filename">--ini</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-intercation">1.4
+<tt class="filename">--interaction mode</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-jobname">1.5
+<tt class="filename">--jobname name</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-kpathsea-debug">1.6
+<tt class="filename">--kpathsea-debug bitmask</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-mem">1.7
+<tt class="filename">--mem mem</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-parse-first-line">1.8
+<tt class="filename">--parse-first-line</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-progname">1.9
+<tt class="filename">--progname name</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-recorder">1.10
+<tt class="filename">--recorder</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-T">1.11
+<tt class="filename">-T</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-translate-file">1.12
+<tt class="filename">--translate-file tcxname</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-troff">1.13
+<tt class="filename">--troff</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-version">1.14
+<tt class="filename">--version</tt></a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-environment">2
+Environment</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#bibtex">5
+BibTeX</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-parameters">1
+Parameters</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-command-qualifiers">2
+Command Qualifiers</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bib-files">3 bib
+files</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-string-command">3.1
+<tt class="filename">@STRING</tt> command</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-entry-format">3.2 Entry
+Format</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-entry-types">3.3 Entry
+Types</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-field-text">3.4 Field
+Text</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-field-types">3.5 Field
+Types</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bst-files">4 bst
+files</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bst-abbr">4.1
+<tt class="filename">ABBRV.BST</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bst-alpha">4.2
+<tt class="filename">ALPHA.BST</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bst-plain">4.3
+<tt class="filename">PLAIN.BST</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bst-sample">4.4
+<tt class="filename">SAMPLE.BST</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bst-unsrt">4.5
+<tt class="filename">UNSRT.BST</tt></a></span></dt></dl></dd></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#makeindex">6
+Make-Index</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-options">1
+Options</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-c">1.1
+<tt class="filename">-c</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-g">1.2
+<tt class="filename">-g</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-i">1.3
+<tt class="filename">-i</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-l">1.4
+<tt class="filename">-l</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-q">1.5
+<tt class="filename">-q</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-r">1.6
+<tt class="filename">-r</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-s-sty">1.7
+<tt class="filename">-s sty</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-o-ind">1.8
+<tt class="filename">-o ind</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-t-log">1.9
+<tt class="filename">-t log</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-p-no">1.10
+<tt class="filename">-p no</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-L">1.11
+<tt class="filename">-L</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-T">1.12
+<tt class="filename">-T</tt></a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-style-file">2 Style
+File</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-style">2.1 Input
+Style Specifiers</a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-output-style-specs">2.2
+Output Style Specifiers</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-example">3
+Example</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-ordering">4
+Ordering</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-special-effects">5
+Special Effects</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#xindy">7 xindy</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#xindy-command-list">1 Command
+List</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#xindy-command-list-processing">1.1
+Processing Commands</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#xindy-command-list-markup">1.2
+Markup Commands</a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#xindy-command-list-raw-index">1.3
+Raw Index Interface</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#xindy-invoking">2 Invoking
+xindy</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#xindy-invoking-cmdline">2.1
+Command Line Options</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#xindy-search-path">2.2 Search
+Path</a></span></dt></dl></dd></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="appendix"><a href="#appendices">A
+Appendices</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#issues">1 Bugs / Known Issues /
+Missing Features</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#about">2 About this
+Document</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#release-news">3 Release
+News</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl">4 GNU Free Documentation
+License</a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="index"><a href="#tex-refs-idx">Index</a></span></dt></dl></dd></dl></div>
+<div class="list-of-tables">
+<p><b>List of Tables</b></p>
+<dl>
+<dt>1.1 <a href="#id2521491">Options for
+<tt class="literal">\newcommand</tt></a></dt>
+<dt>1.2 <a href="#id2521690">Options for
+<tt class="literal">\newenvironment</tt></a></dt>
+<dt>1.3 <a href="#id2521896">Options for
+<tt class="literal">\newtheorem</tt></a></dt>
+<dt>1.4 <a href="#id2525205">Commands in a
+<tt class="literal">tabbing</tt> environment</a></dt>
+<dt>1.5 <a href="#id2525850">Commands used inside a
+<tt class="literal">tabular</tt> environment</a></dt>
+<dt>1.6 <a href="#id2526898">Standard styles distributed with
+BibTeX</a></dt>
+<dt>1.7 <a href="#id2529997">Three environments that put LaTeX in
+math mode</a></dt>
+<dt>1.8 <a href="#id2530391">Math Miscellany</a></dt>
+<dt>1.9 <a href="#id2538486">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>1.10 <a href="#id2539011">Standard type size commands</a></dt>
+<dt>1.11 <a href="#id2539271">Low-level font commands</a></dt>
+<dt>1.12 <a href="#id2559775">Special coordinates and
+angles</a></dt></dl></div>
+<div class="preface" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title">
+<a id="preface"></a>Preface</h2></div></div></div>
+<p class="db2latex:noindent">LaTeX2e is a document preparation
+system implemented as a macro package for Donald E. Knuth's TeX
+typesetting program.</p>
+<p class="db2latex:noindent">LaTeX was originally conceived by
+Leslie Lamport.</p>
+<p class="db2latex:noindent">This updated LaTeX reference is by no
+means complete, but it's a first step towards a more complete LaTeX
+reference! We welcome if we'll get pointed to missing commands or
+even better when you make additions and further improvements and
+send them to the authors.</p>
+<p class="db2latex:noindent"><a href="http://www.tug.org"
+target="_top">TUG (TeX User Group)</a> and
+<a href="http://www.dante.de" target="_top">DANTE (German TeX User
+Group)</a> both have excellent FAQ's which answer many questions or
+give great pointers to additional resources both on the internet or
+in books. Most if not all missing packages can also be found on the
+CTAN servers.</p>
+<p class="db2latex:noindent">This reference is not meant to replace
+the package documentation or the standard literature like the LaTeX
+handbook and the LaTeX companion. Look there for detailed
+descriptions of the commands and even mostly more options and
+examples.</p>
+<p class="db2latex:noindent">The authors intend to extend this
+documentation to other TeX related packages (e.g. ConTeXt,
+MetaPost, Metafont, etc.). Contributions are very
+welcome!</p></div>
+<div class="preface" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title">
+<a id="credits"></a>Credits</h2></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2450500" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The following people have contributed substantial parts to this
+documentation project or helped in some other way (listed
+alphabetically):</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>
+<p>Karl Berry</p>
+<a id="id2450525" class="indexterm"></a></li>
+<li>
+<p>Wolfgang Borgert</p>
+<a id="id2450544" class="indexterm"></a></li>
+<li>
+<p>Ramon Casellas</p>
+<a id="id2450563" class="indexterm"></a></li>
+<li>
+<p>Holger Danielsson</p>
+<a id="id2450582" class="indexterm"></a></li>
+<li>
+<p>James Devenish</p>
+<a id="id2450602" class="indexterm"></a></li>
+<li>
+<p>Hubert Gaesslein</p>
+<a id="id2450621" class="indexterm"></a></li>
+<li>
+<p>Peter Karp</p>
+<a id="id2450640" class="indexterm"></a></li>
+<li>
+<p>Rolf Niepraschk</p>
+<a id="id2450659" class="indexterm"></a></li>
+<li>
+<p>Hans Fredrik Nordhaug</p>
+<a id="id2450681" class="indexterm"></a></li>
+<li>
+<p>Simon Pepping</p>
+<a id="id2450700" class="indexterm"></a></li>
+<li>
+<p>Bob Stayton</p>
+<a id="id2450719" class="indexterm"></a></li>
+<li>
+<p>Herbert Voss</p>
+<a id="id2450739" class="indexterm"></a></li></ul></div></div>
+<div class="chapter" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title">
+<a id="tex"></a>Chapter&nbsp;1.&nbsp;TeX</h2></div></div></div>
+<div class="toc">
+<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#plaintex">1
+PlainTeX</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#plaintex-ovw">1.1
+Overview</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#latex">2 LaTeX</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#opt-latex">2.1
+Options</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#overview">2.2 Overview of LaTeX
+and Local Guide</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#commands">2.3
+Commands</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#parameters">2.4
+Parameters</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#latex-packages">3 LaTeX
+Packages</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#amsmath">3.1
+<tt class="filename">amsmath</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#dcolumn">3.2
+<tt class="filename">dcolumn</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#float">3.3
+<tt class="filename">float</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#fontenc">3.4
+<tt class="filename">fontenc</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#german">3.5
+<tt class="filename">german</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#graphics">3.6
+<tt class="filename">graphics</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#hyperref">3.7
+<tt class="filename">hyperref</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#inputenc">3.8
+<tt class="filename">inputenc</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#komascript">3.9
+<tt class="filename">KOMA-Script</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#mathpazo">3.10
+<tt class="filename">mathpazo</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#varioref">3.11
+<tt class="filename">varioref</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#small-packages">3.12 Several
+Small Packages</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#generic-packages">4 Generic
+Packages</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pictex">4.1 PiCTeX
+(tbd.)</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pstricks">4.2
+PSTricks</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#fontinst">5
+<tt class="filename">fontinst</tt> (tbd.)</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#context">6 ConTeXt
+(tbd.)</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#context-ovw">6.1
+Overview</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#texinfo">7 Texinfo
+(tbd.)</a></span></dt></dl></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="plaintex"></a>1
+PlainTeX</h2></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2450802" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="plaintex-ovw"></a>1.1
+Overview</h3></div></div></div>
+<p>For a really excellent reference of all TeX primitive control
+sequences see David Bausum's<a id="id2450821"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<a href="http://www.tug.org/utilities/plain/cseq.html"
+target="_top"><span class="emphasis"><em>TeX Primitive Control
+Sequences</em></span></a>.</p></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="latex"></a>2
+LaTeX</h2></div></div></div>
+<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
+<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
+<p>The original file <tt class="filename">latex2e.texi</tt>
+contains the following copyright and permission notice:</p>
+<p>&ldquo;<span class="quote">Permission is granted to make and
+distribute verbatim copies of this manual provided the copyright
+notice and this permission notice are preserved on all
+copies.</span>&rdquo;</p>
+<p>&ldquo;<span class="quote">Permission is granted to copy and
+distribute modified versions of this manual under the conditions
+for verbatim copying, provided that the entire resulting derived
+work is distributed under the terms of a permission notice
+identical to this one.</span>&rdquo;</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="opt-latex"></a>2.1
+Options</h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2450904" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>LaTeX understands the following command line options.</p>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-file-line-error-style"></a>2.1.1
+<tt class="filename">-file-line-error-style</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2450936" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Print error messages in the form
+<tt class="literal">file:line:error</tt>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-fmt"></a>2.1.2
+<tt class="filename">-fmt=FMTNAME</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2450977" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Use <tt class="literal">FMTMAME</tt> instead of program name or
+a %&amp; line.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-ini"></a>2.1.3
+<tt class="filename">-ini</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2451019" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Be <span><b class="command">initex</b></span>, for dumping
+formats; this is implicitly true if the program is called as
+<span><b class="command">initex</b></span>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-interaction mode"></a>2.1.4
+<tt class="filename">-interaction=STRING</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2519533" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Set interaction mode
+(<tt class="literal">STRING=batchmode/nonstopmode/scrollmode/errorstopmode</tt>).</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-ipc"></a>2.1.5
+<tt class="filename">-ipc</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2519571" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Send DVI output to a socket as well as the usual output
+file.</p>
+<p>Note: not available on all systems.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-ipc-start"></a>2.1.6
+<tt class="filename">-ipc-start</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2519609" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>As <tt class="literal">-ipc</tt>, and also start the server at
+the other end.</p>
+<p>Note: not available on all systems.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-jobname-name"></a>2.1.7
+<tt class="filename">-jobname=STRING</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2519656" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Set the job name to <tt class="literal">STRING</tt>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-kpathsea-debug"></a>2.1.8
+<tt class="filename">-kpathsea-debug=NUMBER</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2519697" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bits of
+<tt class="literal">NUMBER</tt>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-no-maketex"></a>2.1.9
+<tt class="filename">[-no]-maketex=FMT</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2519741" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Disable/enable <span><b class="command">mktexFMT</b></span>
+generation (FMT=tex/tfm).</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-mltex"></a>2.1.10
+<tt class="filename">-mltex</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2519782" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Enable MLTeX extensions such as
+<tt class="literal">\charsubdef</tt>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-output-comment"></a>2.1.11
+<tt class="filename">-output-comment=STRING</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2519825" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>use <tt class="literal">STRING</tt> for DVI file comment instead
+of date.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-parse-first-line"></a>2.1.12
+<tt class="filename">-parse-first-line</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2519867" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Parse of the first line of the input file.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-progname"></a>2.1.13
+<tt class="filename">-progname=STRING</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2519903" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Set program (and fmt) name to
+<tt class="literal">STRING</tt>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-recorder"></a>2.1.14
+<tt class="filename">-recorder</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2519945" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Enable filename recorder.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-shell-escape"></a>2.1.15
+<tt class="filename">-shell-escape</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2519982" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Enable <tt class="literal">\write18{SHELL
+COMMAND}</tt>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-src-specials"></a>2.1.16
+<tt class="filename">-src-specials</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2520024" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Insert source specials into the DVI file.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-src-specials-where"></a>2.1.17
+<tt class="filename">-src-specials=WHERE</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2520061" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Insert source specials in certain places of the DVI file.
+<tt class="literal">WHERE</tt> is a comma-separated value list:
+<tt class="literal">cr display hbox math par parend
+vbox</tt>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="opt-latex-translate-file-tcxname"></a>2.1.18
+<tt class="filename">-translate-file=TCXNAME</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2520111" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Use the <tt class="literal">TCX</tt> file
+<tt class="literal">TCXNAME</tt>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-help"></a>2.1.19
+<tt class="filename">-help</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2520158" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Display this help and exit.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-version"></a>2.1.20
+<tt class="filename">-version</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2520194" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Output version information and exit.</p></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="overview"></a>2.2 Overview of LaTeX and
+Local Guide</h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2520232" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2520240"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The LaTeX command typesets a file of text using the TeX program
+and the LaTeX Macro package for TeX. To be more specific, it
+processes an input file containing the text of a document with
+interspersed commands that describe how the text should be
+formatted. It produces at least three files as output:</p>
+<div class="orderedlist">
+<ol type="1">
+<li>
+<p>A <span class="emphasis"><em>Device Independent</em></span>, or
+<tt class="filename">.dvi</tt> file. This contains commands that
+can be translated into commands for a variety of output devices.
+You can view the output of LaTeX by using a program such as
+<tt class="literal">xdvi</tt>, which actually uses the
+<tt class="filename">.dvi</tt> file.</p></li>
+<li>
+<p>A <span class="emphasis"><em>transcript</em></span> or
+<tt class="filename">.log</tt> file that contains summary
+information and diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in
+the input file.</p></li>
+<li>
+<p>An <span class="emphasis"><em>auxiliary</em></span> or
+<tt class="filename">.aux</tt> file. This is used by LaTeX itself,
+for things such as sectioning.</p></li></ol></div>
+<p>For a description of what goes on inside TeX, you should consult
+<i class="citetitle">The TeXbook</i> by Donald E. Knuth, ISBN
+0-201-13448-9, published jointly by the American Mathematical
+Society and Addison-Wesley Publishing Company.</p>
+<p>For a description of LaTeX, you should consult:</p>
+<p><i class="citetitle">LaTeX: A Document Preparation System</i>,
+by Leslie Lamport,<a id="id2520380" class="indexterm"></a>
+Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 2nd edition, 1994.</p>
+<p><i class="citetitle">The LaTeX Companion</i>, by Michel
+Goossens,<a id="id2520401" class="indexterm"></a> Frank Mittelbach,
+<a id="id2520410" class="indexterm"></a> and Alexander
+Samarin,<a id="id2520420" class="indexterm"></a> Addison-Wesley,
+1994.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="commands"></a>2.3
+Commands</h3></div></div></div>
+<p>A LaTeX command begins with the command name, which consists of
+a <tt class="literal">\</tt> followed by either (a) a string of
+letters or (b) a single non-letter. Arguments contained in square
+brackets, <tt class="literal">[]</tt>, are optional while arguments
+contained in braces, <tt class="literal">{}</tt>, are required.</p>
+<p>NOTE: LaTeX is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case
+unless explicitly directed to do otherwise.</p>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="counters"></a>2.3.1
+Counters</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2520496" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2520502"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with
+it. The name of the counter is the same as the name of the
+environment or command that produces the number, except with no
+<tt class="literal">\</tt> (<tt class="literal">enumi</tt> -
+<tt class="literal">enumiv</tt> are used for the nested enumerate
+environment). Below is a list of the counters used in LaTeX's
+standard document classes to control numbering.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+part paragraph figure enumi
+chapter subparagraph table enumii
+section page footnote enumiii
+subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
+subsubsection
+</pre>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-addtocounter"></a><tt class="literal">\addtocounter</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2520566" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\addtocounter</tt> command increments
+the <tt class="literal">counter</tt> by the amount specified by the
+<tt class="literal">value</tt> argument. The
+<tt class="literal">value</tt> argument can be negative.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-alph-title"></a><tt class="literal">\alph{counter}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2520615" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2520622"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>This command causes the value of the
+<tt class="literal">counter</tt> to be printed in alphabetic
+characters. The <tt class="literal">\alph</tt> command uses lower
+case alphabetic alphabetic characters, i.e., <tt class="literal">a,
+b, c...</tt> while the <tt class="literal">\Alph</tt> command uses
+upper case alphabetic characters, i.e., <tt class="literal">A, B,
+C...</tt>.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-arabic-title"></a><tt class="literal">\arabic{counter}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2520679" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\arabic</tt> command causes the value of
+the <tt class="literal">counter</tt> to be printed in Arabic
+numbers, i.e., <tt class="literal">3</tt>.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-fnsymbol-title"></a><tt class="literal">\fnsymbol{counter}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2520721" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\fnsymbol</tt> command causes the value
+of the <tt class="literal">counter</tt> to be printed in a specific
+sequence of nine symbols that can be used for numbering
+footnotes.</p>
+<p>NB. <tt class="literal">counter</tt> must have a value between 1
+and 9 inclusive.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-newcounter-title"></a><tt class="literal">\newcounter{foo}[counter]</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2520769" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2520776"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\newcounter</tt> command defines a new
+counter named <tt class="literal">foo</tt>. The counter is
+initialized to zero.</p>
+<p>The optional argument <tt class="literal">[counter]</tt> causes
+the counter <tt class="literal">foo</tt> to be reset whenever the
+counter named in the optional argument is incremented.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-refstepcounter-title"></a><tt class="literal">\refstepcounter{counter}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2520830" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\refstepcounter</tt> command works like
+<tt class="literal">\stepcounter</tt>. See
+<a href="#cmd-stepcounter-title">\stepcounter</a>, except it also
+defines the current <tt class="literal">\ref</tt> value to be the
+result of <tt class="literal">\thecounter</tt>.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-roman-title"></a><tt class="literal">\roman{counter}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2520888" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2520894"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>This command causes the value of the
+<tt class="literal">counter</tt> to be printed in Roman numerals.
+The <tt class="literal">\roman</tt> command uses lower case Roman
+numerals, i.e., <tt class="literal">i, ii, iii...</tt>, while the
+<tt class="literal">\Roman</tt> command uses upper case Roman
+numerals, i.e., <tt class="literal">I, II, III...</tt>.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-stepcounter-title"></a><tt class="literal">\stepcounter{counter}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2520951" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\stepcounter</tt> command adds one to
+the <tt class="literal">counter</tt> and resets all subsidiary
+counters.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-setcounter-title"></a><tt class="literal">\setcounter{counter}{value}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2520988" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2520995"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\setcounter</tt> command sets the value
+of the <tt class="literal">counter</tt> to that specified by the
+<tt class="literal">value</tt> argument.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-usecounter-title"></a><tt class="literal">\usecounter{counter}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2521038" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\usecounter</tt> command is used in the
+second argument of the <tt class="literal">list</tt> environment to
+allow the counter specified to be used to number the list
+items.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-value-title"></a><tt class="literal">\value{counter}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2521076" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2521083"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\value</tt> command produces the value
+of the <tt class="literal">counter</tt> named in the mandatory
+argument. It can be used where LaTeX expects an integer or number,
+such as the second argument of a
+<tt class="literal">\setcounter</tt> or
+<tt class="literal">\addtocounter</tt> command, or in:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\hspace{\value{foo}\parindent}
+</pre>
+<p>It is useful for doing arithmetic with counters.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="cross-references"></a>2.3.2 Cross
+References</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2521150" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to
+refer the reader to them, as in <span class="emphasis"><em>See
+Figure 3 for more details.</em></span> A smarter version of the
+cross reference commands is available in the package
+<a href="#varioref"
+title="3.11 varioref"><tt class="literal">varioref</tt></a>.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-label-title"></a><tt class="literal">\label{key}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2521192" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>A <tt class="literal">\label</tt> command appearing in ordinary
+text assigns to the <tt class="literal">key</tt> the number of the
+current sectional unit; one appearing inside a numbered environment
+assigns that number to the <tt class="literal">key</tt>.</p>
+<p>A <tt class="literal">key</tt> can consist of any sequence of
+letters, digits, or punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase
+letters are different.</p>
+<p>To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name, it
+is common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix
+separated by a colon. The prefixes conventionally used are</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">cha</tt> for chapters</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">sec</tt> for lower-level sectioning
+commands</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">fig</tt> for figures</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">tab</tt> for tables</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">eq</tt> for equations</li></ul></div>
+<p>Thus, a label for a figure would look like
+<tt class="literal">fig:bandersnatch</tt>.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-pageref"></a><tt class="literal">\pageref{key}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2521325" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2521332"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\pageref</tt> command produces the page
+number of the place in the text where the corresponding
+<tt class="literal">\label</tt> command appears. ie. where
+<tt class="literal">\label{key}</tt> appears. For a smart version
+see
+<a href="#cmd-vpageref"><tt class="literal">\vpageref</tt></a>.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-ref-title"></a><tt class="literal">\ref{key}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2521388" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2521395"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\ref</tt> command produces the number of
+the sectional unit, equation number, ... of the corresponding
+<tt class="literal">\label</tt> command. For a smart version see
+<a href="#cmd-vref">\vref</a>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="definitions"></a>2.3.3
+Definitions</h4></div></div></div>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-newcommand-title"></a><tt class="literal">\newcommand</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2521458" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2521465"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2521472" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\newcommand{cmd}[args]{definition}
+\newcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition}
+\renewcommand{cmd}[args]{definition}
+\renewcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition}
+</pre>
+<p>These commands define (or redefine) a command.</p>
+<div class="table"><a id="id2521491"></a>
+<p class="title"><b>Table&nbsp;1.1.&nbsp;Options for
+<tt class="literal">\newcommand</tt></b></p>
+<table summary="Options for \newcommand" border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">cmd</td>
+<td align="justify">A command name beginning with a
+<tt class="literal">\</tt>. For
+<tt class="literal">\newcommand</tt> it must not be already defined
+and must not begin with <tt class="literal">\end</tt>; for
+<tt class="literal">\renewcommand</tt> it must already be
+defined.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">args</td>
+<td align="justify">An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of
+arguments of the command being defined. The default is for the
+command to have no arguments.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">def</td>
+<td align="justify">If this optional parameter is present, it means
+that the command's first argument is optional. The default value of
+the optional argument is <tt class="literal">def</tt>.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">definition</td>
+<td align="justify">The text to be substituted for every occurrence
+of <tt class="literal">cmd</tt>; a parameter of the form
+<tt class="literal">#n</tt> in <tt class="literal">cmd</tt> is
+replaced by the text of the nth argument when this substitution
+takes place.</td></tr></tbody></table></div>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-newenvironment-title"></a><tt class="literal">\newenvironment</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2521657" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2521664"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2521671" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\newenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}
+\newenvironment{nam}[args][default]{begdef}{enddef}
+\renewenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}
+</pre>
+<p>These commands define or redefine an environment.</p>
+<div class="table"><a id="id2521690"></a>
+<p class="title"><b>Table&nbsp;1.2.&nbsp;Options for
+<tt class="literal">\newenvironment</tt></b></p>
+<table summary="Options for \newenvironment" border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">nam</td>
+<td align="justify">The name of the environment. For
+<tt class="literal">\newenvironment</tt> there must be no currently
+defined environment by that name, and the command
+<tt class="literal">\nam</tt> must be undefined. For
+<tt class="literal">\renewenvironment</tt> the environment must
+already be defined.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">args</td>
+<td align="justify">An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of
+arguments of the newly-defined environment. The default is no
+arguments. Arguments can only be used in te
+<tt class="literal">{begdef}</tt> part.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">default</td>
+<td align="justify">If this is specified, the first argument is
+optional, and <tt class="literal">default</tt> gives the default
+value for that argument.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">begdef</td>
+<td align="justify">The text substituted for every occurrence of
+<tt class="literal">\begin{nam}</tt>; a parameter of the form
+<tt class="literal">#n</tt> in <tt class="literal">cmd</tt> is
+replaced by the text of the nth argument when this substitution
+takes place.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">enddef</td>
+<td align="justify">The text substituted for every occurrence of
+<tt class="literal">\end{nam}</tt>. It may not contain any argument
+parameters.</td></tr></tbody></table></div>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-newtheorem-title"></a><tt class="literal">\newtheorem</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2521865" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2521872"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2521878" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\newtheorem{env_name}{caption}[within]
+\newtheorem{env_name}[numbered_like]{caption}
+</pre>
+<p>This command defines a theorem-like environment.</p>
+<div class="table"><a id="id2521896"></a>
+<p class="title"><b>Table&nbsp;1.3.&nbsp;Options for
+<tt class="literal">\newtheorem</tt></b></p>
+<table summary="Options for \newtheorem" border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">env_name</td>
+<td align="justify">The name of the environment to be defined. A
+string of letters. It must not be the name of an existing
+environment or counter.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">caption</td>
+<td align="justify">The text printed at the beginning of the
+environment, right before the number. This may simply say
+<span class="emphasis"><em>Theorem</em></span>, for
+example.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">within</td>
+<td align="justify">The name of an already defined counter, usually
+of a sectional unit. Provides a means of resetting the new theorem
+counter <span class="bold"><b>within</b></span> the sectional
+unit.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">numbered_like</td>
+<td align="justify">The name of an already defined theorem-like
+environment.</td></tr></tbody></table></div>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\newtheorem</tt> command may have at
+most one optional argument.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-newfont-title"></a><tt class="literal">\newfont</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2522022" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2522028"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2522035" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\newfont{cmd}{font_name}</tt></p>
+<p>Defines the command name <tt class="literal">cmd</tt>, which
+must not be currently defined, to be a declaration that selects the
+font named <tt class="literal">font_name</tt> to be the current
+font.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="document-classes"></a>2.3.4 Document
+Classes</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2522083" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2522090"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2522097"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2522104"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2522110"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2522117"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2522124" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Valid LaTeX document classes include:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>article</li>
+<li>report</li>
+<li>letter</li>
+<li>book</li>
+<li>slides</li></ul></div>
+<p>Other document classes are often available. See
+<a href="#overview"
+title="2.2 Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide ">Overview</a>, for
+details. They are selected with the following command:</p>
+<p><tt class="literal">\documentclass [options] {class}</tt></p>
+<p>All the standard classes (except slides) accept the following
+options for selecting the typeface size
+(<tt class="literal">10pt</tt> is default):</p>
+<p><tt class="literal">10pt, 11pt, 12pt</tt></p>
+<p>All classes accept these options for selecting the paper size
+(default is letter):</p>
+<p>a4paper, a5paper, b5paper, letterpaper, legalpaper,
+executivepaper</p>
+<p>Miscellaneous options:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>landscape --- selects landscape format. Default is
+portrait.</li>
+<li>titlepage, notitlepage --- selects if there should be a
+separate title page.</li>
+<li>leqno --- equation number on left side of equations. Default is
+right side.</li>
+<li>fleqn --- displayed formulas flush left. Default is
+centered.</li>
+<li>openbib --- use <span class="emphasis"><em>open</em></span>
+bibliography format.</li>
+<li>draft, final --- mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a rule.
+Default is final.</li></ul></div>
+<p>These options are not available with the slides class:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>oneside, twoside --- selects one- or twosided layout. Default
+is oneside, except for the book class.</li>
+<li>openright, openany --- determines if a chapter should start on
+a right-hand page. Default is openright for book.</li>
+<li>onecolumn, twocolumn --- one or two columns. Defaults to one
+column.</li></ul></div>
+<p>The slides class offers the option
+<tt class="literal">clock</tt> for printing the time at the bottom
+of each note.</p>
+<p>If you specify more than one option, they must be separated by a
+comma.</p>
+<p>Additional packages are loaded by a</p>
+<p><a id="usepackage-linkend"></a>
+<tt class="literal">\usepackage[options]{pkg}</tt>
+<a id="id2522347" class="indexterm"></a></p>
+<p>command. If you specify more than one package, they must be
+separated by a comma. <a id="id2522359" class="indexterm"></a>
+<a id="id2522365" class="indexterm"></a></p>
+<p>Any options given in the <tt class="literal">\documentclass</tt>
+command that are unknown by the selected document class are passed
+on to the packages loaded with
+<tt class="literal">\usepackage</tt>. <a id="id2522390"
+class="indexterm"></a> <a id="id2522397" class="indexterm"></a></p>
+<a id="id2522405" class="indexterm"></a></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="layout"></a>2.3.5
+Layout</h4></div></div></div>
+<p>Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the
+page.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-flushbottom-title"></a><tt class="literal">\flushbottom</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2522444" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\flushbottom</tt> declaration makes all
+text pages the same height, adding extra vertical space when
+necessary to fill out the page.</p>
+<p>This is the standard if twocolumn mode is selected.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-onecolumn-title"></a><tt class="literal">\onecolumn</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2522480" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\onecolumn</tt> declaration starts a new
+page and produces single-column output.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-raggedbottom-title"></a><tt class="literal">\raggedbottom</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2522511" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\raggedbottom</tt> declaration makes all
+pages the height of the text on that page. No extra vertical space
+is added.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-twocolumn-title"></a><tt class="literal">\twocolumn</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2522542" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2522549"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\twocolumn[text]</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\twocolumn</tt> declaration starts a new
+page and produces two-column output. If the optional
+<tt class="literal">text</tt> argument is present, it is typeset in
+one-column mode.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="env-latex"></a>2.3.6
+Environments</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2522598" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2522605"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2522612" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>LaTeX provides a number of different paragraph-making
+environments. Each environment begins and ends in the same
+manner.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{environment-name}
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{environment-name}
+</pre>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-array"></a>array</h5>
+<a id="id2522642" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2522649"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{array}{col1col2...coln}
+column 1 entry &amp; column 2 entry ... &amp; column n entry \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{array}
+</pre>
+<p>Math arrays are produced with the array environment. It has a
+single mandatory argument describing the number of columns and the
+alignment within them. Each column, <tt class="literal">coln</tt>,
+is specified by a single letter that tells how items in that row
+should be formatted.</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">c</tt> --- for centered</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">l</tt> --- for flush left</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">r</tt> --- for flush right</li></ul></div>
+<p>Column entries must be separated by an
+<tt class="literal">&amp;</tt>. Column entries may include other
+LaTeX commands. Each row of the array must be terminated with the
+string <tt class="literal">\\</tt>.</p>
+<p>Note that the <tt class="literal">array</tt> environment can
+only be used in math mode, so normally it is used inside an
+<tt class="literal">equation</tt> environment.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="env-center"></a><tt class="literal">center</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2522771" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2522778"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{center}
+Text on line 1 \\
+Text on line 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{center}
+</pre>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">center</tt> environment allows you to
+create a paragraph consisting of lines that are centered within the
+left and right margins on the current page. Each line must be
+terminated with the string <tt class="literal">\\</tt>.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-centering"></a><tt class="literal">\centering</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2522824" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2522831"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2522837" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>This declaration corresponds to the
+<tt class="literal">center</tt> environment. This declaration can
+be used inside an environment such as
+<tt class="literal">quote</tt> or in a
+<tt class="literal">parbox</tt>. The text of a figure or table can
+be centered on the page by putting a
+<tt class="literal">\centering</tt> command at the beginning of the
+figure or table environment.</p>
+<p>Unlike the <tt class="literal">center</tt> environment, the
+<tt class="literal">\centering</tt> command does not start a new
+paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph units. To
+affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the declaration must
+contain the blank line or <tt class="literal">\end</tt> command (of
+an environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="env-description"></a><tt class="literal">description</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2522919" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2522926"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{description}
+\item [label] First item
+\item [label] Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{description}
+</pre>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">description</tt> environment is used to
+make labelled lists. The <tt class="literal">label</tt> is bold
+face and flushed right.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="env-enumerate"></a><tt class="literal">enumerate</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2522970" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2522977"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item First item
+\item Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{enumerate}
+</pre>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">enumerate</tt> environment produces a
+numbered list. Enumerations can be nested within one another, up to
+four levels deep. They can also be nested within other
+paragraph-making environments.</p>
+<p>Each item of an enumerated list begins with an
+<tt class="literal">\item</tt> command. There must be at least one
+<tt class="literal">\item</tt> command within the environment.</p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">enumerate</tt> environment uses the
+<tt class="literal">enumi</tt> through
+<tt class="literal">enumiv</tt> counters (see <a href="#counters"
+title="2.3.1 Counters">Counters</a>). The type of numbering can be
+changed by redefining <tt class="literal">\theenumi</tt> etc.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="env-eqnarray"></a><tt class="literal">eqnarray</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2523071" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2523078"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2523085" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{eqnarray}
+math formula 1 \\
+math formula 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{eqnarray}
+</pre>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">eqnarray</tt> environment is used to
+display a sequence of equations or inequalities. It is very much
+like a three-column <tt class="literal">array</tt> environment,
+with consecutive rows separated by <tt class="literal">\\</tt> and
+consecutive items within a row separated by an
+<tt class="literal">&amp;</tt>.</p>
+<p>An equation number is placed on every line unless that line has
+a <tt class="literal">\nonumber</tt> command.</p>
+<a id="id2523140" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The command <tt class="literal">\lefteqn</tt> is used for
+splitting long formulas across lines. It typesets its argument in
+display style flush left in a box of zero width.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="env-equation"></a><tt class="literal">equation</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2523173" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2523180"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2523187" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{equation}
+ math formula
+\end{equation}
+</pre>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">equation</tt> environment centers your
+equation on the page and places the equation number in the right
+margin.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="env-figure"></a><tt class="literal">figure</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2523223" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2523230"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{figure}[placement]
+
+ body of the figure
+
+\caption{figure title}
+\end{figure}
+</pre>
+<a id="id2523244" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and
+are usually <span class="emphasis"><em>floated</em></span> to a
+convenient place, like the top of a page. Figures will not be split
+between two pages.</p>
+<p>The optional argument <tt class="literal">[placement]</tt>
+determines where LaTeX will try to place your figure. There are
+four places where LaTeX can possibly put a float:</p>
+<div class="orderedlist">
+<ol type="1">
+<li>
+<p><tt class="literal">h</tt> (Here) - at the position in the text
+where the figure environment appears.</p></li>
+<li>
+<p><tt class="literal">t</tt> (Top) - at the top of a text
+page.</p></li>
+<li>
+<p><tt class="literal">b</tt> (Bottom) - at the bottom of a text
+page.</p></li>
+<li>
+<p><tt class="literal">p</tt> (Page of floats) - on a separate
+float page, which is a page containing no text, only
+floats.</p></li></ol></div>
+<p>The standard report and article classes use the default
+placement <tt class="literal">tbp</tt>.</p>
+<p>The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX
+commands, etc. you wish. The <tt class="literal">\caption</tt>
+command allows you to title your figure.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="env-flushleft"></a><tt class="literal">flushleft</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2523376" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2523383"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2523390" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{flushleft}
+Text on line 1 \\
+Text on line 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{flushleft}
+</pre>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">flushleft</tt> environment allows you to
+create a paragraph consisting of lines that are flushed left, to
+the left-hand margin. Each line must be terminated with the string
+<tt class="literal">\\</tt>.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-raggedright"></a><tt class="literal">\raggedright</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2523435" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2523442"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2523449"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2523456" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>This declaration corresponds to the
+<tt class="literal">flushleft</tt> environment. This declaration
+can be used inside an environment such as
+<tt class="literal">quote</tt> or in a
+<tt class="literal">parbox</tt>.</p>
+<p>Unlike the <tt class="literal">flushleft</tt> environment, the
+<tt class="literal">\raggedright</tt> command does not start a new
+paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph units. To
+affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the declaration must
+contain the blank line or <tt class="literal">\end</tt> command (of
+an environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="env-flushright"></a><tt class="literal">flushright</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2523530" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2523537"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2523544" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{flushright}
+Text on line 1 \\
+Text on line 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{flushright}
+</pre>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">flushright</tt> environment allows you
+to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are flushed right,
+to the right-hand margin. Each line must be terminated with the
+string <tt class="literal">\\</tt>.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-raggedleft"></a><tt class="literal">\raggedleft</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2523590" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2523597"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2523604"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2523611" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>This declaration corresponds to the
+<tt class="literal">flushright</tt> environment. This declaration
+can be used inside an environment such as
+<tt class="literal">quote</tt> or in a
+<tt class="literal">parbox</tt>.</p>
+<p>Unlike the <tt class="literal">flushright</tt> environment, the
+<tt class="literal">\raggedleft</tt> command does not start a new
+paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph units. To
+affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the declaration must
+contain the blank line or <tt class="literal">\end</tt> command (of
+an environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="env-itemize"></a><tt class="literal">itemize</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2523684" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2523690"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2523697" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{itemize}
+\item First item
+\item Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{itemize}
+</pre>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">itemize</tt> environment produces a
+<span class="emphasis"><em>bulleted</em></span> list. Itemizations
+can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can
+also be nested within other paragraph-making environments.</p>
+<p>Each item of an <tt class="literal">itemized</tt> list begins
+with an <tt class="literal">\item</tt> command. There must be at
+least one <tt class="literal">\item</tt> command within the
+environment.</p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">itemize</tt> environment uses the
+<tt class="literal">itemi</tt> through
+<tt class="literal">itemiv</tt> counters (see <a href="#counters"
+title="2.3.1 Counters">Counters</a>). The type of numbering can be
+changed by redefining <tt class="literal">\theitemi</tt> etc.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="env-letter"></a><tt class="literal">letter</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2523799" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>This environment is used for creating letters. See
+<a href="#letters" title="2.3.9 Letters">Letters</a>.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="env-list"></a><tt class="literal">list</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2523830" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2523837"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">list</tt> environment is a generic
+environment which is used for defining many of the more specific
+environments. It is seldom used in documents, but often in
+macros.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{list}{label}{spacing}
+\item First item
+\item Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{list}
+</pre>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">{label}</tt> argument specifies how
+items should be labelled. This argument is a piece of text that is
+inserted in a box to form the label. This argument can and usually
+does contain other LaTeX commands.</p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">{spacing}</tt> argument contains
+commands to change the spacing parameters for the list. This
+argument will most often be null, i.e.,
+<tt class="literal">{}</tt>. This will select all default spacing
+which should suffice for most cases.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="env-minipage"></a><tt class="literal">minipage</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2523912" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2523919"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2523926"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2523933" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{minipage}[position][height][inner-pos]{width}
+ text
+\end{minipage}
+</pre>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">minipage</tt> environment is similar to
+a <tt class="literal">\parbox</tt> command. It takes the same
+optional <tt class="literal">position</tt> argument and mandatory
+<tt class="literal">width</tt> argument. You may use other
+paragraph-making environments inside a minipage.</p>
+<p>Footnotes in a <tt class="literal">minipage</tt> environment are
+handled in a way that is particularly useful for putting footnotes
+in figures or tables. A <tt class="literal">\footnote</tt> or
+<tt class="literal">\footnotetext</tt> command puts the footnote at
+the bottom of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page,
+and it uses the <tt class="literal">mpfootnote</tt> counter instead
+of the ordinary <tt class="literal">footnote</tt> counter See
+<a href="#counters" title="2.3.1 Counters">Counters</a>.</p>
+<p>NOTE: Don't put one minipage inside another if you are using
+footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong
+minipage.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="env-picture"></a><tt class="literal">picture</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2524040" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2524047"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2524054" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset)
+ .
+ .
+ picture commands
+ .
+ .
+\end{picture}
+</pre>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">picture</tt> environment allows you to
+create just about any kind of picture you want containing text,
+lines, arrows and circles. You tell LaTeX where to put things in
+the picture by specifying their coordinates. A coordinate is a
+number that may have a decimal point and a minus sign --- a number
+like <tt class="literal">5</tt>, <tt class="literal">2.3</tt> or
+<tt class="literal">-3.1416</tt>. A coordinate specifies a length
+in multiples of the unit length
+<tt class="literal">\unitlength</tt>, so if
+<tt class="literal">\unitlength</tt> has been set to
+<tt class="literal">1cm</tt>, then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a
+length of 2.54 centimetres. You can change the value of
+<tt class="literal">\unitlength</tt> anywhere you want, using the
+<tt class="literal">\setlength</tt> command, but strange things
+will happen if you try changing it inside the picture
+environment.</p>
+<p>A position is a pair of coordinates, such as
+<tt class="literal">(2.4,-5)</tt>, specifying the point with
+x-coordinate <tt class="literal">2.4</tt> and y-coordinate
+<tt class="literal">-5</tt>. Coordinates are specified in the usual
+way with respect to an origin, which is normally at the lower-left
+corner of the picture. Note that when a position appears as an
+argument, it is not enclosed in braces; the parentheses serve to
+delimit the argument.</p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">picture</tt> environment has one
+mandatory argument, which is a <tt class="literal">position</tt>.
+It specifies the size of the picture. The environment produces a
+rectangular box with width and height determined by this argument's
+x- and y-coordinates.</p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">picture</tt> environment also has an
+optional <tt class="literal">position</tt> argument, following the
+<tt class="literal">size</tt> argument, that can change the origin.
+(Unlike ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not contained
+in square brackets.) The optional argument gives the coordinates of
+the point at the lower-left corner of the picture (thereby
+determining the origin). For example, if
+<tt class="literal">\unitlength</tt> has been set to
+<tt class="literal">1mm</tt>, the command</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
+</pre>
+<p>produces a picture of width 100 millimetres and height 200
+millimetres, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose
+upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220). When you first
+draw a picture, you will omit the optional argument, leaving the
+origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your
+picture by shifting everything, you just add the appropriate
+optional argument.</p>
+<p>The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal size
+of the picture. This need bear no relation to how large the picture
+really is; LaTeX will happily allow you to put things outside the
+picture, or even off the page. The picture's nominal size is used
+by LaTeX in determining how much room to leave for it.</p>
+<p>Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the
+<tt class="literal">\put</tt> command. The command</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\put (11.3,-.3){...}
+</pre>
+<p>puts the object specified by <tt class="literal">...</tt> in the
+picture, with its reference point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The
+reference points for various objects will be described below.</p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\put</tt> command creates an
+<span class="bold"><b>LR box</b></span>. You can put anything in
+the text argument of the <tt class="literal">\put</tt> command that
+you'd put into the argument of an <tt class="literal">\mbox</tt>
+and related commands. When you do this, the reference point will be
+the lower left corner of the box.</p>
+<p>Picture commands:</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-circle"></a><tt class="literal">\circle{diameter},
+\circle*{diameter}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2524329" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\circle</tt> command produces a circle
+with a diameter as close to the specified one as possible. If the
+<tt class="literal">*</tt>-form of the command is used, LaTeX draws
+a solid circle.</p>
+<p>Note that only circles up to 40 pt can be drawn.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-dashbox"></a><tt class="literal">\dashbox</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2524374" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Draws a box with a dashed line.</p>
+<p>
+<tt class="literal">\dashbox{dash_length}(width,height){...}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\dashbox</tt> has an extra argument
+which specifies the width of each dash. A dashed box looks best
+when the <tt class="literal">width</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">height</tt> are multiples of the
+<tt class="literal">dash_length</tt>.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-frame"></a><tt class="literal">\frame{...}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2524435" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\frame</tt> command puts a rectangular
+frame around the object specified in the argument. The reference
+point is the bottom left corner of the frame. No extra space is put
+between the frame and the object.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-framebox-op-picture-cp"></a><tt class="literal">\framebox(width,height)[position]{...}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2524469" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\framebox</tt> command is exactly the
+same as the <tt class="literal">\makebox</tt> command, except that
+it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it creates.</p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">framebox</tt> command produces a rule of
+thickness <tt class="literal">\fboxrule</tt>, and leaves a space
+<tt class="literal">\fboxsep</tt> between the rule and the contents
+of the box.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-line"></a><tt class="literal">\line(x
+slope,y slope){length}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2524529" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\line</tt> command draws a line of the
+specified <tt class="literal">length</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">slope</tt>.</p>
+<p>Note that LaTeX can only draw lines with slope = x/y, where x
+and y have integer values from -6 through 6.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-linethickness"></a><tt class="literal">\linethickness{dimension}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2524580" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Declares the thickness of horizontal and vertical lines in a
+picture environment to be <tt class="literal">dimension</tt>, which
+must be a positive length. It does not affect the thickness of
+slanted lines and circles, or the quarter circles drawn by
+<tt class="literal">\oval</tt> to form the corners of an oval.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-makebox-op-picture-cp"></a><tt class="literal">\makebox(width,height)[position]{...}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2524621" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\makebox</tt> command for the picture
+environment is similar to the normal
+<tt class="literal">\makebox</tt> command except that you must
+specify a <tt class="literal">width</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">height</tt> in multiples of
+<tt class="literal">\unitlength</tt>.</p>
+<p>The optional argument, <tt class="literal">[position]</tt>,
+specifies the quadrant that your text appears in. You may select up
+to two of the following:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">t</tt> - Moves the item to the top of the
+rectangle</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">b</tt> - Moves the item to the bottom</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">l</tt> - Moves the item to the left</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">r</tt> - Moves the item to the
+right</li></ul></div>
+<p>See <a href="#cmd-makebox">\makebox</a>.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-multiput"></a><tt class="literal">\multiput(x coord,y
+coord)(delta x,delta y){number of copies}{object}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2524752" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\multiput</tt> command can be used when
+you are putting the same object in a regular pattern across a
+picture.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-oval"></a><tt class="literal">\oval(width,height)[portion]</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2524783" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\oval</tt> command produces a rectangle
+with rounded corners. The optional argument,
+<tt class="literal">[portion]</tt>, allows you to select part of
+the oval.</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">t</tt> - Selects the top portion</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">b</tt> - Selects the bottom portion</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">r</tt> - Selects the right portion</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">l</tt> - Selects the left
+portion</li></ul></div>
+<p>Note that the <span class="emphasis"><em>corners</em></span> of
+the oval are made with quarter circles with a maximum radius of 20
+pt, so large <span class="emphasis"><em>ovals</em></span> will look
+more like boxes with rounded corners.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-put"></a><tt class="literal">\put(x
+coord,y coord){ ... }</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2524885" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\put</tt> command places the item
+specified by the mandatory argument at the given coordinates.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-shortstack"></a><tt class="literal">\shortstack[position]{...
+\\ ... \\ ...}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2524917" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\shortstack</tt> command produces a
+stack of objects. The valid positions are:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">r</tt> - Moves the objects to the right of
+the stack</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">l</tt> - Moves the objects to the left of
+the stack</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">c</tt> - Moves the objects to the centre of
+the stack (default)</li></ul></div>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-vector"></a><tt class="literal">\vector(x slope,y
+slope){length}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2524989" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\vector</tt> command draws a line with
+an arrow of the specified length and slope. The
+<tt class="literal">x</tt> and <tt class="literal">y</tt> values
+must lie between -4 and +4, inclusive.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="env-quotation"></a><tt class="literal">quotation</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2525032" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2525038"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2525046" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{quotation}
+ text
+\end{quotation}
+</pre>
+<p>The margins of the <tt class="literal">quotation</tt>
+environment are indented on the left and the right. The text is
+justified at both margins and there is paragraph indentation.
+Leaving a blank line between text produces a new paragraph.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="env-quote"></a><tt class="literal">quote</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2525085" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2525092"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2525099" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{quote}
+ text
+\end{quote}
+</pre>
+<p>The margins of the <tt class="literal">quote</tt> environment
+are indented on the left and the right. The text is justified at
+both margins. Leaving a blank line between text produces a new
+paragraph.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="env-tabbing"></a><tt class="literal">tabbing</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2525137" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2525144"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2525151" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{tabbing}
+text \= more text \= still more text \= last text \\
+second row \&gt; \&gt; more \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{tabbing}
+</pre>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">tabbing</tt> environment provides a way
+to align text in columns. It works by setting tab stops and tabbing
+to them much the way you do with an ordinary typewriter.</p>
+<p>It is best suited for cases where the width of each column is
+constant and known in advance.</p>
+<p>This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the
+<tt class="literal">tabular</tt> environment.</p>
+<p>The following commands can be used inside a
+<tt class="literal">tabbing</tt> environment:</p>
+<div class="table"><a id="id2525205"></a>
+<p class="title"><b>Table&nbsp;1.4.&nbsp;Commands in a
+<tt class="literal">tabbing</tt> environment</b></p>
+<table summary="Commands in a tabbing environment" border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\= <a id="id2525244" class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Sets a tab stop at the current
+position.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\&gt; <a id="id2525263"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Advances to the next tab stop.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\&lt; <a id="id2525282"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">This command allows you to put something to the
+left of the local margin without changing the margin. Can only be
+used at the start of the line.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\+ <a id="id2525302" class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Moves the left margin of the next and all the
+following commands one tab stop to the right.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\- <a id="id2525322" class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Moves the left margin of the next and all the
+following commands one tab stop to the left.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\' <a id="id2525341" class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Moves everything that you have typed so far in
+the current column, i.e. everything from the most recent
+<tt class="literal">\&gt;</tt>, <tt class="literal">\&lt;</tt>,
+<tt class="literal">\'</tt>, <tt class="literal">\\</tt>, or
+<tt class="literal">\kill</tt> command, to the right of the
+previous column, flush against the current column's tab
+stop.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\` <a id="id2525392" class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Allows you to put text flush right against any
+tab stop, including tab stop 0. However, it can't move text to the
+right of the last column because there's no tab stop there. The
+<tt class="literal">\`</tt> command moves all the text that follows
+it, up to the <tt class="literal">\\</tt> or
+<tt class="literal">\end{tabbing}</tt> command that ends the line,
+to the right margin of the tabbing environment. There must be no
+<tt class="literal">\&gt;</tt> or <tt class="literal">\'</tt>
+command between the <tt class="literal">\`</tt> and the command
+that ends the line.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\kill <a id="id2525452"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Sets tab stops without producing text. Works
+just like <tt class="literal">\\</tt> except that it throws away
+the current line instead of producing output for it. The effect of
+any <tt class="literal">\=</tt>, <tt class="literal">\+</tt> or
+<tt class="literal">\-</tt> commands in that line remain in
+effect.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\pushtabs <a id="id2525497"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful
+for temporarily changing tab stop positions in the middle of a
+<tt class="literal">tabbing</tt> environment.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\poptabs <a id="id2525524"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Restores the tab stop positions saved by the
+last <tt class="literal">\pushtabs</tt>.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\a <a id="id2525548" class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">In a <tt class="literal">tabbing</tt>
+environment, the commands <tt class="literal">\=</tt>,
+<tt class="literal">\'</tt> and <tt class="literal">\`</tt> do not
+produce accents as normal. Instead, the commands
+<tt class="literal">\a=</tt>, <tt class="literal">\a'</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">\a`</tt> are
+used.</td></tr></tbody></table></div>
+<p>This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional
+format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{tabbing}
+function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
+ \&gt; begin \= \+ \\
+ \&gt; if \= n $&gt;$ 1 then \+ \\
+ fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\
+ else \+ \\
+ fact := 1; \-\- \\
+ end;\\
+\end{tabbing}
+</pre>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="env-table"></a><tt class="literal">table</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2525638" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2525645"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2525652" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{table}[placement]
+
+ body of the table
+
+\caption{table title}
+\end{table}
+</pre>
+<p>Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are
+usually <span class="emphasis"><em>floated</em></span> to a
+convenient place, like the top of a page. Tables will not be split
+between two pages.</p>
+<p>The optional argument <tt class="literal">[placement]</tt>
+determines where LaTeX will try to place your table. There are four
+places where LaTeX can possibly put a float:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">h</tt> : Here - at the position in the text
+where the table environment appears.</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">t</tt> : Top - at the top of a text
+page.</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">b</tt> : Bottom - at the bottom of a text
+page.</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">p</tt> : Page of floats - on a separate
+float page, which is a page containing no text, only
+floats.</li></ul></div>
+<p>The standard <tt class="literal">report</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">article</tt> classes use the default placement
+<tt class="literal">[tbp]</tt>.</p>
+<p>The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX
+commands, etc., you wish. The <tt class="literal">\caption</tt>
+command allows you to title your table.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="env-tabular"></a><tt class="literal">tabular</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2525799" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2525806"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2525813" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{tabular}[pos]{cols}
+column 1 entry &amp; column 2 entry ... &amp; column n entry \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{tabular}
+</pre>
+<p>or</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols}
+column 1 entry &amp; column 2 entry ... &amp; column n entry \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{tabular*}
+</pre>
+<p>These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of
+rows of items, aligned vertically in columns. The mandatory and
+optional arguments consist of:</p>
+<div class="table"><a id="id2525850"></a>
+<p class="title"><b>Table&nbsp;1.5.&nbsp;Commands used inside a
+<tt class="literal">tabular</tt> environment</b></p>
+<table summary="Commands used inside a tabular environment"
+border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">width</td>
+<td align="justify">Specifies the width of the
+<tt class="literal">tabular*</tt> environment. There must be rubber
+space between columns that can stretch to fill out the specified
+width.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">pos</td>
+<td align="justify">Specifies the vertical position; default is
+alignment on the centre of the environment.
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">t</tt> - align on top row</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">b</tt> - align on bottom
+row</li></ul></div></td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">cols</td>
+<td align="justify">Specifies the column formatting. It consists of
+a sequence of the following specifiers, corresponding to the
+sequence of columns and intercolumn material.
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">l</tt> - A column of left-aligned
+items.</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">r</tt> - A column of right-aligned
+items.</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">c</tt> - A column of centred items.</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">|</tt> - A vertical line the full height
+and depth of the environment.</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">@{text}</tt> - This inserts
+<tt class="literal">text</tt> in every row. An @-expression
+suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between columns;
+any desired space between the inserted text and the adjacent items
+must be included in text. An
+<tt class="literal">\extracolsep{wd}</tt> command in an
+@-expression causes an extra space of width
+<tt class="literal">wd</tt> to appear to the left of all subsequent
+columns, until countermanded by another
+<tt class="literal">\extracolsep</tt> command. Unlike ordinary
+intercolumn space, this extra space is not suppressed by an
+@-expression. An <tt class="literal">\extracolsep</tt> command can
+be used only in an @-expression in the
+<tt class="literal">cols</tt> argument.</li>
+<li>
+<p><tt class="literal">p{wd}</tt> - Produces a column with each
+item typeset in a parbox of width <tt class="literal">wd</tt>, as
+if it were the argument of a
+<tt class="literal">\parbox[t]{wd}</tt> command. However, a
+<tt class="literal">\\</tt> may not appear in the item, except in
+the following situations:</p>
+<div class="orderedlist">
+<ol type="1">
+<li>inside an environment like <tt class="literal">minipage</tt>,
+<tt class="literal">array</tt>, or
+<tt class="literal">tabular</tt>.</li>
+<li>inside an explicit <tt class="literal">\parbox</tt>.</li>
+<li>in the scope of a <tt class="literal">\centering</tt>,
+<tt class="literal">\raggedright</tt>, or
+<tt class="literal">\raggedleft</tt> declaration. The latter
+declarations must appear inside braces or an environment when used
+in a <tt class="literal">p</tt>-column
+element.</li></ol></div></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">*{num}{cols}</tt> - Equivalent to
+<tt class="literal">num</tt> copies of
+<tt class="literal">cols</tt>, where <tt class="literal">num</tt>
+is any positive integer and <tt class="literal">cols</tt> is any
+list of column-specifiers, which may contain another
+<tt class="literal">*-expression</tt>.</li></ul></div></td></tr></tbody></table></div>
+<p>These commands can be used inside a
+<tt class="literal">tabular</tt> environment:</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-cline"></a><tt class="literal">\cline{i-j}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2526249" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\cline</tt> command draws horizontal
+lines across the columns specified, beginning in column
+<tt class="literal">i</tt> and ending in column
+<tt class="literal">j</tt>, which are identified in the mandatory
+argument.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-hline"></a><tt class="literal">\hline</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2526292" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\hline</tt> command will draw a
+horizontal line the width of the table. It's most commonly used to
+draw a line at the top, bottom, and between the rows of the
+table.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-multicolumn"></a><tt class="literal">\multicolumn</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2526324" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\multicolumn</tt> is used to make an
+entry that spans several columns. The first mandatory argument,
+<tt class="literal">cols</tt>, specifies the number of columns to
+span. The second mandatory argument, <tt class="literal">pos</tt>,
+specifies the formatting of the entry; <tt class="literal">c</tt>
+for centred, <tt class="literal">l</tt> for flushleft,
+<tt class="literal">r</tt> for flushright. The third mandatory
+argument, <tt class="literal">text</tt>, specifies what text is to
+make up the entry.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-vline"></a><tt class="literal">\vline</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2526402" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\vline</tt> command will draw a vertical
+line extending the full height and depth of its row. An
+<tt class="literal">\hfill</tt> command can be used to move the
+line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an
+@-expression.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="env-thebibliography"></a><tt class="literal">thebibliography</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2526441" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2526448"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{thebibliography}{widest-label}
+\bibitem[label]{cite_key}
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{thebibliography}
+</pre>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">thebibliography</tt> environment
+produces a bibliography or reference list. In the
+<tt class="literal">article</tt> class, this reference list is
+labelled <span class="emphasis"><em>References</em></span>; in the
+<tt class="literal">report</tt> class, it is labelled
+<span class="emphasis"><em>Bibliography</em></span>.</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">widest-label</tt>: Text that, when printed,
+is approximately as wide as the widest item label produces by the
+<tt class="literal">\bibitem</tt> commands.</li></ul></div>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-bibitem"></a><tt class="literal">\bibitem[label]{cite_key}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2526531" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\bibitem</tt> command generates an entry
+labelled by <tt class="literal">label</tt>. If the
+<tt class="literal">label</tt> argument is missing, a number is
+generated as the <tt class="literal">label</tt>, using the
+<tt class="literal">enumi</tt> counter. The
+<tt class="literal">cite_key</tt> is any sequence of letters,
+numbers, and punctuation symbols not containing a comma. This
+command writes an entry on the <tt class="filename">.aux</tt> file
+containing <tt class="literal">cite_key</tt> and the item's
+<tt class="literal">label</tt>. When this
+<tt class="filename">.aux</tt> file is read by the
+<tt class="literal">\begin{document}</tt> command, the item's
+<tt class="literal">label</tt> is associated with
+<tt class="literal">cite_key</tt>, causing the reference to
+<tt class="literal">cite_key</tt> by a
+<tt class="literal">\cite</tt> command to produce the associated
+<tt class="literal">label</tt>.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-cite"></a><tt class="literal">\cite[text]{key_list}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2526657" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">key_list</tt> argument is a list of
+citation keys. This command generates an in-text citation to the
+references associated with the keys in
+<tt class="literal">key_list</tt> by entries on the
+<tt class="filename">.aux</tt> file read by the
+<tt class="literal">\begin{document}</tt> command.</p>
+<p>The optional <tt class="literal">text</tt> argument will appear
+after the citation, i.e.
+<tt class="literal">\cite[p.~2f.]{knuth}</tt> might produce
+`[Knuth, p. 2]'.</p>
+<p><a id="id2526714" class="indexterm"></a> The package
+<tt class="literal">cite.sty</tt> allows a line break in the
+<tt class="literal">\cite</tt> reference and can sort numerical
+entries.</p>
+<p><a id="id2526740" class="indexterm"></a>
+<tt class="literal">overcite.sty</tt> makes citations like
+footnotes.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-nocite"></a><tt class="literal">\nocite{key_list}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2526770" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\nocite</tt> command produces no text,
+but writes <tt class="literal">key_list</tt>, which is a list of
+one or more citation keys, on the <tt class="filename">.aux</tt>
+file. <tt class="literal">\nocite{*}</tt> uses all entries from the
+BibTeX database.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="using-bibtex"></a>Using BibTeX</h5>
+<a id="id2526818" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2526825"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2526837"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2526844"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2526855" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>If you use the BibTeX program by Oren Patashnik (highly
+recommended if you need a bibliography of more than a couple of
+titles) to maintain your bibliography, you don't use the
+<tt class="literal">thebibliography</tt> environment. Instead, you
+include the lines</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\bibliographystyle{style}
+\bibliography{bibfile}
+</pre>
+<p>where <tt class="literal">style</tt> refers to a file
+<tt class="literal">style.bst</tt>, which defines how your
+citations will look.</p>
+<div class="table"><a id="id2526898"></a>
+<p class="title"><b>Table&nbsp;1.6.&nbsp;Standard styles
+distributed with BibTeX</b></p>
+<table summary="Standard styles distributed with BibTeX"
+border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">alpha</td>
+<td align="justify">Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from
+name of author and year of publication.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">plain</td>
+<td align="justify">Sorted alphabetically. Labels are
+numeric.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">unsrt</td>
+<td align="justify">Like <tt class="literal">plain</tt>, but
+entries are in order of citation.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">abbrv</td>
+<td align="justify">Like <tt class="literal">plain</tt>, but more
+compact labels.</td></tr></tbody></table></div>
+<p>In addition, numerous other BibTeX style files exist tailored to
+the demands of various publications.</p>
+<p>The argument to <tt class="literal">\bibliography</tt> refers to
+the file <tt class="literal">bibfile.bib</tt>, which should contain
+your database in BibTeX format. Only the entries referred to via
+<tt class="literal">\cite</tt> and <tt class="literal">\nocite</tt>
+will be listed in the bibliography.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="env-theorem"></a><tt class="literal">theorem</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2527036" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2527043"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{theorem}
+ theorem text
+\end{theorem}
+</pre>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">theorem</tt> environment produces
+<span class="emphasis"><em>Theorem x</em></span> in boldface
+followed by your theorem text.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="env-titlepage"></a><tt class="literal">titlepage</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2527084" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2527091"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2527098" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{titlepage}
+ text
+\end{titlepage}
+</pre>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">titlepage</tt> environment creates a
+title page, i.e. a page with no printed page number or heading. It
+also causes the following page to be numbered page one. Formatting
+the title page is left to you. The <tt class="literal">\today</tt>
+command comes in handy for title pages. <a id="id2527130"
+class="indexterm"></a></p>
+<p>Note that you can use the <tt class="literal">\maketitle</tt>
+(see <a href="#cmd-maketitle">\maketitle</a>) command to produce a
+standard title page.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="env-verbatim"></a><tt class="literal">verbatim</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2527170" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2527177"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2527184"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2527191"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2527198" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{verbatim}
+ text
+\end{verbatim}
+</pre>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">verbatim</tt> environment is a
+paragraph-making environment that gets LaTeX to print exactly what
+you type in. It turns LaTeX into a typewriter with carriage returns
+and blanks having the same effect that they would on a
+typewriter.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-verb"></a><tt class="literal">\verb
+char literal_text char</tt> <tt class="literal">\verb*char
+literal_text char</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2527251" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2527258"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Typesets <tt class="literal">literal_text</tt> exactly as typed,
+including special characters and spaces, using a typewriter
+(<tt class="literal">\tt</tt>) type style. There may be no space
+between <tt class="literal">\verb</tt> or
+<tt class="literal">\verb*</tt> and <tt class="literal">char</tt>
+(space is shown here only for clarity). The
+<tt class="literal">*-form</tt> differs only in that spaces are
+printed</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="env-verse"></a><tt class="literal">verse</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2527321" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2527327"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{verse}
+ text
+\end{verse}
+</pre>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">verse</tt> environment is designed for
+poetry, though you may find other uses for it.</p>
+<p>The margins are indented on the left and the right. Separate the
+lines of each stanza with <tt class="literal">\\</tt>, and use one
+or more blank lines to separate the stanzas.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="footnotes"></a>2.3.7
+Footnotes</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2527382" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be
+produced with one command, the <tt class="literal">\footnote</tt>
+command. They can also be produced with two commands, the
+<tt class="literal">\footnotemark</tt> and the
+<tt class="literal">\footnotetext</tt> commands. See the specific
+command for information on why you would use one over the
+other.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-cmd-footnote"></a><tt class="literal">\footnote[number]{text}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2527428" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\footnote</tt> command places the
+numbered footnote <tt class="literal">text</tt> at the bottom of
+the current page. The optional argument,
+<tt class="literal">number</tt>, is used to change the default
+footnote number. This command can only be used in outer paragraph
+mode; i.e., you cannot use it in sectioning commands like
+<tt class="literal">\chapter</tt>, in figures, tables or in a
+<tt class="literal">tabular</tt> environment.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-footnotemark"></a><tt class="literal">\footnotemark</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2527486" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\footnotemark</tt> command puts the
+footnote <tt class="literal">number</tt> in the text. This command
+can be used in inner paragraph mode. The text of the footnote is
+supplied by the <tt class="literal">\footnotetext</tt> command.</p>
+<p>This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote
+markers referring to the same footnote by using</p>
+<p><tt class="literal">\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]</tt></p>
+<p>after the first <tt class="literal">\footnote</tt> command.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-footnotetext"></a><tt class="literal">\footnotetext[number]{text}</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2527554" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\footnotetext</tt> command produces the
+<tt class="literal">text</tt> to be placed at the bottom of the
+page. This command can come anywhere after the
+<tt class="literal">\footnotemark</tt> command. The
+<tt class="literal">\footnotetext</tt> command must appear in outer
+paragraph mode.</p>
+<p>The optional argument, <tt class="literal">number</tt>, is used
+to change the default footnote number.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="lengths"></a>2.3.8
+Lengths</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2527617" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>A <tt class="literal">length</tt> is a measure of distance. Many
+LaTeX commands take a length as an argument.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-newlength"></a><tt class="literal">\newlength</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2527651" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2527658"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\newlength{\gnat}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\newlength</tt> command defines the
+mandatory argument, <tt class="literal">\gnat</tt>, as a
+<tt class="literal">length</tt> command with a value of
+<tt class="literal">0in</tt>. An error occurs if a
+<tt class="literal">\gnat</tt> command already exists.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-setlength"></a><tt class="literal">\setlength</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2527721" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2527728"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\setlength{\gnat}{length}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\setlength</tt> command is used to set
+the value of a <tt class="literal">length</tt> command. The
+<tt class="literal">length</tt> argument can be expressed in any
+terms of length LaTeX understands, i.e., inches
+(<tt class="literal">in</tt>), millimetres
+(<tt class="literal">mm</tt>), points
+(<tt class="literal">pt</tt>), etc.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-addtolength"></a><tt class="literal">\addtolength</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2527801" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2527808"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\addtolength{\gnat}{length}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\addtolength</tt> command increments
+<span class="emphasis"><em>length command</em></span> by the amount
+specified in the <tt class="literal">length</tt> argument. It can
+be a negative amount.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-settodepth"></a><tt class="literal">\settodepth</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2527857" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\settodepth{\gnat}{text}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\settodepth</tt> command sets the value
+of a <tt class="literal">length</tt> command equal to the depth of
+the <tt class="literal">text</tt> argument.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-settoheight"></a><tt class="literal">\settoheight</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2527906" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\settoheight{\gnat}{text}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\settoheight</tt> command sets the value
+of a <tt class="literal">length</tt> command equal to the height of
+the <tt class="literal">text</tt> argument.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-settowidth"></a><tt class="literal">\settowidth</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2527956" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\settowidth{\gnat}{text}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\settowidth</tt> command sets the value
+of a <tt class="literal">length</tt> command equal to the width of
+the <tt class="literal">text</tt> argument.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="predefined-lengths-title"></a><tt class="literal">Predefined
+lengths</tt></h5>
+<a id="id2528006" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2528013"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><a id="cmd-length-pre-width"></a><tt class="literal">\width</tt>
+<a id="id2528031" class="indexterm"></a></p>
+<p>
+<a id="cmd-length-pre-height"></a><tt class="literal">\height</tt>
+<a id="id2528050" class="indexterm"></a></p>
+<p><a id="cmd-length-pre-depth"></a><tt class="literal">\depth</tt>
+<a id="id2528069" class="indexterm"></a></p>
+<p>
+<a id="cmd-length-pre-totalheight"></a><tt class="literal">\totalheight</tt>
+<a id="id2528088" class="indexterm"></a></p>
+<p>These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the
+box-making commands See <a href="#spaces-and-boxes"
+title="2.3.17 Spaces &amp; Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>. They
+specify the natural width etc. of the text in the box.
+<tt class="literal">\totalheight</tt> equals
+<tt class="literal">\height</tt> + <tt class="literal">\depth</tt>.
+To make a box with the text stretched to double the natural size,
+e.g., say</p>
+<p><tt class="literal">\makebox[2\width]{Get a
+stretcher}</tt></p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="letters"></a>2.3.9
+Letters</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2528153" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2528160"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>You can use LaTeX to typeset letters, both personal and
+business. The <tt class="literal">letter</tt> document class is
+designed to make a number of letters at once, although you can make
+just one if you so desire.</p>
+<p>Your <tt class="filename">.tex</tt> source file has the same
+minimum commands as the other document classes, i.e., you must have
+the following commands as a minimum:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\documentclass{letter}
+\begin{document}
+ ... letters ...
+\end{document}
+</pre>
+<p>Each letter is a <tt class="literal">letter</tt> environment,
+whose argument is the name and address of the recipient. For
+example, you might have:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St.\\ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA}
+ ...
+\end{letter}
+</pre>
+<p>The letter itself begins with the
+<tt class="literal">\opening</tt> command. The text of the letter
+follows. It is typed as ordinary LaTeX input. Commands that make no
+sense in a letter, like <tt class="literal">\chapter</tt>, do not
+work. The letter closes with a <tt class="literal">\closing</tt>
+command.</p>
+<p>After the <tt class="literal">closing</tt>, you can have
+additional material. The <tt class="literal">\cc</tt> command
+produces the usual <span class="emphasis"><em>cc: ...</em></span>.
+There's also a similar <tt class="literal">\encl</tt> command for a
+list of enclosures. With both these commands, use
+<tt class="literal">\\</tt> to separate the items.</p>
+<p>These commands are used with the <tt class="literal">letter</tt>
+class:</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-address"></a>\address</h5>
+<a id="id2528302" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\address{Return address}</tt></p>
+<p>The return address, as it should appear on the letter and the
+envelope. Separate lines of the address should be separated by
+<tt class="literal">\\</tt> commands. If you do not make an
+<tt class="literal">\address</tt> declaration, then the letter will
+be formatted for copying onto your organisation's standard
+letterhead. (See <a href="#overview"
+title="2.2 Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide ">Overview</a>, for
+details on your local implementation). If you give an
+<tt class="literal">\address</tt> declaration, then the letter will
+be formatted as a personal letter.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-cc"></a>\cc</h5>
+<a id="id2528361" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2528368"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\cc{Kate Schechter\\Rob McKenna}</tt></p>
+<p>Generate a list of other persons the letter was sent to. Each
+name is printed on a separate line.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-closing"></a>\closing</h5>
+<a id="id2528397" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2528404"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\closing{text}</tt></p>
+<p>The letter closes with a <tt class="literal">\closing</tt>
+command, i.e.,</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\closing{Best Regards,}
+</pre>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-encl"></a>\encl</h5>
+<a id="id2528444" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2528451"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\encl{CV\\Certificates}</tt></p>
+<p>Generate a list of enclosed material.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-location"></a>\location</h5>
+<a id="id2528480" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\location{address}</tt></p>
+<p>This modifies your organisation's standard address. This only
+appears if the <tt class="literal">firstpage</tt> pagestyle is
+selected.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-makelabels"></a>\makelabels</h5>
+<a id="id2528515" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\makelabels{number}</tt></p>
+<p>If you issue this command in the preamble, LaTeX will create a
+sheet of address labels. This sheet will be output before the
+letters.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-name"></a>\name</h5>
+<a id="id2528548" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\name{June Davenport}</tt></p>
+<p>Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with the
+return address.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-opening"></a>\opening</h5>
+<a id="id2528577" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2528584"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\opening{text}</tt></p>
+<p>The letter begins with the <tt class="literal">\opening</tt>
+command. The mandatory argument, <tt class="literal">text</tt>, is
+whatever text you wish to start your letter, i.e.,</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\opening{Dear Joe,}
+</pre>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-ps"></a>\ps</h5>
+<a id="id2528632" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\ps</tt></p>
+<p>Use this command before a postscript.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-signature"></a>\signature</h5>
+<a id="id2528660" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\signature{Harvey Swick}</tt></p>
+<p>Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter
+underneath the space for your signature. Items that should go on
+separate lines should be separated by <tt class="literal">\\</tt>
+commands.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-startbreaks"></a>\startbreaks</h5>
+<a id="id2528696" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\startbreaks</tt></p>
+<p>Used after a <tt class="literal">\stopbreaks</tt> command to
+allow page breaks again.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-stopbreaks"></a>\stopbreaks</h5>
+<a id="id2528732" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\stopbreaks</tt></p>
+<p>Inhibit page breaks until a
+<tt class="literal">\startbreaks</tt> command occurs.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-telephone"></a>\telephone</h5>
+<a id="id2528766" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\telephone{number}</tt></p>
+<p>This is your telephone number. This only appears if the
+<tt class="literal">firstpage</tt> pagestyle is selected.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="line-and-page-breaking"></a>2.3.10 Line
+&amp; Page Breaking</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2528809" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2528816"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2528823" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to
+translate your input file into a string of glyphs and spaces. To
+produce a printed document, this string must be broken into lines,
+and these lines must be broken into pages. In some environments,
+you do the line breaking yourself with the
+<tt class="literal">\\</tt> command, but LaTeX usually does it for
+you.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-bslash"></a>\\</h5>
+<a id="id2528860" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2528867"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\\[extra-space], \\*[extra-space]</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\\</tt> command tells LaTeX to start a
+new line. It has an optional argument,
+<tt class="literal">extra-space</tt>, that specifies how much extra
+vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This can be
+a negative amount.</p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\\*</tt> command is the same as the
+ordinary <tt class="literal">\\</tt> command except that it tells
+LaTeX not to start a new page after the line.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-dash-op-hyphenation-cp"></a>\-</h5>
+<a id="id2528935" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2528942"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\-</tt> command tells LaTeX that it may
+hyphenate the word at that point. LaTeX is very good at
+hyphenating, and it will usually find all correct hyphenation
+points. The <tt class="literal">\-</tt> command is used for the
+exceptional cases.</p>
+<p>Note that when you insert <tt class="literal">\-</tt> commands
+in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at those points and not
+at any of the hyphenation points that LaTeX might otherwise have
+chosen.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-cleardoublepage"></a>\cleardoublepage</h5>
+<a id="id2528999" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2529006"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\cleardoublepage</tt> command ends the
+current page and causes all figures and tables that have so far
+appeared in the input to be printed. In a two-sided printing style,
+it also makes the next page a right-hand (odd-numbered) page,
+producing a blank page if necessary.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-clearpage"></a>\clearpage</h5>
+<a id="id2529037" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2529044"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\clearpage</tt> command ends the current
+page and causes all figures and tables that have so far appeared in
+the input to be printed.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-enlargethispage"></a>\enlargethispage</h5>
+<a id="id2529072" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2529079"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\enlargethispage{size}</tt></p>
+<p><tt class="literal">\enlargethispage*{size}</tt></p>
+<p>Enlarge the <tt class="literal">\textheight</tt> for the current
+page by the specified amount; e.g.
+<tt class="literal">\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}</tt> will allow
+one additional line.</p>
+<p>The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the
+page as much as possible. This is normally used together with an
+explicit <tt class="literal">\pagebreak</tt>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-samepage"></a>\samepage</h5>
+<a id="id2529141" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\samepage</tt></p>
+<p>The object in the argument <tt class="literal">{}</tt> should be
+on the current page.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-fussy"></a>\fussy</h5>
+<a id="id2529176" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\fussy</tt></p>
+<p>This declaration (which is the default) makes TeX more fussy
+about line breaking. This can avoids too much space between words,
+but may produce overfull boxes.</p>
+<p>This command cancels the effect of a previous
+<tt class="literal">\sloppy</tt> command.
+<a href="#cmd-sloppy">\sloppy</a></p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-hyphenation"></a>\hyphenation</h5>
+<a id="id2529227" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2529234"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\hyphenation{words}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\hyphenation</tt> command declares
+allowed hyphenation points, where <tt class="literal">words</tt> is
+a list of words, separated by spaces, in which each hyphenation
+point is indicated by a <tt class="literal">-</tt> character.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-linebreak"></a>\linebreak</h5>
+<a id="id2529283" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2529290"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\linebreak[number]</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\linebreak</tt> command tells LaTeX to
+break the current line at the point of the command. With the
+optional argument, <tt class="literal">number</tt>, you can convert
+the <tt class="literal">\linebreak</tt> command from a demand to a
+request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the
+number, the more insistent the request is.</p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\linebreak</tt> command causes LaTeX to
+stretch the line so it extends to the right margin.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-newline"></a>\newline</h5>
+<a id="id2529357" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2529364"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\newline</tt> command breaks the line
+right where it is. It can only be used in paragraph mode.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-newpage"></a>\newpage</h5>
+<a id="id2529392" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2529398"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\newpage</tt> command ends the current
+page. In contrast to <a href="#cmd-pagebreak">\pagebreak</a> it can
+produce a partly empty page, even when
+<a href="#cmd-flushbottom-title">\flushbottom</a> is active.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-nolinebreak"></a>\nolinebreak</h5>
+<a id="id2529443" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\nolinebreak[number]</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\nolinebreak</tt> command prevents LaTeX
+from breaking the current line at the point of the command. With
+the optional argument, <tt class="literal">number</tt>, you can
+convert the <tt class="literal">\nolinebreak</tt> command from a
+demand to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The
+higher the number, the more insistent the request is.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-nopagebreak"></a>\nopagebreak</h5>
+<a id="id2529498" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\nopagebreak[number]</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\nopagebreak</tt> command prevents LaTeX
+from breaking the current page at the point of the command. With
+the optional argument, <tt class="literal">number</tt>, you can
+convert the <tt class="literal">\nopagebreak</tt> command from a
+demand to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The
+higher the number, the more insistent the request is.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-pagebreak"></a>\pagebreak</h5>
+<a id="id2529553" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2529559"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\pagebreak[number]</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\pagebreak</tt> command tells LaTeX to
+break the current page at the point of the command. With the
+optional argument, <tt class="literal">number</tt>, you can convert
+the <tt class="literal">\pagebreak</tt> command from a demand to a
+request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the
+number, the more insistent the request is.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-sloppy"></a>\sloppy</h5>
+<a id="id2529612" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\sloppy</tt></p>
+<p>This declaration makes TeX less fussy about line breaking. This
+can prevent overfull boxes, but may leave too much space between
+words.</p>
+<p>Lasts until a <tt class="literal">\fussy</tt> command is issued.
+<a href="#cmd-fussy">\fussy</a>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="making-paragraphs"></a>2.3.11 Making
+Paragraphs</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2529670" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2529677"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines ---
+lines not containing even a <tt class="literal">%</tt>. A blank
+line should not appear where a new paragraph cannot be started,
+such as in math mode or in the argument of a sectioning
+command.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-indent"></a>\indent</h5>
+<a id="id2529706" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2529713"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\indent</tt></p>
+<p>This produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of
+the paragraph indentation. It is used to add paragraph indentation
+where it would otherwise be suppressed.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-noindent"></a>\noindent</h5>
+<a id="id2529744" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2529751"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\noindent</tt></p>
+<p>When used at the beginning of the paragraph, it suppresses the
+paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in the middle of
+a paragraph.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-par"></a>\par</h5>
+<a id="id2529781" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2529787"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Equivalent to a blank line; often used to make command or
+environment definitions easier to read.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="margin-notes"></a>2.3.12 Margin
+Notes</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2529815" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2529822"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2529829" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The command <tt class="literal">\marginpar[left]{right}</tt>
+creates a note in the margin. The first line will be at the same
+height as the line in the text where the
+<tt class="literal">\marginpar</tt> occurs.</p>
+<p>When you only specify the mandatory argument
+<tt class="literal">right</tt>, the text will be placed</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>in the right margin for one-sided layout</li>
+<li>in the outside margin for two-sided layout</li>
+<li>in the nearest margin for two-column layout.</li></ul></div>
+<p>By issuing the command
+<tt class="literal">\reversemarginpar</tt>, you can force the
+marginal notes to go into the opposite (inside) margin.</p>
+<p>When you specify both arguments, <tt class="literal">left</tt>
+is used for the left margin, and <tt class="literal">right</tt> is
+used for the right margin.</p>
+<p>The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable
+hyphenation by prefixing the first word with a
+<tt class="literal">\hspace{0pt}</tt> command.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="math-formulae"></a>2.3.13 Math
+Formulae</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2529943" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2529950"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2529957"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2529964"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2529971"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2529977"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2529984"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2529990" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="table"><a id="id2529997"></a>
+<p class="title"><b>Table&nbsp;1.7.&nbsp;Three environments that
+put LaTeX in math mode</b></p>
+<table summary="Three environments that put LaTeX in math mode"
+border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">math</td>
+<td align="justify">For Formulae that appear right in the
+text.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">displaymath</td>
+<td align="justify">For Formulae that appear on their own
+line.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">equation</td>
+<td align="justify">The same as the displaymath environment except
+that it adds an equation number in the right
+margin.</td></tr></tbody></table></div>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">math</tt> environment can be used in
+both paragraph and LR mode, but the
+<tt class="literal">displaymath</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">equation</tt> environments can be used only in
+paragraph mode. The <tt class="literal">math</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">displaymath</tt> environments are used so often
+that they have the following short forms:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math}
+
+\[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
+</pre>
+<p>In fact, the <tt class="literal">math</tt> environment is so
+common that it has an even shorter form:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+$ ... $ instead of \(...\)
+</pre>
+<a id="id2530129" class="indexterm"></a>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="subscripts-and-superscripts-title"></a>Subscripts &amp;
+Superscripts</h5>
+<a id="id2530148" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2530154"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2530161"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2530168" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>To get an expression <span class="emphasis"><em>exp</em></span>
+to appear as a subscript, you just type
+<tt class="literal">_{</tt><span class="emphasis"><em>exp</em></span><tt class="literal">
+}</tt> . To get <span class="emphasis"><em>exp</em></span> to
+appear as a superscript, you type
+<tt class="literal">^{</tt><span class="emphasis"><em>exp</em></span>
+<tt class="literal">}</tt>. LaTeX handles superscripted
+superscripts and all of that stuff in the natural way. It even does
+the right thing when something has both a subscript and a
+superscript.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="math-symbols-title"></a>Math Symbols</h5>
+<a id="id2530229" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2530236"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2530243" class="indexterm"></a>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="spacing-in-math-mode-title"></a>Spacing in
+Math Mode</h5>
+<a id="id2530261" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2530268"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>In a <tt class="literal">math</tt> environment, LaTeX ignores
+the spaces you type and puts in the spacing that it thinks is best.
+LaTeX formats mathematics the way it's done in mathematics texts.
+If you want different spacing, LaTeX provides the following four
+commands for use in math mode:</p>
+<a id="id2530299" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2530306"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2530313"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2530319" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="orderedlist">
+<ol type="1">
+<li>
+<p><tt class="literal">\;</tt> - a thick space</p></li>
+<li>
+<p><tt class="literal">\:</tt> - a medium space</p></li>
+<li>
+<p><tt class="literal">\,</tt> - a thin space</p></li>
+<li>
+<p><tt class="literal">\!</tt> - a negative thin
+space</p></li></ol></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="math-miscellany-title"></a>Math
+Miscellany</h5>
+<a id="id2530384" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="table"><a id="id2530391"></a>
+<p class="title"><b>Table&nbsp;1.8.&nbsp;Math Miscellany</b></p>
+<table summary="Math Miscellany" border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">
+<a id="cmd-math-misc-cdots"></a>\cdots<a id="id2530429"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Produces a horizontal ellipsis where the dots
+are raised to the centre of the line.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left"><a id="cmd-math-misc-ddots"></a>\ddots
+<a id="id2530454" class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Produces a diagonal ellipsis.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left"><a id="cmd-math-misc-frac"></a>\frac{num}{den}
+<a id="id2530477" class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Produces the fraction
+<tt class="literal">num</tt> divided by
+<tt class="literal">den</tt>.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left"><a id="cmd-math-misc-ldots"></a>\ldots
+<a id="id2530510" class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Produces an ellipsis. This command works in any
+mode, not just math mode.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">
+<a id="cmd-math-misc-overbrace"></a>\overbrace{text}
+<a id="id2530534" class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Generates a brace over text.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left"><a id="cmd-math-misc-overline"></a>\overline{text}
+<a id="id2530557" class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Causes the argument text to be
+overlined.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left"><a id="cmd-math-misc-sqrt"></a>\sqrt[root]{arg}
+<a id="id2530580" class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Produces the square root of its argument. The
+optional argument, <tt class="literal">root</tt>, determines what
+root to produce, i.e., the cube root of
+<tt class="literal">x+y</tt> would be typed as
+<tt class="literal">$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$</tt>.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">
+<a id="cmd-math-misc-underbrace"></a>\underbrace{text}
+<a id="id2530623" class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Generates text with a brace
+underneath.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">
+<a id="cmd-math-misc-underline"></a>\underline{text}
+<a id="id2530646" class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Causes the argument text to be underlined. This
+command can also be used in paragraph and LR modes.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left"><a id="cmd-math-misc-vdots"></a>\vdots
+<a id="id2530671" class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Produces a vertical ellipsis.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left"><a id="cmd-math-misc-ensuremath"></a>\ensuremath{}
+<a id="id2530695" class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">It's argument is set in math mode. This is
+needed for own definitions.</td></tr></tbody></table></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="modes"></a>2.3.14
+Modes</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2530726" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2530733"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2530740"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2530747"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2530754" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one of
+three modes:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>paragraph mode</li>
+<li>Math mode</li>
+<li>Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short</li></ul></div>
+<p>LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a
+different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes.
+Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or
+when LaTeX is processing the argument of certain text-producing
+commands.</p>
+<p><span class="emphasis"><em>Paragraph mode</em></span> is the
+most common; it's the one LaTeX is in when processing ordinary
+text. In that mode, LaTeX breaks your text into lines and breaks
+the lines into pages. LaTeX is in <span class="emphasis"><em>math
+mode</em></span> when it's generating a mathematical formula. In
+<span class="emphasis"><em>LR mode</em></span>, as in paragraph
+mode, LaTeX considers the output that it produces to be a string of
+words with spaces between them. However, unlike paragraph mode,
+LaTeX keeps going from left to right; it never starts a new line in
+LR mode. Even if you put a hundred words into an
+<tt class="literal">\mbox</tt>, LaTeX would keep typesetting them
+from left to right inside a single box, and then complain because
+the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line.</p>
+<p>LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an
+<tt class="literal">\mbox</tt> command. You can get it to enter a
+different mode inside the box - for example, you can make it enter
+math mode to put a formula in the box. There are also several
+text-producing commands and environments for making a box that put
+LaTeX in paragraph mode. The box make by one of these commands or
+environments will be called a <tt class="literal">parbox</tt>. When
+LaTeX is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in
+<span class="emphasis"><em>inner paragraph mode</em></span>. Its
+normal paragraph mode, which it starts out in, is called
+<span class="emphasis"><em>outer paragraph
+mode</em></span>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="page-styles"></a>2.3.15 Page
+Styles</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2530916" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2530922"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\documentclass</tt> command determines
+the size and position of the page's head and foot. The page style
+determines what goes in them.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-maketitle"></a>\maketitle</h5>
+<a id="id2530951" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2530958"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\maketitle</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\maketitle</tt> command generates a
+title on a separate title page. In the
+<tt class="literal">article</tt> class,
+<tt class="literal">\maketitle</tt> will also switch to pagestyle
+<tt class="literal">plain</tt>. See <a href="#page-styles"
+title="2.3.15 Page Styles">Page Styles</a> for commands to change
+page numbering.</p>
+<p>Information used to produce the title is obtained from the
+following declarations:</p>
+<p>See <a href="#page-styles" title="2.3.15 Page Styles">Page
+Styles</a> for the commands to give the information.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-author"></a>\author</h5>
+<a id="id2531036" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2531043"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\author{names}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\author</tt> command declares the
+author(s), where <tt class="literal">names</tt> is a list of
+authors separated by <tt class="literal">\and</tt> commands. Use
+<tt class="literal">\\</tt> to separate lines within a single
+author's entry -- for example, to give the author's institution or
+address.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-date"></a>\date</h5>
+<a id="id2531098" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2531105"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\date{text}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\date</tt> command declares
+<span class="emphasis"><em>text</em></span> to be the document's
+date. With no <tt class="literal">\date</tt> command, the current
+date is used.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-thanks"></a>\thanks</h5>
+<a id="id2531149" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2531156"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\thanks{text}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\thanks</tt> command produces a
+<tt class="literal">\footnote</tt> to the title.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-title"></a>\title</h5>
+<a id="id2531196" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2531203"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\title{text}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\title</tt> command declares
+<tt class="literal">text</tt> to be the title. Use
+<tt class="literal">\\</tt> to tell LaTeX where to start a new line
+in a long title.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-pagenumbering"></a>\pagenumbering</h5>
+<a id="id2531254" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2531261"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\pagenumbering{num_style}</tt></p>
+<p>Specifies the style of page numbers. Possible values of
+<tt class="literal">num_style</tt> are:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">arabic</tt> - Arabic numerals</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">roman</tt> - Lowercase Roman numerals</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">Roman</tt> - Uppercase Roman numerals</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">alph</tt> - Lowercase letters</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">Alph</tt> - Uppercase
+letters</li></ul></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-pagestyle"></a>\pagestyle</h5>
+<a id="id2531355" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\pagestyle{option}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\pagestyle</tt> command changes the
+style from the current page on throughout the remainder of your
+document.</p>
+<p>The valid options are:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">plain</tt> - Just a plain page number.</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">empty</tt> - Produces empty heads and feet
+- no page numbers.</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">headings</tt> - Puts running headings on
+each page. The document style specifies what goes in the
+headings.</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">myheadings</tt> - You specify what is to go
+in the heading with the <tt class="literal">\markboth</tt> or the
+<tt class="literal">\markright</tt> commands.</li></ul></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-markboth"></a>\markboth</h5>
+<a id="id2531458" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\markboth{left head}{right head}
+</pre>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\markboth</tt> command is used in
+conjunction with the page style <tt class="literal">myheadings</tt>
+for setting both the left and the right heading. You should note
+that a <span class="emphasis"><em>left-hand heading</em></span> is
+generated by the last <tt class="literal">\markboth</tt> command
+before the end of the page, while a
+<span class="emphasis"><em>right-hand heading</em></span> is
+generated by the first <tt class="literal">\markboth</tt> or
+<tt class="literal">\markright</tt> that comes on the page if there
+is one, otherwise by the last one before the page.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-markright"></a>\markright</h5>
+<a id="id2531527" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\markright{right head}
+</pre>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\markright</tt> command is used in
+conjunction with the page style <tt class="literal">myheadings</tt>
+for setting the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged.
+You should note that a <span class="emphasis"><em>left-hand
+heading</em></span> is generated by the last
+<tt class="literal">\markboth</tt> command before the end of the
+page, while a <span class="emphasis"><em>right-hand
+heading</em></span> is generated by the first
+<tt class="literal">\markboth</tt> or
+<tt class="literal">\markright</tt> that comes on the page if there
+is one, otherwise by the last one before the page.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-thispagestyle"></a>\thispagestyle</h5>
+<a id="id2531597" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\thispagestyle{option}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\thispagestyle</tt> command works in the
+same manner as the <tt class="literal">\pagestyle</tt> command
+except that it changes the style for the current page
+only.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="sectioning"></a>2.3.16
+Sectioning</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2531644" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2531651"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2531658"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2531664"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2531671"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2531678" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text
+into units.</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-sectioning-part"></a><tt class="literal">\part</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-sectioning-chapter"></a><tt class="literal">\chapter</tt>
+(report and book class only)</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-sectioning-section"></a><tt class="literal">\section</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-sectioning-subsection"></a><tt class="literal">\subsection</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-sectioning-subsubsection"></a><tt class="literal">\subsubsection</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-sectioning-paragraph"></a><tt class="literal">\paragraph</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-sectioning-subparagraph"></a><tt class="literal">\subparagraph</tt></li></ul></div>
+<p>All sectioning commands take the same general form, i.e.,</p>
+<p><tt class="literal">\chapter[optional]{title}</tt></p>
+<p>In addition to providing the heading in the text, the mandatory
+argument of the sectioning command can appear in two other
+places:</p>
+<div class="orderedlist">
+<ol type="1">
+<li>
+<p>The table of contents</p></li>
+<li>
+<p>The running head at the top of the page</p></li></ol></div>
+<p>You may not want the same thing to appear in these other two
+places as appears in the text heading. To handle this situation,
+the sectioning commands have an <tt class="literal">optional</tt>
+argument that provides the text for these other two purposes.</p>
+<p>All sectioning commands have <tt class="literal">*</tt>-forms
+that print a <span class="emphasis"><em>title</em></span>, but do
+not include a number and do not make an entry in the table of
+contents.</p>
+<a id="id2531863" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2531870"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>
+<a id="cmd-sectioning-appendix"></a><tt class="literal">\appendix</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\appendix</tt> command changes the way
+sectional units are numbered. The
+<tt class="literal">\appendix</tt> command generates no text and
+does not affect the numbering of parts. The normal use of this
+command is something like</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\chapter{The First Chapter}
+ ...
+\appendix
+\chapter{The First Appendix}
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="spaces-and-boxes"></a>2.3.17 Spaces &amp;
+Boxes</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2531930" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2531937"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>All the predefined length parameters See
+<a href="#predefined-lengths-title">Predefined lengths</a> can be
+used in the arguments of the box-making commands.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-dotfill"></a>\dotfill</h5>
+<a id="id2531966" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\dotfill</tt> command produces a
+<span class="emphasis"><em>rubber length</em></span> that produces
+dots instead of just spaces.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-hfill"></a>\hfill</h5>
+<a id="id2531997" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\hfill</tt> fill command produces a
+<span class="emphasis"><em>rubber length</em></span> which can
+stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with spaces.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-hrulefill"></a>\hrulefill</h5>
+<a id="id2532029" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\hrulefill</tt> fill command produces a
+<span class="emphasis"><em>rubber length</em></span> which can
+stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal
+rule.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-hspace"></a>\hspace</h5>
+<a id="id2532060" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\hspace{length}, \hspace*{length}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\hspace</tt> command adds horizontal
+space. The length of the space can be expressed in any terms that
+LaTeX understands, i.e., points, inches, etc. You can add negative
+as well as positive space with an <tt class="literal">\hspace</tt>
+command. Adding negative space is like backspacing.</p>
+<p>LaTeX removes horizontal space that comes at the end of a line.
+If you don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the optional
+<tt class="literal">*</tt> argument. Then the space is never
+removed.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-addvspace"></a>\addvspace</h5>
+<a id="id2532127" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2532134"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2532141" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\addvspace{length}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\addvspace</tt> command normally adds a
+vertical space of height length. However, if vertical space has
+already been added to the same point in the output by a previous
+<tt class="literal">\addvspace</tt> command, then this command will
+not add more space than needed to make the natural length of the
+total vertical space equal to <tt class="literal">length</tt>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-bigskip"></a>\bigskip</h5>
+<a id="id2532192" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\bigskip</tt> command is equivalent to
+<tt class="literal">\vspace{bigskipamount}</tt> where
+<tt class="literal">bigskipamount</tt> is determined by the
+document class.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-medskip"></a>\medskip</h5>
+<a id="id2532231" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\medskip</tt> command is equivalent to
+<tt class="literal">\vspace{medskipamount}</tt> where
+<tt class="literal">medskipamount</tt> is determined by the
+document class.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-smallskip"></a>\smallskip</h5>
+<a id="id2532271" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\smallskip</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\smallskip</tt> command is equivalent to
+<tt class="literal">\vspace{smallskipamount}</tt> where
+<tt class="literal">smallskipamount</tt> is determined by the
+document class.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-vfill"></a>\vfill</h5>
+<a id="id2532318" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\vfill</tt> fill command produces a
+rubber length which can stretch or shrink vertically.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-vspace"></a>\vspace</h5>
+<a id="id2532344" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\vspace{length}, \vspace*{length}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\vspace</tt> command adds vertical
+space. The length of the space can be expressed in any terms that
+LaTeX understands, i.e., points, inches, etc. You can add negative
+as well as positive space with an <tt class="literal">\vspace</tt>
+command.</p>
+<p>LaTeX removes vertical space that comes at the end of a page. If
+you don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the optional
+<tt class="literal">*</tt> argument. Then the space is never
+removed.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-fbox"></a>\fbox</h5>
+<a id="id2532410" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\fbox{text}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\fbox</tt> command is exactly the same
+as the <tt class="literal">\mbox</tt> command, except that it puts
+a frame around the outside of the box that it creates.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-framebox"></a>\framebox</h5>
+<a id="id2532450" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\framebox[width][position]{text}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\framebox</tt> command is exactly the
+same as the <tt class="literal">\makebox</tt> command, except that
+it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it creates.</p>
+<p>The framebox command produces a rule of thickness
+<tt class="literal">\fboxrule</tt>, and leaves a space
+<tt class="literal">\fboxsep</tt> between the rule and the contents
+of the box.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-lrbox"></a>lrbox</h5>
+<a id="id2532509" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}</tt></p>
+<p>This is the environment form of
+<tt class="literal">\sbox</tt>.</p>
+<p>The text inside the environment is saved in the box
+<tt class="literal">cmd</tt>, which must have been declared with
+<tt class="literal">\newsavebox</tt>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-makebox"></a>\makebox</h5>
+<a id="id2532560" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\makebox[width][position]{text}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\makebox</tt> command creates a box just
+wide enough to contain the <tt class="literal">text</tt> specified.
+The width of the box is specified by the optional
+<tt class="literal">width</tt> argument. The position of the text
+within the box is determined by the optional
+<tt class="literal">position</tt> argument.</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">c</tt> --- centred (default)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">l</tt> --- flushleft</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">r</tt> --- flushright</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">s</tt> --- stretch from left to right
+margin. The text must contain stretchable space for this to
+work.</li></ul></div>
+<p>See <a href="#cmd-makebox-op-picture-cp">\makebox
+(picture)</a>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-mbox"></a>\mbox</h5>
+<a id="id2532676" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\mbox{text}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\mbox</tt> command creates a box just
+wide enough to hold the text created by its argument.</p>
+<p>Use this command to prevent text from being split across
+lines.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-newsavebox"></a>\newsavebox</h5>
+<a id="id2532716" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\newsavebox{cmd}</tt></p>
+<p>Declares <tt class="literal">cmd</tt>, which must be a command
+name that is not already defined, to be a bin for saving boxes.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-parbox"></a>\parbox</h5>
+<a id="id2532751" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>
+<tt class="literal">\parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text}</tt></p>
+<p>A <tt class="literal">parbox</tt> is a box whose contents are
+created in <tt class="literal">paragraph</tt> mode. The
+<tt class="literal">\parbox</tt> has two mandatory arguments:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">width</tt> - specifies the width of the
+parbox, and</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">text</tt> - the text that goes inside the
+parbox.</li></ul></div>
+<p>LaTeX will position a <tt class="literal">parbox</tt> so its
+centre lines up with the centre of the text line. The optional
+<span class="emphasis"><em>position</em></span> argument allows you
+to line up either the top or bottom line in the parbox (default is
+top).</p>
+<p>If the <span class="emphasis"><em>height</em></span> argument is
+not given, the box will have the natural height of the text.</p>
+<p>The <span class="emphasis"><em>inner-pos</em></span> argument
+controls the placement of the text inside the box. If it is not
+specified, <span class="emphasis"><em>position</em></span> is
+used.</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">t</tt> --- text is placed at the top of the
+box.</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">c</tt> --- text is centred in the box.</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">b</tt> --- text is placed at the bottom of
+the box.</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">s</tt> --- stretch vertically. The text
+must contain vertically stretchable space for this to
+work.</li></ul></div>
+<p>A <tt class="literal">\parbox</tt> command is used for a parbox
+containing a small piece of text, with nothing fancy inside. In
+particular, you shouldn't use any of the paragraph-making
+environments inside a <tt class="literal">\parbox</tt> argument.
+For larger pieces of text, including ones containing a
+paragraph-making environment, you should use a
+<tt class="literal">minipage</tt> environment See
+<a href="#env-minipage">minipage</a>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-raisebox"></a>\raisebox</h5>
+<a id="id2532948" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>
+<tt class="literal">\raisebox{distance}[extend-above][extend-below]{text}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\raisebox</tt> command is used to raise
+or lower text. The first mandatory argument specifies how high the
+text is to be raised (or lowered if it is a negative amount). The
+text itself is processed in <tt class="literal">LR mode</tt>.</p>
+<p>Sometimes it's useful to make LaTeX think something has a
+different size than it really does - or a different size than LaTeX
+would normally think it has. The <tt class="literal">\raisebox</tt>
+command lets you tell LaTeX how tall it is.</p>
+<p>The first optional argument,
+<tt class="literal">extend-above</tt>, makes LaTeX think that the
+text extends above the line by the amount specified. The second
+optional argument, <tt class="literal">extend-below</tt>, makes
+LaTeX think that the text extends below the line by the amount
+specified.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-rule"></a>\rule</h5>
+<a id="id2533042" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>
+<tt class="literal">\rule[raise-height]{width}{thickness}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\rule</tt> command is used to produce
+horizontal lines. The arguments are defined as follows:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">raise-height</tt> - specifies how high to
+raise the rule (optional)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">width</tt> - specifies the length of the
+rule (mandatory)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">thickness</tt> - specifies the thickness of
+the rule (mandatory)</li></ul></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-savebox"></a>\savebox</h5>
+<a id="id2533117" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\savebox{cmd}[width][pos]{text}</tt></p>
+<p>This command typeset <tt class="literal">text</tt> in a box just
+as for <tt class="literal">\makebox</tt>. However, instead of
+printing the resulting box, it saves it in bin
+<tt class="literal">cmd</tt>, which must have been declared with
+<tt class="literal">\newsavebox</tt>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-sbox"></a>\sbox</h5>
+<a id="id2533170" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\sbox{cmd}\{text}</tt></p>
+<p>This commands typesets <tt class="literal">text</tt> in a box
+just as for <tt class="literal">\mbox</tt>. However, instead of
+printing the resulting box, it saves it in
+<tt class="literal">cmd</tt>, which must have been declared with
+<tt class="literal">\newsavebox</tt>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-usebox"></a>\usebox</h5>
+<a id="id2533223" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\usebox{cmd}</tt></p>
+<p>Prints the box most recently saved in bin
+<tt class="literal">cmd</tt> by a <tt class="literal">\savebox</tt>
+command.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="special-characters"></a>2.3.18 Special
+Characters</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2533269" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2533276"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2533283"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2533290" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are
+called <span class="emphasis"><em>special printing
+characters</em></span>, or simply
+<span class="emphasis"><em>special characters</em></span>.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+# $ % &amp; ~ _ ^ \ { }
+</pre>
+<p>Whenever you put one of these special characters into your file,
+you are doing something special. If you simply want the character
+to be printed just as any other letter, include a
+<tt class="literal">\</tt> in front of the character. For example,
+<tt class="literal">\$</tt> will produce <tt class="literal">$</tt>
+in your output.</p>
+<p>One exception to this rule is the <tt class="literal">\</tt>
+itself because <tt class="literal">\\</tt> has its own special
+meaning. A <tt class="literal">\</tt> is produced by typing
+<tt class="literal">$\backslash$</tt> in your file.</p>
+<p>Also, <tt class="literal">\~</tt> means `place a tilde accent
+over the following letter', so you will probably want to use
+<tt class="literal">\verb</tt> instead.</p>
+<a id="id2533390" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2533397"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2533404" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>In addition, you can access any character of a font once you
+know its number by using the <tt class="literal">\symbol</tt>
+command. For example, the character used for displaying spaces in
+the <tt class="literal">\verb*</tt> command has the code decimal
+32, so it can be typed as <tt class="literal">\symbol{32}</tt>.</p>
+<p>You can also specify octal numbers with
+<tt class="literal">'</tt> or hexadecimal numbers with
+<tt class="literal">"</tt>, so the previous example could also be
+written as <tt class="literal">\symbol{'40}</tt> or
+<tt class="literal">\symbol{"20}</tt>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="special-symbols"></a>2.3.19 Special
+Symbols</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2533481" class="indexterm"></a>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="accents-on-chars-title"></a>Accents on
+Characters</h5>
+<a id="id2533505" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The rules differ somewhat depending whether you are in
+<a href="#modes" title="2.3.14 Modes">text mode</a>,
+<a href="#modes" title="2.3.14 Modes">math modes</a>, or the
+<a href="#env-tabbing">tabbing environment</a>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2533542"></a>Text Mode</h5>
+<p>The following accents may be placed on letters. Although
+<span class="emphasis"><em>o</em></span> is used in most of the
+example, the accents may be placed on any letter. Accents may even
+be placed above a <span class="emphasis"><em>missing</em></span>
+letter; for example, <tt class="literal">\~{}</tt> produces a tilde
+over a blank space.</p>
+<p>The following commands may be used only in paragraph or LR
+mode:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">\`{o}</tt> produces a grave accent,
+<span class="emphasis"><em>&ograve;</em></span></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\'{o}</tt> produces an acute accent,
+<span class="emphasis"><em>&oacute;</em></span></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\^{o}</tt> produces a circumflex,
+<span class="emphasis"><em>&ocirc;</em></span></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\"{o}</tt> produces an umlaut or dieresis,
+<span class="emphasis"><em>&ouml;</em></span></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\H{o}</tt> produces a long Hungarian
+umlaut</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\~{o}</tt> produces a tilde,
+<span class="emphasis"><em>&otilde;</em></span></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\c{c}</tt> produces a cedilla,
+<span class="emphasis"><em>&ccedil;</em></span></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\={o}</tt> produces a macron accent (a bar
+over the letter)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\b{o}</tt> produces a bar under the
+letter</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\.{o}</tt> produces a dot over the
+letter</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\d{o}</tt> produces a dot under the
+letter</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\u{o}</tt> produces a breve over the
+letter</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\v{o}</tt> produces a
+<span class="emphasis"><em>v</em></span> over the letter</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\t{oo}</tt> produces a
+<span class="emphasis"><em>tie</em></span> (inverted u) over the
+two letters</li></ul></div>
+<p>Note that the letters <span class="emphasis"><em>i</em></span>
+and <span class="emphasis"><em>j</em></span> require special
+treatment when they are given accents because it is often desirable
+to replace the dot with the accent. For this purpose, the commands
+<tt class="literal">\i</tt> and <tt class="literal">\j</tt> can be
+used to produce dotless letters.</p>
+<p>For example,</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">\^{\i}</tt> should be used for i,
+circumflex, &icirc;</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\"{\i}</tt> should be used for i, umlaut,
+&iuml;</li></ul></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="accents-chars-math"></a>Math Mode</h5>
+<p>Several of the above and some similar accents can also be
+produced in math mode. The following commands may be used
+<span class="emphasis"><em>only</em></span> in math mode:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">\hat{o}</tt> is similar to the circumflex
+(cf. <tt class="literal">\^</tt>)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\widehat{oo}</tt> is a wide version of
+<span class="emphasis"><em>\hat</em></span> over several
+letters</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\check{o}</tt> is a vee or check (cf.
+<tt class="literal">\v</tt>)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\tilde{o}</tt> is a tilde (cf.
+<tt class="literal">\~</tt>)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\widetilde{oo}</tt> is a wide version of
+<tt class="literal">\tilde</tt> over several letters</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\acute{o}</tt> is an acute accent (cf.
+<tt class="literal">\`</tt>)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\grave{o}</tt> is a grave accent (cf.
+<tt class="literal">&gt;\'</tt>)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\dot{o}</tt> is a dot over the letter (cf.
+<tt class="literal">\.</tt>)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\ddot{o}</tt> is a double dot over the
+letter</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\breve{o}</tt> is a breve (cf.
+<tt class="literal">\u</tt>)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\bar{o}</tt> is a macron (cf.
+<tt class="literal">\=</tt>)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\vec{o}</tt> is a vector (arrow) over the
+letter</li></ul></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="accents-chars-tabbing"></a>Tabbing
+Environment</h5>
+<p>Some of the accent marks used in running text have other uses in
+the <a href="#env-tabbing">Tabbing Environment</a>. In that case
+they can be created with the following command:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">&gt;\a'</tt> for an acute accent</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\a`</tt> for a grave accent</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\a=</tt> for a macron
+accent</li></ul></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="arrows-title"></a>Arrows</h5>
+<a id="id2534131" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>LaTeX provides commands for all sorts of arrows. The following
+commands are used only in math mode.</p>
+<p>In general the command names are created from
+<tt class="literal">left</tt>, <tt class="literal">right</tt>,
+<tt class="literal">up</tt>, or <tt class="literal">down</tt>.
+<tt class="literal">leftright</tt> gives a double headed arrow.
+Prefacing with <tt class="literal">long</tt> gives a longer arrow.
+Capitalizing the first letter gives a double-shanked arrow.</p>
+<p>Examples are:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">\leftarrow</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\Leftarrow</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\longleftarrow</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\Longleftarrow</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\rightarrow</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\Rightarrow</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\longrightarrow</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\Longrightarrow</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\leftrightarrow</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\Leftrightarrow</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\longleftrightarrow</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\uparrow</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\downarrow</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\Uparrow</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">&gt;\nearrow</tt> points from southwest to
+northeast</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\searrow</tt> points from northwest to
+southeast</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\swarrow</tt> points from northeast to
+southwest</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\nwarrow</tt> points from southeast to
+northwest</li></ul></div>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\stackrel</tt> command is useful for
+putting things over or under your arrow.</p>
+<p>See also:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><a href="#math-symbols-title">Math Symbols</a></li>
+<li><a href="#binary-and-relational-ops-title">Binary and
+Relational Operators</a></li>
+<li><a href="#greek-letters-title">Greek Letters</a></li>
+<li><a href="#misc-symbols-title">Miscellaneous Symbols</a></li>
+<li><a href="#variable-math-size-symbols-title">Variable Size Math
+Symbols</a></li></ul></div>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="binary-and-relational-ops-title"></a>Binary and Relational
+Operators</h5>
+<a id="id2534488" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2534497"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2534507"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2534519" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Some <span class="emphasis"><em>math</em></span> symbols are
+obtained by typing the corresponding keyboard character. Examples
+include</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
++ - = &lt; &gt;
+</pre>
+<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
+<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
+<p>plus, minus, and equal sign may be used in either text or math
+mode, but &lt; and &gt; are math mode only (they produce inverted
+exclamation and question marks, respectively, in text
+mode).</p></div>
+<p>The following commands may be used only in math mode:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">\pm</tt> plus or minus sign</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\mp</tt> minus or plus sign</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\times</tt> times (an "x")</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\div</tt> divided by sign</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\ast</tt> an asterisk (centered)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\star</tt> a five-point star
+(centered)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\bullet</tt> a bullet</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\circ</tt> an open bullet</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\cdot</tt> a centered dot</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\leq</tt> less than or equal to</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\ll</tt> much less than</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\subset</tt> is a subset of</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\geq</tt> greater than or equal to</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\gg</tt> much greater than</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\equiv</tt> equivalence symbol</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\sim</tt> similar to</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\simeq</tt> similar or equal to</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\approx</tt> approximately equal to</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\neq</tt> not equal to</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\per</tt> "perpendicular to" symbols</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\propto</tt> proportional
+to</li></ul></div>
+<p>Note that <span class="emphasis"><em>greater than</em></span>
+and <span class="emphasis"><em>less than</em></span> are obtained
+simply by entering <tt class="literal">&gt;</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">&lt;</tt>.</p>
+<p>A slash, indicating <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span>
+can be placed through a symbol (or a letter) with the
+<tt class="literal">\not</tt> command. For example, not less than
+is <tt class="literal">\not&lt;</tt> and not less than or equal to
+is <tt class="literal">\not\leq</tt>. If the slash isn't properly
+positioned it can be moved by putting a math mode spacing command
+between the <tt class="literal">\not</tt>and the symbol.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="delimiters-title"></a>Delimiters</h5>
+<a id="id2534883" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Delimiters are objects which act logically like parentheses.
+These can be used only in math mode.</p>
+<p>The delimiters recognized by LaTeX include:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">(</tt> (left parenthesis)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">)</tt> (right parenthesis)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">[</tt> (left bracket)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">]</tt> (right bracket)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\{</tt> (left brace)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\}</tt> (right brace)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">|</tt> (vertical line)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\vert</tt> (vertical line)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\|</tt> (double vertical lines)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\Vert</tt> (double vertical lines)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">/</tt> (slash)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\backslash</tt> (backslash)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\langle</tt> (left angle bracket)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\rangle</tt> (right angle bracket)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\uparrow</tt> (uparrow)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\downarrow</tt> (down arrow)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\updownarrow</tt> (up/down
+arrow)</li></ul></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2535106"></a>Making Delimiters the Right
+Size</h5>
+<p>Delimiters in formulas should be big enough to
+<span class="emphasis"><em>fit</em></span> around the formulas they
+delimit (for example arround arrays). To obtain
+<span class="emphasis"><em>stretchable</em></span> delimiters
+(LaTeX makes them the appropriate size) type a
+<tt class="literal">\left</tt> or <tt class="literal">\right</tt>
+command before the delimiter. <tt class="literal">\left</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">\right</tt> commands must come in matching
+pairs, although the delimiters themselves need not be the same.
+Thus, <tt class="literal">\left \{ ... \right \[</tt> produces a
+legal pair. In cases where only one delimiter is desired, it is
+possible to make the matching delimiter
+<span class="emphasis"><em>invisible</em></span> by typing a period
+(<tt class="literal">.</tt>) after the command, i.e.,
+<tt class="literal">\left.</tt> or
+<tt class="literal">\right.</tt></p>
+<p>In an <a href="#env-eqnarray">eqnarray</a> environment the
+matching <tt class="literal">\left</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">\right</tt> cannot be split between lines and
+it may be necessary to use an
+<span class="emphasis"><em>invisible</em></span>
+<tt class="literal">\right.</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">\left.</tt> to terminate and begin parts on
+different lines. In this case a second problem may arise, since the
+size of the delimiters will be chosen only for the
+<span class="emphasis"><em>local part</em></span>, so that the size
+of the <span class="emphasis"><em>visible</em></span>
+<span class="emphasis"><em>left</em></span> and
+<span class="emphasis"><em>right</em></span> delimiters might not
+match. The solution is to trick LaTeX into thinking that both parts
+have the same vertical height. This can be done by placing a strut,
+that is a zero-width <tt class="literal">\rule</tt>. It can also be
+accomplished with the <tt class="literal">\vphantom</tt> command,
+which I have not found documented, but which appears to work.</p>
+<p><tt class="literal">\vphantom{construct}</tt> creates a
+zero-width object with the height of
+<tt class="literal">construct</tt>. The argument can contain things
+such as <tt class="literal">\frac</tt> or the
+<span class="emphasis"><em>variable size math symbols</em></span>
+and should be chosen according to what is in the section with the
+delimiter you want to match.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2535294"></a>Some Examples</h5>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2535300"></a>A six-j symbol</h5>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\[ \left\{
+\begin{array}{ccc}
+a &amp; b &amp; c \\
+d &amp; e &amp; f \end{array}
+\right&gt;\} \]
+</pre>
+<p>This should be displayed something like (insofar as it can be
+rendered in "ascii art"):</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+( a b c )
+- -
+( d e f )
+</pre>
+<p>Note that the <tt class="literal">\[ ... \]</tt> set this off as
+<span class="emphasis"><em>Display Math</em></span>, and that the
+<span class="emphasis"><em>Array Environment</em></span> is used to
+generate the three centered columns inside the braces.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2535342"></a>A "multiple choice"
+equation</h5>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\[ f(x) =
+ \left\{ \begin{array}{l}
+ 0, x &lt; 0 \\ 1, x = 0 \\
+ 2, x &gt; 0 \end{array} \right. \]
+</pre>
+<p>will be displayed as</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+ ( 0, x &lt; 0
+f(x) = - 1, x = 0
+ ( 2, x &gt; 0
+</pre>
+<p>Note that the <span class="emphasis"><em>invisible</em></span>
+<tt class="literal">\right</tt> delimiter is specified using a
+<span class="emphasis"><em>period</em></span>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="ellipsis-title"></a>Ellipsis</h5>
+<a id="id2535395" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Ellipses (three dots) can be produced by the following
+commands</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">\ldots</tt> horizontally at bottom of
+line</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\cdots</tt> horizontally center of line
+(math mode only)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\ddots</tt> diagonal (math mode only)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\vdots</tt> vertical (math mode
+only)</li></ul></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="greek-letters-title"></a>Greek
+Letters</h5>
+<a id="id2535471" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>These commands may be used only in math mode:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">\alpha</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\beta</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\gamma</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\delta</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\epsilon</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\varepsilon</tt> (variation,
+script-like)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\zeta</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\eta</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\theta</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\vartheta</tt> (variation,
+script-like)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\iota</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\kappa</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\lambda</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\mu</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\nu</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\xi</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\pi</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\varpi</tt> (variation)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\rho</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\varrho</tt> (variation, with the
+tail)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\sigma</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\varsigma</tt> (variation,
+script-like)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\tau</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\upsilon</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\phi</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\varphi</tt> (variation, script-like)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\chi</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\psi</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\omega</tt></li></ul></div>
+<p>Capital letters:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">\Gamma</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\Delta</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\Theta</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\Lambda</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\Xi</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\Pi</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\Sigma</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\Upsilon</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\Phi</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\Psi</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">\Omega</tt></li></ul></div>
+<p>See also:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><a href="#math-symbols-title">Math Symbols</a></li>
+<li><a href="#accents-on-chars-title">Accents</a></li>
+<li><a href="#misc-symbols-title">Miscellaneous
+Symbols</a></li></ul></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="misc-symbols-title"></a>Miscellaneous
+Symbols</h5>
+<a id="id2535966" class="indexterm"></a>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2535978"></a>Some symbols for math</h5>
+<p>The following symbols are also used only in math mode</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-misc-symbol-aleph"></a><tt class="literal">\aleph</tt>
+Hebrew aleph</li>
+<li><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-hbar"></a><tt class="literal">\hbar</tt>
+h-bar, Planck's constant</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-misc-symbol-imath"></a><tt class="literal">\imath</tt>
+variation on <span class="emphasis"><em>i</em></span>; no dot</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-misc-symbol-jmath"></a><tt class="literal">\jmath</tt>
+variation on <span class="emphasis"><em>j</em></span>; no dot</li>
+<li><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-ell"></a><tt class="literal">\ell</tt>
+script (loop) <span class="emphasis"><em>l</em></span></li>
+<li><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-wp"></a><tt class="literal">\wp</tt>
+fancy script lowercase
+<span class="emphasis"><em>P</em></span></li>
+<li><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-re"></a><tt class="literal">\Re</tt>
+script capital <span class="emphasis"><em>R</em></span>
+(<span class="emphasis"><em>Real</em></span>)</li>
+<li><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-im"></a><tt class="literal">\Im</tt>
+script capital <span class="emphasis"><em>I</em></span>
+(<span class="emphasis"><em>Imaginary</em></span>)</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-misc-symbol-prime"></a><tt class="literal">\prime</tt>
+prime (also obtained by typing <tt class="literal">'</tt>)</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-misc-symbol-nabla"></a><tt class="literal">\nabla</tt>
+inverted capital Delta</li>
+<li><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-surd"></a><tt class="literal">\surd</tt>
+radical (square root) symbol</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-misc-symbol-angle"></a><tt class="literal">\angle</tt>
+angle symbol</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-misc-symbol-forall"></a><tt class="literal">\forall</tt>
+<span class="emphasis"><em>for all</em></span> (inverted A)</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-misc-symbol-exists"></a><tt class="literal">\exists</tt>
+<span class="emphasis"><em>exists</em></span> (left-facing E)</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-misc-symbol-partial"></a><tt class="literal">\partial</tt>
+partial derivative symbol</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-misc-symbol-infty"></a><tt class="literal">\infty</tt>
+infinity symbol</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-misc-symbol-triangle"></a><tt class="literal">\triangle</tt>
+open triangle symbol</li>
+<li><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-box"></a><tt class="literal">\Box</tt>
+open square</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-misc-symbol-diamond"></a><tt class="literal">\Diamond</tt>
+open diamond</li>
+<li><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-flat"></a><tt class="literal">\flat</tt>
+music: flat symbol</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-misc-symbol-natural"></a><tt class="literal">\natural</tt>
+music: natural symbol</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-misc-symbol-clubsuit"></a><tt class="literal">\clubsuit</tt>
+playing cards: club suit symbol</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-misc-symbol-diamondsuit"></a><tt class="literal">\diamondsuit</tt>
+playing cards: diamond suit symbol</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-misc-symbol-heartsuit"></a><tt class="literal">\heartsuit</tt>
+playing cards: heart suit symbol</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-misc-symbol-spadsuit"></a><tt class="literal">\spadesuit</tt>
+playing cards: space suit symbol</li></ul></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2536435"></a>Some Other Symbols</h5>
+<p>The following symbols can be used in any mode:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><a id="cmd-other-symbol-dag"></a><tt class="literal">\dag</tt>
+dagger</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-other-symbol-ddag"></a>&gt;<tt class="literal">\ddag</tt>
+double dagger</li>
+<li><a id="cmd-other-symbol-s"></a>&gt;<tt class="literal">\S</tt>
+section symbol</li>
+<li><a id="cmd-other-symbol-p"></a>&gt;<tt class="literal">\P</tt>
+paragraph symbol</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-other-symbol-copyright"></a>&gt;<tt class="literal">\copyright</tt>
+copyright symbol</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-other-symbol-pounds"></a>&gt;<tt class="literal">\pounds</tt>
+British pound sterling symbol</li></ul></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2536553"></a>Calligraphic Style
+Letters</h5>
+<p>Twenty-six calligraphic letters are provided (the upper case
+alphabet). These can only be used in math mode.</p>
+<p>In LaTeX 2.09 they are produced with the
+<tt class="literal">\cal</tt> declaration:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+${\cal A}$
+</pre>
+<p>In LaTeX2e they are obtained with the
+<tt class="literal">\mathcal</tt> command:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+$\mathcal{CAL}$
+</pre>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="math-functions-title"></a>Math
+Functions</h5>
+<a id="id2536611" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Functions like <span class="emphasis"><em>log</em></span> or
+<span class="emphasis"><em>cos</em></span> are normally used in
+math mode. However, inmath mode strings of letters are treated as a
+product of variables, which would normally be displayed in math
+italics rather than a text font which would be appropriate for
+these functions. To get proper display of such functions they are
+generated with LaTeX commands.</p>
+<p>Some of these commands are:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-arccos"></a><tt class="literal">\arccos</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-arcsin"></a><tt class="literal">\arcsin</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-arctan"></a><tt class="literal">\arctan</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-cos"></a><tt class="literal">\cos</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-cosh"></a><tt class="literal">\cosh</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-cot"></a><tt class="literal">\cot</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-coth"></a><tt class="literal">\coth</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-csc"></a><tt class="literal">\csc</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-deg"></a><tt class="literal">\deg</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-det"></a><tt class="literal">\det</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-dim"></a><tt class="literal">\dim</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-exp"></a><tt class="literal">\exp</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-gcd"></a><tt class="literal">\gcd</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-hom"></a><tt class="literal">\hom</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-inf"></a><tt class="literal">\inf</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-ker"></a><tt class="literal">\ker</tt></li>
+<li><a id="cmd-math-func-lg"></a><tt class="literal">\lg</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-lim"></a><tt class="literal">\lim</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-liminf"></a><tt class="literal">\liminf</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-limsup"></a><tt class="literal">\limsup</tt></li>
+<li><a id="cmd-math-func-ln"></a><tt class="literal">\ln</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-log"></a><tt class="literal">\log</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-max"></a><tt class="literal">\max</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-min"></a><tt class="literal">\min</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-sec"></a><tt class="literal">\sec</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-sin"></a><tt class="literal">\sin</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-sinh"></a><tt class="literal">\sinh</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-sup"></a><tt class="literal">\sup</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-tan"></a><tt class="literal">\tan</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-tanh"></a><tt class="literal">\tanh</tt></li></ul></div>
+<p>Two commands are provided for the "modulus" function</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-bmod"></a><tt class="literal">\bmod</tt></li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-func-pmod"></a><tt class="literal">\pmod{}</tt></li></ul></div>
+<p>The former would be used to write "a mod b" as
+<tt class="literal">a \bmod b</tt> and the latter, which requires
+an argument that is displayed in parentheses, would be used to
+write "n = i (mod j)" as <tt class="literal">n = i
+\pmod{j}</tt></p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="variable-math-size-symbols-title"></a>Variable Size Math
+Symbols</h5>
+<a id="id2537138" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The size of some mathematical symbols, notably summation signs,
+product signs, and integral signs, depends on the environment in
+which they appear (i.e., <tt class="literal">displaymath</tt> as
+opposed to <tt class="literal">math</tt> environments.</p>
+<p>These include:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><a id="cmd-math-symbol-sum"></a><tt class="literal">\sum</tt> a
+summation sign (capital sigma)</li>
+<li><a id="cmd-math-symbol-prod"></a><tt class="literal">\prod</tt>
+a product (capital pi)</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-symbol-coprod"></a><tt class="literal">\coprod</tt>
+a coproduct (inverted capital pi)</li>
+<li><a id="cmd-math-symbol-int"></a><tt class="literal">\int</tt>
+an integral sign</li>
+<li><a id="cmd-math-symbol-oint"></a><tt class="literal">\oint</tt>
+a surface (circular) integral sign</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-symbol-bigcup"></a><tt class="literal">\bigcup</tt>
+big "U"</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-symbol-bigcap"></a><tt class="literal">\bigcap</tt>
+big inverted "U"</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-symbol-bigvee"></a><tt class="literal">\bigvee</tt>
+big "V"</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-symbol-bigwedge"></a><tt class="literal">\bigwedge</tt>
+big inverted "V"</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-symbol-bigodot"></a><tt class="literal">\bigodot</tt>
+big "O" with dot at center</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-symbol-bigotimes"></a><tt class="literal">\bigotimes</tt>
+big "O" with cross inside</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-symbol-bigoplus"></a><tt class="literal">\bigoplus</tt>
+big "O" with a + inside</li>
+<li>
+<a id="cmd-math-symbol-biguplus"></a><tt class="literal">\biguplus</tt>
+big "U" with a + inside</li></ul></div>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\sqrt</tt> command also produces a
+variable size symbol appropriate for the size of hte radicand
+argument.</p>
+<p>The "limits" associated with these symbols are entered as
+<span class="emphasis"><em>subscripts</em></span> for entries
+appearing below the symbol and as
+<span class="emphasis"><em>superscripts</em></span> for entries
+appearing above the symbol. For example the sum from n=0 to
+infinity of x<sup>n</sup> would be entered as</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\sum_{n=0}^{\infty} x_{n}
+</pre>
+<p>The actual placement of the limits depends on whether this is in
+<tt class="literal">displaymath</tt> mode in which case they are
+placed below/above or in
+<span class="emphasis"><em>math</em></span> mode in running text in
+which case they are placed as regular subscripts and
+superscripts.</p>
+<p>Note that it is possible to treat several of these symbols (a
+common example would be a double sum) as a single symbol for
+placing limits above and/or below by using the
+<tt class="literal">\mathop</tt> command.</p>
+<p><span class="emphasis"><em>Hats</em></span> and
+<span class="emphasis"><em>tildes</em></span> over symbols which
+stretch (as best they can) to the correct size for their arguments
+are produced by <tt class="literal">\widehat</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">\widetilde</tt></p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="splitting-the-input"></a>2.3.20 Splitting
+the Input</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2537484" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2537491"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting
+the whole input in a single large file, it's more efficient to
+split it into several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate
+files you use, there is one that is the root file; it is the one
+whose name you type when you run LaTeX.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-include-title"></a>\include</h5>
+<a id="id2537521" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\include{file}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\include</tt> command is used in
+conjunction with the <tt class="literal">\includeonly</tt> command
+for selective inclusion of files. The <tt class="literal">file</tt>
+argument is the first name of a file, denoting
+<tt class="filename">file.tex</tt>. If
+<tt class="literal">file</tt> is one the file names in the file
+list of the <tt class="literal">\includeonly</tt> command or if
+there is no <tt class="literal">\includeonly</tt> command, the
+<tt class="literal">\include</tt> command is equivalent to</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\clearpage \input{file} \clearpage
+</pre>
+<p>except that if the file <tt class="filename">file.tex</tt> does
+not exist, then a warning message rather than an error is produced.
+If the file is not in the file list, the
+<tt class="literal">\include</tt> command is equivalent to
+<tt class="literal">\clearpage</tt>.</p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\include</tt> command may not appear in
+the preamble or in a file read by another
+<tt class="literal">\include</tt> command.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-includeonly-title"></a>\includeonly</h5>
+<a id="id2537650" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>
+<tt class="literal">\includeonly{</tt><span class="emphasis"><em>file_list</em></span><tt class="literal">
+}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\includeonly</tt> command controls which
+files will be read in by an <tt class="literal">\include</tt>
+command. <span class="emphasis"><em>file_list</em></span> should be
+a comma-separated list of filenames. Each filename must match
+exactly a filename specified in a <tt class="literal">\include</tt>
+command. This command can only appear in the preamble.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-input-title"></a>\input</h5>
+<a id="id2537710" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\input{file}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\input</tt> command causes the indicated
+<tt class="literal">file</tt> to be read and processed, exactly as
+if its contents had been inserted in the current file at that
+point. The file name may be a complete file name with extension or
+just a first name, in which case the file
+<tt class="filename">file.tex</tt> is used.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="starting-and-ending"></a>2.3.21 Starting
+&amp; Ending</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2537767" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2537774"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Your input file must contain the following commands as a
+minimum:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\documentclass{class}
+\begin{document}
+ ... your text goes here ...
+\end{document}
+</pre>
+<p>where the <tt class="literal">class</tt> selected is one of the
+valid classes for LaTeX. See <a href="#document-classes"
+title="2.3.4 Document Classes">Document Classes</a> (and see
+<a href="#overview"
+title="2.2 Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide ">Overview</a>), for
+details of the various document classes available locally.</p>
+<p>You may include other LaTeX commands between the
+<tt class="literal">\documentclass</tt> and the
+<tt class="literal">\begin{document}</tt> commands (i.e., in the
+`preamble').</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="table-of-contents"></a>2.3.22 Table of
+Contents</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2537859" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>A table of contents is produced with the
+<tt class="literal">\tableofcontents</tt> <a id="id2537874"
+class="indexterm"></a> command. You put the command right where you
+want the table of contents to go; LaTeX does the rest for you. It
+produces a heading, but it does not automatically start a new page.
+If you want a new page after the table of contents, include a
+<tt class="literal">\newpage</tt> command after the
+<tt class="literal">\tableofcontents</tt> command.</p>
+<p>There are similar commands
+<tt class="literal">\listoffigures</tt> <a id="id2537912"
+class="indexterm"></a> and <tt class="literal">\listoftables</tt>
+<a id="id2537925" class="indexterm"></a> for producing a list of
+figures and a list of tables, respectively. Everything works
+exactly the same as for the table of contents.</p>
+<p>NOTE: If you want any of these items to be generated, you cannot
+have the <tt class="literal">\nofiles</tt> <a id="id2537945"
+class="indexterm"></a> command in your document.</p>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-addcontentsline-title"></a>\addcontentsline</h5>
+<a id="id2537964" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>
+<tt class="literal">\addcontentsline{file}{sec_unit}{entry}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\addcontentsline</tt> command adds an
+entry to the specified list or table where:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">file</tt> is the extension of the file on
+which information is to be written: <tt class="literal">toc</tt>
+(table of contents), <tt class="literal">lof</tt> (list of
+figures), or <tt class="literal">lot</tt> (list of tables).</li>
+<li>
+<p><tt class="literal">sec_unit</tt> controls the formatting of the
+entry. It should be one of the following, depending upon the value
+of the file argument:</p>
+<div class="orderedlist">
+<ol type="1">
+<li><tt class="literal">toc</tt> --- the name of the sectional
+unit, such as part or subsection.</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">lof</tt> --- figure</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">lot</tt> --- table</li></ol></div></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">entry</tt> is the text of the
+entry.</li></ul></div>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="cmd-addtocontents-title"></a>\addtocontents</h5>
+<a id="id2538097" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\addtocontents{file}{text}</tt></p>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\addtocontents</tt> command adds text
+(or formatting commands) directly to the file that generates the
+table of contents or list of figures or tables.</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">file</tt> is the extension of the file on
+which information is to be written: <tt class="literal">toc</tt>
+(table of contents), <tt class="literal">lof</tt> (list of
+figures), or <tt class="literal">lot</tt> (list of tables).</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">text</tt> is the information to be
+written.</li></ul></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="terminal-input-slash-output"></a>2.3.23
+Terminal Input/Output</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2538186" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2538193"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-typein-title"></a>\typein</h5>
+<a id="id2538211" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\typein[cmd]{msg}</tt></p>
+<p>Prints <tt class="literal">msg</tt> on the terminal and causes
+LaTeX to stop and wait for you to type a line of input, ending with
+return. If the <tt class="literal">cmd</tt> argument is missing,
+the typed input is processed as if it had been included in the
+input file in place of the <tt class="literal">\typein</tt>
+command. If the <tt class="literal">cmd</tt> argument is present,
+it must be a command name. This command name is then defined or
+redefined to be the typed input.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-typeout-title"></a>\typeout</h5>
+<a id="id2538271" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\typeout{msg}</tt></p>
+<p>Prints <tt class="literal">msg</tt> on the terminal and in the
+<tt class="literal">log</tt> file. Commands in
+<tt class="literal">msg</tt> that are defined with
+<tt class="literal">\newcommand</tt> or
+<tt class="literal">\renewcommand</tt> are replaced by their
+definitions before being printed.</p>
+<p>LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single
+space and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to
+<tt class="literal">msg</tt>. A <tt class="literal">\space</tt>
+command in <tt class="literal">msg</tt> causes a single space to be
+printed. A <tt class="literal">^^J</tt> in
+<tt class="literal">msg</tt> prints a newline.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="typefaces"></a>2.3.24
+Typefaces</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2538374" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2538381"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">typeface</tt> is specified by giving the
+<span class="emphasis"><em>size</em></span> and
+<span class="emphasis"><em>style</em></span>. A typeface is also
+called a <span class="emphasis"><em>font</em></span>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="styles-title"></a>\Styles</h5>
+<a id="id2538418" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2538425"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2538432" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX.</p>
+<p>These commands are used like <tt class="literal">\textit{italics
+text}</tt>. The corresponding command in parenthesis is the
+<span class="emphasis"><em>declaration form</em></span>, which
+takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until
+the next type style command or the end of the current group.</p>
+<p>The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say
+<tt class="literal">\sffamily\bfseries</tt> to get sans serif
+boldface.</p>
+<p>You can also use the environment form of the declaration forms;
+e.g.
+<tt class="literal">\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}</tt>.</p>
+<div class="table"><a id="id2538486"></a>
+<p class="title"><b>Table&nbsp;1.9.&nbsp;Typefaces</b></p>
+<table summary="Typefaces" border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\textrm (\rmfamily) <a id="id2538519"
+class="indexterm"></a> <a id="id2538526"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Roman.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\textit (\itshape) <a id="id2538544"
+class="indexterm"></a> <a id="id2538551" class="indexterm"></a>,
+\emph <a id="id2538558" class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Emphasis (toggles between \textit and
+\textrm).</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\textmd (\mdseries) <a id="id2538577"
+class="indexterm"></a> <a id="id2538584"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Medium weight (default). The opposite of
+boldface.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\textbf (\bfseries) <a id="id2538603"
+class="indexterm"></a> <a id="id2538610"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Boldface.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\textup (\upshape) <a id="id2538628"
+class="indexterm"></a> <a id="id2538635"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Upright (default). The opposite of
+slanted.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\textsl (\slshape) <a id="id2538653"
+class="indexterm"></a> <a id="id2538660"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Slanted.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\textsf (\sffamily) <a id="id2538678"
+class="indexterm"></a> <a id="id2538685"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Sans serif.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\textsc (\scshape) <a id="id2538704"
+class="indexterm"></a> <a id="id2538710"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Small caps.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\texttt (\ttfamily) <a id="id2538729"
+class="indexterm"></a> <a id="id2538735"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Typewriter.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\textnormal (\normalfont) <a id="id2538754"
+class="indexterm"></a> <a id="id2538761"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Main document font.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\mathrm <a id="id2538779"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Roman, for use in math mode.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\mathbf <a id="id2538797"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Boldface, for use in math mode. For bold
+symbols or complete equations take a look at
+<a href="#boldsymbol-linkend"><tt class="literal">\boldsymbol</tt></a>
+and <a href="#cmd-bm"><tt class="literal">\bm</tt></a>.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\mathsf <a id="id2538839"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Sans serif, for use in math mode.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\mathtt <a id="id2538858"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Typewriter, for use in math mode.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\mathit <a id="id2538876"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Italics, for use in math mode, e.g. variable
+names with several letters.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\mathnormal <a id="id2538895"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type
+style declaration.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\mathcal <a id="id2538914"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">`Calligraphic' letters, for use in math
+mode.</td></tr></tbody></table></div>
+<p>In addition, the command
+<tt class="literal">\mathversion{bold}</tt> <a id="id2538939"
+class="indexterm"></a> can be used for switching to bold letters
+and symbols in formulas.
+<tt class="literal">\mathversion{normal}</tt> restores the
+default.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="sizes-title"></a>Sizes</h5>
+<a id="id2538965" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2538972"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2538979" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The following standard type size commands are supported by
+LaTeX.</p>
+<p>The commands as listed here are "declaration forms". The scope
+of the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or
+the end of the current group.</p>
+<p>You can also use the environment form of these commands; e.g.
+<tt class="literal">\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}</tt>.</p>
+<div class="table"><a id="id2539011"></a>
+<p class="title"><b>Table&nbsp;1.10.&nbsp;Standard type size
+commands</b></p>
+<table summary="Standard type size commands" border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\tiny<a id="id2539045" class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify"></td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\scriptsize <a id="id2539066"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify"></td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\footnotesize <a id="id2539084"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify"></td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\small <a id="id2539103"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify"></td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\normalsize <a id="id2539122"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">(default)</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\large <a id="id2539141"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify"></td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\Large <a id="id2539160"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify"></td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\LARGE <a id="id2539179"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify"></td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\huge <a id="id2539198"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify"></td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\Huge <a id="id2539216"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">&nbsp;</td></tr></tbody></table></div>
+<h5 class="title">
+<a id="low-dash-level-font-commands-title"></a>Low-level font
+commands</h5>
+<a id="id2539242" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2539250"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and
+packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the
+available ones. For full details, you should consult Chapter 7 of
+<i class="citetitle">The LaTeX Companion</i>.</p>
+<div class="table"><a id="id2539271"></a>
+<p class="title"><b>Table&nbsp;1.11.&nbsp;Low-level font
+commands</b></p>
+<table summary="Low-level font commands" border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\fontencoding{enc} <a id="id2539304"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Select font encoding. Valid encodings include
+<tt class="literal">OT1</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">T1</tt>.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\fontfamily{family} <a id="id2539334"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Select font family. Valid families include:
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">cmr</tt> for Computer Modern Roman</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">cmss</tt> for Computer Modern Sans
+Serif</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">cmtt</tt> for Computer Modern
+Typewriter</li></ul></div>
+and numerous others.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\fontseries{series} <a id="id2539391"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Select font series. Valid series include:
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">m</tt> Medium (normal)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">b</tt> Bold</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">c</tt> Condensed</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">bc</tt> Bold condensed</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">bx</tt> Bold extended</li></ul></div>
+and various other combinations.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\fontshape{shape} <a id="id2539468"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li><tt class="literal">n</tt> Upright (normal)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">it</tt> Italic</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">sl</tt> Slanted (oblique)</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">sc</tt> Small caps</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">ui</tt> Upright italics</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">ol</tt> Outline</li></ul></div>
+The two last shapes are not available for most font
+families.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\fontsize{size}{skip} <a id="id2539555"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Set font size. The first parameter is the font
+size to switch to; the second is the
+<tt class="literal">\baselineskip</tt> to use. The unit of both
+parameters defaults to pt. A rule of thumb is that the baselineskip
+should be 1.2 times the font size.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\selectfont <a id="id2539583"
+class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">The changes made by calling the four font
+commands described above do not come into effect until
+<tt class="literal">\selectfont</tt> is called.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape}
+<a id="id2539610" class="indexterm"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Equivalent to calling
+<tt class="literal">\fontencoding</tt>,
+<tt class="literal">\fontfamily</tt>,
+<tt class="literal">\fontseries</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">\fontshape</tt> with the given parameters,
+followed by
+<tt class="literal">\selectfont</tt>.</td></tr></tbody></table></div></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="parameters"></a>2.4
+Parameters</h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2539672" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted;
+TeX uses <tt class="filename">.tex</tt> as a default file
+extension. If you omit the input file entirely, TeX accepts input
+from the terminal. You specify command options by supplying a
+string as a parameter to the command; e.g.</p>
+<p><tt class="literal">latex \scrollmode\input foo.tex</tt></p>
+<p>will process <tt class="filename">foo.tex</tt> without pausing
+after every error.</p>
+<p>Output files are always created in the current directory. When
+you fail to specify an input file name, TeX bases the output names
+on the file specification associated with the logical name
+TEX_OUTPUT, typically
+<tt class="literal">texput.log</tt>.</p></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="latex-packages"></a>3
+LaTeX Packages</h2></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2539754" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="amsmath"></a>3.1
+<tt class="filename">amsmath</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2539778" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2539785"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">amsmath</tt> consists of several packages to
+aid in typesetting math.</p>
+<div class="variablelist"><a id="boldsymbol-linkend"></a>
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\boldsymbol</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2539828" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Produces a bold math symbol. When not only a single symbol, but
+a complete equation has to be bold you might consider using the
+superior <a href="#cmd-bm"><tt class="literal">\bm</tt></a> command
+which takes better care of spacing.</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<a id="pmb-linkend"></a><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pmb</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2539871" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Can be used for mathematic symbols, when no bold version is
+available. It prints the standard symbol several times slightly
+shifted and is inferior to a real bold
+font!</p></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="dcolumn"></a>3.2
+<tt class="filename">dcolumn</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2539910" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2539917"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\usepackage{dcolumn}</tt></p>
+<p>Defines a system for defining columns of entries in an
+<tt class="literal">array</tt> or <tt class="literal">tabular</tt>
+which are to be aligned on a <span class="emphasis"><em>decimal
+point</em></span>.</p>
+<p>This package defines <tt class="literal">D</tt> to be a column
+specifier with three arguments:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+D{sep.tex}{sep.dvi}{decimal places}
+</pre>
+<p><tt class="literal">sep.tex</tt> should be a single character,
+this is used as the separator in the <tt class="literal">.tex</tt>
+file. It will usually be '<tt class="literal">.</tt>' or
+'<tt class="literal">,</tt>'.</p>
+<p><tt class="literal">sep.dvi</tt> is used as the separator in the
+output.</p>
+<p><tt class="literal">decimal places</tt> should be the maximum
+number of decimal places in the column.</p>
+<p><tt class="literal">\newcolumntype</tt> can be used to define
+own column types.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="float"></a>3.3
+<tt class="filename">float</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2540048" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
+<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
+<p>The contents of this section was taken from the documentation of
+<tt class="filename">float</tt> v1.3d of 2001/11/08.</p></div>
+<p>&ldquo;<span class="quote">This style option improves the
+interface for defining objects such as figures and tabels in LaTeX.
+It adds the notion of a <span class="emphasis"><em>float
+style</em></span> that governs the appearance of
+floats.</span>&rdquo;</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\newfloat{&lt;placement&gt;}{&lt;ext&gt;}[&lt;within&gt;]</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2540101" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2540108"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Add a new class of floats.</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\floatstyle{&lt;style&gt;}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2540138" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2540145"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Sets a default float style.</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\floatname{&lt;style&gt;}{&lt;name&gt;}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2540175" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2540182"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Define the <span class="emphasis"><em>float name</em></span>
+used in the caption of a float.</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\floatplacement{&lt;&gt;}{&lt;placement&gt;}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2540216" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2540223"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Resets the default placement specifier of a class of
+floats.</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\restylefloat&lt;style&gt;</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2540253" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2540260"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Change styles for the standard float types
+<tt class="literal">figure</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">table</tt>.</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\listof{&lt;type&gt;}{&lt;title&gt;}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2540303" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2540309"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Produces a list of all floats of a given
+class.</p></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="fontenc"></a>3.4
+<tt class="filename">fontenc</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2540350" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}</tt></p>
+<p>chooses T1-fonts and allows correct automatic
+hyphenation.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="german"></a>3.5
+<tt class="filename">german</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2540390" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2540397"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Das <tt class="literal">german</tt> Paket mu&szlig; geladen
+sein:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">"a</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2540437" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>erzeugt ein <span class="emphasis"><em>&auml;</em></span></p>
+<p>entsprechend <tt class="literal">"o</tt>,
+<tt class="literal">"u</tt>, <tt class="literal">"A</tt>,
+<tt class="literal">"O</tt>, <tt class="literal">"U</tt>,
+<tt class="literal">"s (&szlig;)</tt></p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">"ck</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2540504" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>wird bei Trennung zu <tt class="literal">k-k</tt></p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">"ff</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2540538" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>wird bei Trennung zu <tt class="literal">ff-f</tt></p>
+<p>entsprechend <tt class="literal">"ll</tt>,
+<tt class="literal">"mm</tt>, <tt class="literal">"pp</tt>,
+<tt class="literal">"rr</tt>, <tt class="literal">"tt</tt></p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\glqq</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2540604" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>oder <tt class="literal">"`</tt> erzeugt untere doppelte
+Anf&uuml;hrungszeichen</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<a id="cmd-grqq"></a><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\grqq</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2540644" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>oder <tt class="literal">"'</tt> erzeugt obere doppelte
+Anf&uuml;hrungszeichen</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\glq</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2540681" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>erzeugt untere einfache Anf&uuml;hrungszeichen</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\flqq</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2540711" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>oder <tt class="literal">"&lt;</tt> doppelte linke
+franz&ouml;sische Anf&uuml;hrungszeichen</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\frqq</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2540748" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>oder <tt class="literal">"&gt;</tt> doppelte rechte
+franz&ouml;sische Anf&uuml;hrungszeichen</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\flq</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2540785" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>einfache linke franz&ouml;sische Anf&uuml;hrungszeichen</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\frq</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2540815" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>einfache rechte franz&ouml;sische
+Anf&uuml;hrungszeichen</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">"|</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2540846" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>verhindert eine Ligatur an der Stelle</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\-</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2540875" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>markiert m&ouml;gliche Trennstelle, im restlichen Wort ist keine
+Trennung mehr m&ouml;glich</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">"-</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2540906" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Trennvorschlag, der Rest des Wortes kann noch automatisch
+getrennt werden</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">""</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2540936" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Trennvorschlag, bei dem bei einer Trennung kein Bindestrich
+eingef&uuml;gt wird</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">"~</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2540967" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Bindestrich, an dem nicht getrennt werden darf</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">"=</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2540996" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Bindestrich, an dem getrennt werden darf</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\dq</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2541025" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>erzeugt ein nicht-typographisches gerades
+Anf&uuml;hrungszeichen</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\texttt{\dq}
+</pre></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">&lt;</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2541062" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>oder <tt class="literal">\dq</tt> ergibt das
+Zoll-Zeichen</p></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="graphics"></a>3.6
+<tt class="filename">graphics</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2541109" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2541116"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Look up details in <tt class="filename">grfguide</tt>.</p>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="includegraphics"></a>3.6.1
+\includegraphics</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2541152" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\includegraphics[]{picture-name}</tt></p>
+<p>File extensions of the graphics should be omitted, so it's
+easier to change the format (for example for pdf or ps
+output).</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="graphicspath"></a>3.6.2
+\graphicspath</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2541188" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\graphicspath{dir-list}</tt></p>
+<p><tt class="literal">dir-list</tt> is a list of absolute or
+relative paths, where the command <a href="#includegraphics"
+title="3.6.1 \includegraphics"><tt class="literal">\includegraphics{}</tt></a>
+searches for the graphic files:</p>
+<p><tt class="literal">\graphicspath{{eps/}{tiff/}}</tt> would
+cause the system to look in the subdirectories
+<tt class="literal">eps</tt> and <tt class="literal">tiff</tt> of
+the current directory. This is unix syntax, on a Mac it would
+be:</p>
+<p><tt class="literal">\graphicspath{{:eps:}{:tiff:}}</tt></p>
+<p>Under Windows/DOS use also the slash <tt class="literal">/</tt>
+to separate directories. Not all tex installations can handle
+filenames with spaces. So it's better to avoid
+them.</p></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="hyperref"></a>3.7
+<tt class="filename">hyperref</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2541288" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2541297"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>For more infos read in the book <span class="emphasis"><em>LaTeX
+Web Companion</em></span> or <span class="emphasis"><em>Mit LaTeX
+ins Web</em></span>.</p>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="hyperref-options"></a>3.7.1
+Options</h4></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term">4</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2541354" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>use Acrobat 4 features (default:
+<tt class="literal">false</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">a4paper, a5paper, b5paper, legalpaper,
+letterpaper, executivepaper</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2541391" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2541407"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2541423"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2541439"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2541454"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2541470" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>use the specified paper size.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">anchorcolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2541500" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>set color of anchors (default:
+<tt class="literal">black</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">backref</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2541536" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>do bibliographical back references (default:
+<tt class="literal">false</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">baseurl</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2541572" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>set base URL for document (default:
+<tt class="literal">empty</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">bookmarks</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2541608" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>make bookmarks (default:
+<tt class="literal">true</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">bookmarksnumbered</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2541644" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>put section numbers in bookmarks (default:
+<tt class="literal">false</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">bookmarksopen</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2541680" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>open up bookmark tree (default:
+<tt class="literal">false</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">bookmarksopenlevel</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2541716" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>level to which bookmarks are open (default:
+<tt class="literal">\maxdimen</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">bookmarkstype</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2541752" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>to specify which `toc' file to mimic toc.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">breaklinks</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2541782" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>allow links to break over lines (default:
+<tt class="literal">false</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">citebordercolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2541819" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>color of border around cites (default: <tt class="literal">0 1
+0</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">citecolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2541855" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>color of citation links (default:
+<tt class="literal">green</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">colorlinks</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2541891" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>color links (default: <tt class="literal">false</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">debug</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2541926" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>provide details of anchors defined (same as verbose, default:
+<tt class="literal">false</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">draft</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2541962" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>do not do any hyper linking (default:
+<tt class="literal">false</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">dvipdf, dvipdfm, dvips, dvipsone, dviwindo,
+hypertex,</span> <span class="term">latex2html, pdftex, tex4ht,
+textures, ps2pdf, vtex,</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2542003" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2542019"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2542035"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2542051"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2542066"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2542082"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2542098"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2542114"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2542130"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2542146"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2542162" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>use the specified backend.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">extension</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2542191" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>suffix of linked files (default:
+<tt class="literal">dvi</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">filebordercolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2542227" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>color of border around file links (default:
+<tt class="literal">0 .5 .5</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">filecolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2542263" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>color of file links (default:
+<tt class="literal">cyan</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">frenchlinks</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2542299" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>use small caps instead of color for links (default:
+<tt class="literal">false</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">hyperfigures</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2542335" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>make figures hyper links (default:
+<tt class="literal">false</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">hyperindex</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2542371" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>set up hyperlinked indices (default:
+<tt class="literal">true</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">hypertexnames</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2542407" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>use guessable names for links (default:
+<tt class="literal">true</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">implicit</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2542443" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>redefine LaTeX internals (default:
+<tt class="literal">true</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">linkbordercolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2542482" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>color of border around links (default: <tt class="literal">1 0
+0</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">linkcolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2542518" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>color of links (default: <tt class="literal">red</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">linktocpage</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2542554" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>make page number, not text, be link on TOC, LOF and LOT
+(default: <tt class="literal">false</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">menubordercolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2542590" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>color of border around menu links (default:
+<tt class="literal">1 0 0</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">menucolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2542627" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>color for menu links (default:
+<tt class="literal">red</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">naturalnames</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2542662" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>use LaTeX-computed names for links (default:
+<tt class="literal">false</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">nesting</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2542702" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>allow nesting of links (default:
+<tt class="literal">false</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pageanchor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2542738" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>put an anchor on every page (default:
+<tt class="literal">true</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pagebackref</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2542773" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>backreference by page number (default:
+<tt class="literal">false</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pagebordercolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2542809" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>color of border around page links (default:
+<tt class="literal">1 1 0</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pagecolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2542846" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>color of page links (default:
+<tt class="literal">red</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfauthor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2542881" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>text for PDF Author field (default: empty).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfborder</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2542911" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>width of PDF link border (default: <tt class="literal">0 0
+1</tt>; <tt class="literal">0 0 0</tt> for
+<tt class="literal">colorlinks</tt>)</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfcenterwindow</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2542959" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>position the document window center of the screen (default:
+<tt class="literal">false</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfcreator</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2542995" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>text for PDF Creator field (default: LaTeX with hyperref
+package).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdffitwindow</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543029" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>resize document window to fit document size (default:
+<tt class="literal">false</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfhighlight</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543066" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>set highlighting of PDF links (default:
+<tt class="literal">/I</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfkeywords</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543101" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>text for PDF Keywords field (default: empty).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfmenubar</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543131" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>make PDF viewer's menu bar visible (default:
+<tt class="literal">true</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfnewwindow</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543167" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>make links that open another PDF file start a new window
+(default: <tt class="literal">false</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfpagelayout</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543204" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>set layout of PDF pages (default: empty).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfpagemode</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543234" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>set default mode of PDF display (default: empty).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfpagescrop</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543264" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>set crop size of PDF document (default: empty).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfpagetransition</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543294" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>set PDF page transition style (default: empty).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfproducer</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543325" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>text for PDF Producer field (default: empty).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfstartpage</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543355" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>page at which PDF document opens (default:
+<tt class="literal">1</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfstartview</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543391" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>starting view of PDF document (default:
+<tt class="literal">/Fit</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfsubject</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543427" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>text for PDF Subject field (default: empty).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdftitle</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543457" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>text for PDF Title field(default: empty).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdftoolbar</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543487" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>make PDF toolbar visible (default:
+<tt class="literal">true</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfview</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543522" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>PDF `view' when on link traversal (default: empty).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfwindowui</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543552" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>make PDF user interface elements visible (default:
+<tt class="literal">true</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">plainpages</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543588" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>do page number anchors as plain arabic (default:
+<tt class="literal">true</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">raiselinks</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543624" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>raise up links (for HyperTeX backend; default:
+<tt class="literal">false</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">runbordercolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543661" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>color of border around run links (default: <tt class="literal">0
+.7 .7</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">unicode</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543697" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Unicode encoded pdf strings (default:
+<tt class="literal">true</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">urlbordercolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543733" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>color of border around URL links (default: <tt class="literal">0
+1 1</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">urlcolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543769" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>color of URL links (default:
+<tt class="literal">magenta</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">verbose</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543804" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>be chatty (default:
+<tt class="literal">false</tt>).</p></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="hyperref-commands"></a>3.7.2
+Commands</h4></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\texorpdfstring{TeX-string}{pdf-string}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543868" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>allows different texts for PDF or TeX creation.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\section{The role of \texorpdfstring{H$_2$O}{water}}
+</pre></dd>
+<dt>
+<a id="href"></a><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\href{URL}{Text}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543915" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>the text will be resolved into a URL. The URL must be complete,
+according to a base-url which might be defined in a
+<a href="#cmd-hyperbaseurl"><tt class="literal">\hyperbaseurl</tt></a>.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\href{http://www.karpfenteich.net/pit/}{Peter's input tips}
+</pre></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><a id="cmd-hyperbaseurl"></a><tt class="literal">
+\hyperbaseurl{URL}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2543972" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>defines a base URL, which is preset to a given URL. This helps
+to make portable documents.</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\hyperimage{image-URL}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2544006" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>includes the picture of the URL reference.</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\hyperref{URL}{category}{name}{text}</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\hyperref[mark]{text}</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2544047" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">text</tt> is activated as a hyperlink to the
+point which is defined with a
+<a href="#cmd-label-title"><tt class="filename">\label</tt></a>
+command with the symbolic name
+<tt class="literal">mark</tt>.</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\hyperlink{name}{text}</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\hyertarget{name}{text}</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2544113" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2544129"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\hyperlink</tt> creates an internal link to
+an object which is somewhere defined with a
+<tt class="literal">\hypertarget</tt> command.</p>
+<p>For HTML the command <tt class="literal">\hyperlink</tt> inserts
+a <tt class="literal">#</tt> character in front of each link. Thus
+it'll refer to the topical document, while
+<tt class="literal">\href</tt> will expect a complete URL.</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\autoref{marker}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2544197" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\autoref</tt> is a substitution for the
+standard <tt class="literal">\ref</tt> command. It inserts a
+context sensitive phrase.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+see \autoref{foo}
+</pre>
+<p>for a <tt class="literal">\label</tt> in a section will output
+<span class="emphasis"><em>see section 3</em></span> for an
+example.</p>
+<p>There are macros to change the default output with the help of
+the <tt class="literal">\renewcommand</tt>:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\figurename *\figurename*
+\tablename *\tablename*
+\partname *\partname*
+\appendixname *\appendixname*
+\equationname *\equationname*
+\Itemname *\Itemname*
+\chaptername *\chaptername*
+\sectionname *\sectionname*
+\subsectionname *\subsesctionname*
+\subsubsectionname *\subsubsectionname*
+\paragraphname *\paragraphname*
+\Hfootnotename *\Hfootnotename*
+\AMSname *\AMSname*
+\theoremname *\theoremname*
+</pre></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><a id="cmd-nolinkurl"></a><tt class="literal">\nolinkurl</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2544292" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Allows line breaks in a verbatim like environment like
+<tt class="literal">\url</tt>, but without the hyperlink function.
+This is useful to define own commands like this example:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\newcommand*{\urlw}[1]{\href{http://www.#1}%
+ {\nolinkurl{www.#1}}}
+</pre>
+<p>This new defined command <tt class="literal">\urlw</tt> allows
+the user to typeset a linkable (this function is offered by
+<tt class="literal">\href</tt>)
+<tt class="literal">www.example.org</tt> address in the latex
+source like this:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\urlw{example.org}
+</pre>
+<p>This will produce the string
+<tt class="literal">www.example.org</tt> which is hyperlinked and
+breakable (when the driver like pdfTeX allows line breaks in
+links).</p></dd></dl></div></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="inputenc"></a>3.8
+<tt class="filename">inputenc</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2544394" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\usepackage[encoding
+name]{inputenc}</tt></p>
+<p>Allows to specify an input encoding for direct input of
+character codes &gt; 127, e.g. accented characters.</p>
+<p>Important encodings are:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">latin9,
+latin1</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Linux, Unix, VMS</p>
+<a id="id2544441" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2544448"
+class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">ansinew</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Windows (codepage 1252)</p>
+<a id="id2544471" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">cp850</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>OS/2, MSDOS (codpage 850)</p>
+<a id="id2544495" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">applemac</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Apple Macintosh</p>
+<a id="id2544519" class="indexterm"></a></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="komascript"></a>3.9
+<tt class="filename">KOMA-Script</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2544549" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2544557"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">KOMA-Script</tt> package has a very
+detailed and well written documentation. Read the
+<tt class="literal">scrguide</tt> for further information! :-)</p>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="komascript-page-layout"></a>3.9.1
+Page-Layout</h4></div></div></div>
+<p><tt class="literal">\typearea[BCOR]{DIV}</tt></p>
+<a id="id2544614" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\areaset[BCOR]{Breite}{H&ouml;he}</tt></p>
+<a id="id2544631" class="indexterm"></a></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="komascript-options"></a>3.9.2
+Options</h4></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term">headinclude, headexclude,</span>
+<span class="term">footinclude, footexclude,</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2544671" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2544680"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2544688"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2544697" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>will determine if headers and footers are used in the
+calculation of the page size. Default is exclude. Include will make
+the text area smaller.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">DIV</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2544722" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>is a factor which determins how large the used page size is.
+This method takes care of good typography.</p>
+<p>Try values between 10 and 15. Higher values will cause smaller
+margins. An example would be:
+<tt class="literal">DIV12</tt>.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">BCOR</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2544758" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Binding correction. Takes care of the loss of the visible paper
+size when the paper is cut and a book is
+bound.</p></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="komascript-scrlttr2"></a>3.9.3 Letter
+Class <tt class="literal">scrlttr2</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2544796" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>This reference is based on the excellent
+<tt class="literal">scrguien.pdf</tt> from 2002-09-06.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2544819"></a>Options</h5>
+<a id="id2544825" class="indexterm"></a>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2544840"></a>Defining Options Later</h5>
+<a id="id2544846" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\KOMAoptions{options
+list}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Use this to change options after loading the class. List single
+or multiple options, separated by commas.</dd></dl></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2544888"></a>Page Layout Options</h5>
+<a id="id2544894" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">paper=format</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Defines the paper format.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">BCOR=length</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">DIV=value</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">headlines=count</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Divisor, binding correction, and number of headlines.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">enlargefirstpage</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>If <span class="emphasis"><em>true</em></span> some more text
+would fit on the first page</dd></dl></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2544988"></a>Other Layout Options</h5>
+<a id="id2544994" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2545010"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">twoside</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Activate possibilities of a double-sided document, but stay
+with with the one-sided layout as far as possible.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">cleardoublepage=style</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Inserted pages by <tt class="literal">\cleardoublepage</tt> get
+one of these page styles:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc">
+<li><tt class="literal">empty</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">plain</tt></li>
+<li><tt class="literal">standard</tt></li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">headsepline</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">footsepline</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Insert a separator line below the head or above the foot.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">mpinclude</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">mpexclude</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>These two options of the <tt class="literal">typearea</tt>
+package should not be used with
+<tt class="literal">scrlttr2</tt>.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">pagenumber=position</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>This option defines if and where a page number will be placed.
+Possible values are:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">bot</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">foot</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Page number in foot, horizontal position not changed</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">botcenter</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">botcentered</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">botmiddle</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">footcenter</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">footcentered</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">footmiddle</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Page number infoot,centered</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">botleft</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">footleft</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Page number in foot, left justified</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">botrigth</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">footright</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Page number in foot, right justified</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">center</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">centered</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">middle</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Page number centered horizontally, vertical position not
+changed</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">false</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">no</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">off</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>No page number</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">head</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">top</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Page number in head, horizontal position not changed</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">headcenter</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">headcentered</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">headmiddle</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">topcenter</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">topcentered</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">topmiddle</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Page number in head, centered</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">headleft</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">topleft</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Page number in head, left justified</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">headright</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">topright</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Page number in head, right justified</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">left</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Page number left, vertical position not changed</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">right</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Page number right, vertical position not
+changed</dd></dl></div>
+<p>Default is <tt class="literal">botcenter</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">parskip=value</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Mark paragraphs alternatively by vertical skip. Possible values
+are:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">false</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">off</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Paragraph indentation instead of verticalk space</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">full</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">on</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">true</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>One line vertical space between paragraphs; at least 1 em free
+space in the last line.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">full*</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>One line vertical space betwen paragraphs; at least a quarter
+of a line free space at the end of a paragraph.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">full+</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>One line vertical space betwen paragraphs; at least a third of
+aline free space at the end of a paragraph.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">full-</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>One line vertical space betwen paragraphs; last line of a
+paragraph may be arbitrarily filled.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">half</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Half a line vertical space between paragraphs; at least 1 em
+free space in the last line.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">half*</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Half a line vertical space between paragraphs; at least a
+quarter of a line free space at the end of a paragraph.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">half+</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Half a line vertical space between paragraphs; at least a third
+of a line free space at the end of a paragraph.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">half-</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>One line vertical space between paragraphs; last line may be
+arbitrarily filled.</dd></dl></div>
+<p>Default is <tt class="literal">false</tt>.</p></dd></dl></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2545774"></a>Font Options</h5>
+<a id="id2545779" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">fontsize=size</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Font size of the document. Defaults to
+<tt class="literal">12pt</tt>.</dd></dl></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2545825"></a>Options for Letterhead and
+Address</h5>
+<a id="id2545831" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">fromalign</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Defines the placement of the from address in the letterhead.
+Possible values are:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">center</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">centered</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">middle</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Return address centered.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">false</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">no</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">off</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Standard design for return address.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">left</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Left justified return address.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">rigth</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Right justified return address.</dd></dl></div>
+<p>Default is <tt class="literal">left</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">fromrule</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Allows to place a horizontal rule within return address.
+Possible values are:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">afteraddress</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">below</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">true</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">yes</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Line below return address</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">aftername</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Line right below sender's name</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">false</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">no</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">off</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>No line.</dd></dl></div>
+<p>Default is <tt class="literal">false</tt>.</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">fromphone</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Defines whether the phone number will be part of the return
+address.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">fromfax</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Defines whether the facsimile number will be part of the return
+address.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">fromemail</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Defines whether the email address will be part of the return
+address.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">fromurl</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Defines whether the URL will be part of the return
+address.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">fromlogo</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Defines whether the logo will be part of the return
+address.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">addrfield</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Defines whether a return address field will be set.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">backaddress</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Defines whether a return address for window envelopes will be
+set.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">subject</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Choose of your subject should have a title and if the subject
+should be set before or after the opening. Possible values are:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">afteropening</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Set subject after opening.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">beforeopening</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Set subject before opening.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">titled</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Add title to subject.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">untitled</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Do not add title to subject.</dd></dl></div>
+<p>Defaults are <tt class="literal">beforeopening</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">untitled</tt>.</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">locfield</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Toggle between presets for the field width of additionbal sender
+attributes.</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">narrow</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Small sender supplement field.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">wide</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Wide sender supplement field.</dd></dl></div>
+<p>Default is <tt class="literal">narrow</tt>.</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">foldmarks</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Activates fold marks.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">numericaldate</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Toggles between standard, language-dependent date presentation
+and a short, numerical one.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">refline</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Defines that the reference line may extend beyond the normal
+type area.</dd></dl></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2546465"></a>Format Options</h5>
+<a id="id2546471" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">draft</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Toggles between the final and the draft
+version.</dd></dl></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2546513"></a>Letter Class Option
+Files</h5>
+<a id="id2546519" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\LoadLetterOption{name}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Load a <tt class="literal">lco</tt> file.
+<tt class="literal">name</tt> is the filename without suffix.</p>
+<p>Predefined <tt class="literal">lco</tt> files:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">DIN</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>For A4 size paper, complying with DIN 676.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">DINmtext</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>For A4 size paper, complying with DIN 676, but using an
+alternate layout with more text on the first page.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">KOMAold</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Fo AQ4 paper size using a layout close to the obsolete
+<tt class="literal">scrlettr</tt> class.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">SN</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>For Swiss letters with address field on the right side,
+according to SN 010 130</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">SNleft</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>For Swiss letters with address field on the left
+side.</dd></dl></div></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\LetterOptionNeedsPaperSize{option
+name}{paper size}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Useful to be abel to emit warnings if the user selects a
+different paper size from the one the <tt class="literal">lco</tt>
+file is based on.</dd></dl></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2546713"></a>General Document
+Properties</h5>
+<a id="id2546718" class="indexterm"></a>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2546734"></a>Font Selection</h5>
+<a id="id2546740" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>See also the section for <span class="emphasis"><em>Changing
+Fonts</em></span> in KOMA-Script (still to be written).</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">backaddress</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Back address for a window envelope</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">descriptionlabel</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Label in a <tt class="literal">description</tt>
+environment</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">fromaddress</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Sender's address in letterhead</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">fromname</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Sender's address in letterhead if different from
+<tt class="literal">fromaddress</tt></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">pagefoot</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Footer, sometimes header of a page</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">pagehead</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Header, sometimes footer of a page</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">pagenumber</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Page number in footer or header</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">subject</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Subject in the opening</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">title</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Headline in the opening</dd></dl></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2546939"></a>Page Style</h5>
+<a id="id2546945" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>See also the section for <span class="emphasis"><em>Page
+Style</em></span> in KOMA-Script (still to be written).</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">empty</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Entirely empty headers and footers</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">plain</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Empty head and and only page number in header or footer</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">headings</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Automatic page headings</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">myheadings</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Manual page headings</dd></dl></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2547046"></a>Variables</h5>
+<a id="id2547052" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The main difference between a
+<span class="emphasis"><em>command</em></span> and a
+<span class="emphasis"><em>variable</em></span> is that a command
+usually triggers an action whereas a variable only consists of
+plain text. Furthermore a variable can have an additional
+description.</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\newkomavar[description]{name}</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\newkomavar*[description]{name}</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\addtoreffields{name}</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2547114" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2547130"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\newkomavar</tt> defines a new variable,
+addressed with <tt class="literal">name</tt>.</p>
+<p>The command <tt class="literal">\addtoreffields</tt> adds the
+variable <tt class="literal">name</tt> to the reference fields. See
+section <a href="#scrlttr-business-line">Business Line</a>.</p>
+<p>The command <tt class="literal">\newkomavar*</tt> works like
+<tt class="literal">\newkomavar</tt> with an additional call of the
+command
+<tt class="literal">\addtoreffields</tt>.</p></dd></dl></div>
+<p>Overview of all variables:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">backaddress</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2547233" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Back address for window envelopes</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">backaddressseparator</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2547265" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Separator within the back address</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">ccseparator</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2547299" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Separator between title of additional recipients and additional
+recipients</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">customer</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2547332" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Customer number</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">date</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2547365" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Date</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">emailseparator</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2547398" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Separator between e-mail name and e-mail address</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">enclseparator</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2547431" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Separator between title of enclosure and and enclosures</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">faxseparator</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2547465" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Separator between title of fax and fax number</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">fromaddress</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2547499" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Sender's address without its name</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">frombank</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2547532" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Sender's bank account</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">fromemail</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2547564" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Sender's e-mail</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">fromfax</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2547597" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Sender's fax number</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">fromlogo</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2547630" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Commands for inserting the sender's logo</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">fromname</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2547663" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Complete name of the sender</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">fromphone</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2547696" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Sender's telephone number</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">fromurl</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2547728" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>URL of the sender</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">invoice</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2547761" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Invoice number</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">location</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2547794" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>More details of the sender</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">myref</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2547827" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Sender's reference</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">place</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2547859" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Place</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">placeseparator</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2547892" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Separator between place and date</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">phoneseparator</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2547925" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Separator between title of telephone and telephone
+number</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">signature</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2547959" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Signature beneath the ending of the letter</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">specialmail</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2547992" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Special mail</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">subject</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2548025" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Subject</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">subjectseparator</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2548058" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Separator between title of subject and subject</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">title</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2548091" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Letter title</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">toname</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2548124" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Complete name of recipient</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">toaddress</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2548156" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Address of recipient without its name</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">yourmail</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2548190" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Date of recipient's mail</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">yourref</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2548222" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Recipient's reference</p></dd></dl></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\setkomavar{name}[description]{content}</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\setkomavar*{name}{description}</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2548272" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\setkomavar</tt> sets the content of the
+variable <tt class="literal">name</tt>. The optional argument sets
+the <tt class="literal">description</tt> of the variable.</p>
+<p><tt class="literal">\setkomavar*</tt> only sets the
+<tt class="literal">description</tt>.</p></dd></dl></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\usekomavar[command]{name}</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\usekomavar*[command]{name}</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2548353" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\usekomavar</tt> gives you access to the
+content of the variable <tt class="literal">name</tt>.</p>
+<p><tt class="literal">\usekomavar*</tt> gives you access to the
+<tt class="literal">description</tt> of the variable
+<tt class="literal">name</tt>.</p></dd></dl></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\ifkomavarempty{name}{true}{false}</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\ifkomavarempty*{name}{true}{false}</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2548434" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">true</tt> argument will be executed if
+the content or description is empty. Otherwise the
+<tt class="literal">false</tt> argument will be executed.</p>
+<p>The starred version handles the description of a variable, the
+variant without star the content.</p></dd></dl></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2548477"></a>Pseudo Lengths</h5>
+<a id="id2548483" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\@newplength{name}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Defines a new pseudo length</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\useplength{name}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Access value of pseudo length
+<tt class="literal">name</tt></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\setlengthtoplength[factor]{length}{pseudo
+length}</tt> ,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\addtolengthplength[factor]{length}{pseudo
+length}</tt> ,</span></dt>
+<dd>Assign a multiple of <tt class="literal">pseudo length</tt> to
+a real <tt class="literal">length</tt>. Adds a multiple of
+<tt class="literal">pseudo length</tt> to
+<tt class="literal">length</tt>.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\@setplength[factor]{pseudo
+length}{value}</tt> ,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\@addtoplength[factor]{pseudo
+length}{value}</tt> ,</span></dt>
+<dd>Assign a multiple of a <tt class="literal">value</tt> to a
+<tt class="literal">pseudo length</tt>. Adds
+<tt class="literal">value</tt> to <tt class="literal">pseudo
+length</tt>.</dd></dl></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2548654"></a>Letter Declaration</h5>
+<a id="id2548663" class="indexterm"></a>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2548679"></a>Letterhead</h5>
+<a id="id2548685" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">firstheadvpos</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Distance between the top of the sheet and the letterhead.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">firstheadwidth</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Width of the letterhead.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">fromname</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">fromaddress</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">fromphone</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">fromfax</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">fromemail</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">fromurl</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">fromlogo</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>This variables give all statements concerning the sender
+necessary to create the letterhead.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">phoneseparator</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">faxseparator</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">emailseparator</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">urlseparator</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Separators for variables in letterhead.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\firsthead{construction}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Create letterhead freely.</dd></dl></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2548859"></a>Footer</h5>
+<a id="id2548865" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">firstfootvpos</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Distance between footer and upper border of the sheet.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">firstfootwidth</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Width of letter's firstpage footer.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\firstfoot{Construction}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Set definition for first page's footer</dd></dl></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2548942"></a>Address</h5>
+<a id="id2548948" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">toaddrvpos</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">toaddrhpos</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Distance between address window of a window envelope and the
+upper and left border of the sheet.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">toaddrwidth</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Width of the address window.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">toaddrindent</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Value of indentation for the address from the left border.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">backaddress</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">backaddressseparator</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">backaddrheight</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Double backslashes within return address will be exchanged with
+<tt class="literal">backaddressseparator</tt>. Height of the return
+address field.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">specialmail</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">specialmailindent</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">specialmailrightindent</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Optionally set between return address and addressee.
+<tt class="literal">specialmailindent</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">specialmailrightindent</tt> determine left and
+right indentation.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">toname</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">toaddress</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Usually not set directly by the user.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\begin{letter}[options]{address}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Major point of the letter class.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\AtBeginLetter{command}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Hook for commands run at begin of a letter.</dd></dl></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2549175"></a>Sender's Extension</h5>
+<a id="id2549181" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">locwidth</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Declares width of sender's extensions.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">location</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Content of sender's extension.</dd></dl></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="scrlttr-business-line"></a>Business
+Line</h5>
+<a id="id2549251" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">refvpos</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Distance between upper border of sheet and business line.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">refwidth</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Available width for the business line.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">refaftervskip</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Vertical space to be inserted beneath business line.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">place</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">placeseparator</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>If all variables for business line are empty, the content of
+<tt class="literal">place</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">placeseparator</tt> will be set, followed by
+content of <tt class="literal">date</tt>.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">yourref</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">yourmail</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">myref</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">customer</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">invoice</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">date</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Typical fields for business lines.</dd></dl></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2549423"></a>Title and Subject Line</h5>
+<a id="id2549428" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2549444"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">title</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Additional tile. Set centered beneath the business line.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">subject</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">subjectseparator</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Set the subject of the letter, optional prefixed by a
+label.</dd></dl></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2549511"></a>Further Issues</h5>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">tfoldmarkvpos</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">bfoldmarkvpos</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Position of upper and lower fold mark.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">foldmarkhpos</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Distance between fold marks and the sheet's left border.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">frombank</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Internally not used yet.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\nexthead{construction}</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\nextfoot{construction}</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Create letter head or foot for the following pages
+freely.</dd></dl></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2549610"></a>The Text</h5>
+<a id="id2549615" class="indexterm"></a>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2549631"></a>Opening</h5>
+<a id="id2549637" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\opening{opening}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Set the opening of the letter.</dd></dl></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2549676"></a>Footnotes</h5>
+<a id="id2549682" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>See section <span class="emphasis"><em>Footnotes</em></span> in
+KOMA-Script (still to be written).</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2549706"></a>Lists</h5>
+<a id="id2549712" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>See section <span class="emphasis"><em>Lists</em></span> in
+KOMA-Script (still to be written).</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2549736"></a>Margin Notes</h5>
+<a id="id2549742" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>See section <span class="emphasis"><em>Margin Notes</em></span>
+in KOMA-Script (still to be written).</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2549766"></a>Text Emphasis</h5>
+<a id="id2549772" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>See section <span class="emphasis"><em>Logical Markup of
+Text</em></span> in KOMA-Script (still to be written).</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2549796"></a>Closing Part</h5>
+<a id="id2549802" class="indexterm"></a>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2549818"></a>Closing</h5>
+<a id="id2549823" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">signature</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Inlcudes an explanation for the inscription. Defaults to
+<tt class="literal">\usekomavar{fromname}</tt>.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\closing{closing
+phrase}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Typesets the colsing phrase follwoed by a vertical space and
+the contents fo variable <tt class="literal">signature</tt>.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">sigindent</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">sigbeforevskip</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\raggedsignature</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Indentation of the box for closing phrase, inscription and
+signature (defaults to 0mm). Vertical space between closing phrase
+and signature (defaults to two lines). Alignment inside the
+box.</dd></dl></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2549930"></a>Postscript, Carbon Copy,
+and Enclosures</h5>
+<a id="id2549937" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2549952"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2549968" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\ps</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Set a postscript.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\cc{distribution
+list}</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">ccseparator</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Set a ddistribution list. If the contents of
+<tt class="literal">ccseparator</tt> isn't empty then the name and
+the content of the variable is inserted prior to distribution
+list.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\encl{enclosures}</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">enclseparator</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Same structur as the distribution list.</dd></dl></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2550066"></a>Language Support</h5>
+<a id="id2550072" class="indexterm"></a>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2550088"></a>Language Selection</h5>
+<a id="id2550094" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\captionenglish</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\captionUSenglish</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\captionamerican</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\captionbritish</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\captionUKenglish</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\captiongerman</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\captionngerman</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\captionaustrian</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\captionfrench</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\captionitalian</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\captionspanish</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\captiondutch</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\captioncroatian</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>If the used language selection scheme does not support
+switching the language the above commands can be used
+directly.</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\dateenglish</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\dateUSenglish</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\dateamerican</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\datebritish</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\dateUKenglish</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\dategerman</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\datengerman</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\dateaustrian</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\datefrench</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\dateitalian</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\datespanish</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\datedutch</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\datecrotian</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Numerical date representation.</dd></dl></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2550325"></a>Language-Dependent
+Terms</h5>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\yourrefname</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\youremailname</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\myrefname</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\customername</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\invoicename</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\subjectname</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\ccname</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\enclname</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\headtoname</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\headfromname</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\datename</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pagename</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\phonename</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\faxname</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\emailname</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\wwwname</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\bankname</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>These defintions can be modified to support a new language of
+for private customization.</dd></dl></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2550468"></a>Defining Language
+Terms</h5>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\providecaptioname{language}{term}{definition}</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\newcaptioname{language}{term}{defintion}</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\renewcaptionname{language}{term}{definition}</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Assign a <span class="emphasis"><em>definition</em></span> for
+a <span class="emphasis"><em>language</em></span> to a
+<span class="emphasis"><em>term</em></span>.</dd></dl></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2550526"></a>Address Files and Circular
+Letters</h5>
+<a id="id2550533" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2550549"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\adrentry{Lastname}{Firstname}{Address}{Telephone}{F1}{F2}{Comment}{Key}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>Address entry for address files. The file extension has to be
+<tt class="literal">.adr</tt>!</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\addrentry{Lastname}{Firstname}{Address}{Telephone}{F1}{F2}{F3}{F4}{Key}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>This command supports four freely definable parameters for an
+address entry.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\adrchar{initial
+letter}</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\addrchar{initial
+letter}</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Separator for address entries. Ignored by
+<tt class="literal">scrlttr2</tt>.</dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="komascript-scraddr"></a>3.9.4 Address
+Files with <tt class="literal">scraddr</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2550668" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\InputAddressFile{file
+name}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2550698" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Read the contents of the given address file. Filename extension
+has to be <tt class="literal">.adr</tt> and has to be omitted in
+the argument.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\Name{Key}</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\FirstName{Key}</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\LastName{Key}</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\Address{Key}</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\Telephone{Key}</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\FreeI{Key}</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\FreeII{Key}</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\Comment{Key}</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\FreeIII{Key}</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\FreeIV{Key}</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2550801" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2550817"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2550833"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2550849"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2550865"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2550881"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2550897"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2550912"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2550928"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2550944" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Access to the data in address file.
+<tt class="literal">\Name</tt> is a concatenation of
+<tt class="literal">\FirstName</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">\LastName</tt>.</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">AdrFreeIVempty</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">AdrFreeIVshow</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">AdrFreeIVwarn</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">AdrFreeIVstop</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>Package warning options. Defaults to
+<tt class="literal">AdrFreeIVshow</tt>.</dd></dl></div></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="mathpazo"></a>3.10
+<tt class="filename">mathpazo</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2551052" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2551059"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Math fonts for the use with the Palatino font.</p>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="upDelta-upOmega"></a>3.10.1 \upDelta /
+\upOmega</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2551091" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2551098"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Math fonts for the use with the Palatino font.</p>
+<p>Package options are:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">[slantedGreek]</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Uppercase Greek will be typeset slanted.</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">[noBBpl]</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Do not use PazoMathBlackboardBold as (partial) blackboard bold
+font (e.g with <tt class="literal">\mathbb{R}</tt>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">[osf]</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Make the font family <tt class="literal">pplj</tt> (Palatino
+with old style numerals) the default roman font, and use an
+alternative version of the virtual math italic fonts
+(<tt class="literal">zplmrj7m</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">zplmbj7m</tt>) with upright Palatino old style
+numerals for use with the <tt class="literal">\oldstylenums</tt>
+command.</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">[osfeqnnum]</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Use old style numerals for equation
+numbering.</p></dd></dl></div></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="varioref"></a>3.11
+<tt class="filename">varioref</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2551242" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2551249"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Smarter version of the original latex2e
+<a href="#cross-references" title="2.3.2 Cross References">cross
+reference commands</a>. Generated strings are customizable, Babel
+options are recognized (further info in the package
+documentation).</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><a id="cmd-vref"></a><tt class="literal">\vref</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><a id="cmd-vpageref"></a><tt class="literal">\vpageref</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2551309" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2551318"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">\vref</tt> is similar to
+<tt class="literal">\ref</tt> but adds an additional page
+reference, like <span class="emphasis"><em>on the facing
+page</em></span> or <span class="emphasis"><em>on page
+27</em></span> whenever the corresponding
+<a href="#cmd-label-title"><tt class="filename">\label</tt></a> is
+not on the same page.</p>
+<p><tt class="literal">\vpageref</tt> is a variation of
+<tt class="literal">\pageref</tt> with similar
+functionality.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\vrefrange</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\vpagerefrange</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2551398" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2551407"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">\v...range</tt> commands take two labels
+as arguments and produce strings which depend on wether or not
+these labels fall onto a single page or on different
+pages.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\vref*</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\vpageref*</tt>,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\vpagerefrange*</tt>,</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Star * variants do not add any space before the generated text
+for situations like:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(\vref{foo} ...)
+</pre></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="small-packages"></a>3.12 Several Small
+Packages</h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2551486" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2551493"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2551500" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Must be loaded with the usual
+<a href="#usepackage-linkend"><tt class="literal">\usepackage</tt></a>
+command. Further info for a package to be found in the
+documentation (dvi, pdf, ps) or in the
+<tt class="literal">sty</tt>-file itself.</p>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bm-package"></a>3.12.1
+<tt class="filename">bm</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2551555" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2551564"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2551576" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Bold math symbols or equations with better spacing then the
+<tt class="literal">\boldsymbold</tt> command. <a id="id2551598"
+class="indexterm"></a> If possible load after other packages which
+redefine the fonts. When no bold font is available for a certain
+char <tt class="literal">bm</tt> will use
+<span class="emphasis"><em>poor man's bold</em></span>
+<a href="#pmb-linkend"><tt class="literal">\pmb</tt></a>.</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><a id="cmd-bm"></a><tt class="literal">\bm</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2551652" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Produces bold math symbol or equation.</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\unboldmath</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2551678" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Can be used to set parts of an equation
+unbold.</p></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="url-package"></a>3.12.2
+<tt class="filename">url</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2551716" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2551724"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Defines line breakable hyperlinked (uses <a href="#hyperref"
+title="3.7 hyperref">hyperref</a> package) verbatim input for urls
+and e-mail addresses.</p>
+<p>Example: <tt class="literal">\url{http://example.org}</tt>
+outputs <tt class="literal">http://example.org</tt>.</p>
+<p>Related commands are
+<a href="#href"><tt class="literal">\href</tt></a> and
+<a href="#cmd-nolinkurl"><tt class="literal">\nolinkurl</tt></a>.</p></div></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
+<a id="generic-packages"></a>4 Generic
+Packages</h2></div></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pictex"></a>4.1 PiCTeX
+(tbd.)</h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2551827" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>tbd.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pstricks"></a>4.2
+PSTricks</h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2551853" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="pstricks-ovw"></a>4.2.1
+Overview</h4></div></div></div>
+<p>The idea behind the PSTricks package of Timothy van Zandt
+<a id="id2551856" class="indexterm"></a> is to provide most of the
+PostScript language in LaTeX and TeX syntax.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="pstricks-commands"></a>4.2.2 Commands and
+Parameters</h4></div></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-color"></a>4.2.2.1
+Color</h5></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2551932" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2551948"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2551964"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2551980" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\newgray{color}{num}</tt>
+,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\newrgbcolor{color}{num1
+num2 num3}</tt> ,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\newhsbcolor{color}{num1
+num2 num3}</tt> ,</span>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\newcmykcolor{color}{num1
+num2 num3 num4}</tt> ,</span></dt></dl></div>
+<p>Note that these commands are obsolete for LaTeX. Load PSTricks
+with <tt class="literal">\usepackage{pstcol}</tt> and use the
+standard LaTeX color commands instead.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-setting"></a>4.2.2.2 Setting
+graphics parameters</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\psset{par1=value1,par2=value2,...}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2552100" class="indexterm"></a></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-dimensions"></a>4.2.2.3
+Dimensions, coordinates and angles</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pssetlength{cmd}{dim}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2552152" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">unit=dim, xunit=dim,
+yunit=dim, yunit=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2552183" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2552199"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2552215"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2552230" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">1cm</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\degrees[num]</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2552271" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\radians</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2552302" class="indexterm"></a></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-basic"></a>4.2.2.4 Basic graphics
+parameters</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">linewidth=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2552356" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">.8pt</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">linecolor=color</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2552397" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">black</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">showpoints=true/false</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2552437" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default:
+<tt class="literal">false</tt></p></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-lines"></a>4.2.2.5 Lines and
+polygons</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">linearc=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2552499" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">0pt</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">framearc=num</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2552540" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">0</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">cornersize=relative/absolute</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2552580" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">relative</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\psline*[par]{arrows}(x0,y0)(x1,y1)...(xn,yn)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2552622" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\qline(coor0)(coor1)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2552653" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pspolygon*[par](x0,y0)(x1,y1)(x2,y2)...(xn,yn)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2552685" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\psframe*[par](x0,y0)(x1,y1)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2552717" class="indexterm"></a></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-arcs"></a>4.2.2.6 Arcs, circles
+and ellipses</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pscircle*[par](x0,y0){radius}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2552770" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\qdisk(coor){radius}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2552801" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pswedge*[par](x0,y0){radius}{angle1}{angle2}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2552833" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\psellipse*[par](x0,y0)(x1,y1)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2552864" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\psarc*[par]{arrows}(x,y){radius}{angleA}{angleB}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2552896" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\psarcn*[par]{arrows}(x,y){radius}{angleA}{angleB}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2552928" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">arcsep=dim, arcsepA=dim,
+arcsepB=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2552960" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2552976"
+class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2552992" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">0pt</tt></p></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-curves"></a>4.2.2.7
+Curves</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\psbezier*[par]{arrows}(x0,y0)(x1,y1)(x2,y2)(x3,y3)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2553054" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\parabola*[par]{arrows}(x0,y0)(x1,y1)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2553086" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pscurve*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)...(xn,yn)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2553118" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\psecurve*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)...(xn,yn)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2553149" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\psccurve*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)...(xn,yn)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2553181" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">curvature=num1 num2
+num3</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2553212" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">1 .1
+0</tt></p></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-dots"></a>4.2.2.8
+Dots</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\psdots*[par](x1,y1)(x2,y2)...(xn,yn)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2553275" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">dotstyle=style</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2553306" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">*</tt></p>
+<p>Dots: <tt class="literal">*, o, +, triangle, triangle*, square,
+square*, pentagon, pentagon*, |</tt></p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">dotscale=num1
+num2</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2553356" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">1</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">dotangle=angle</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2553396" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">0</tt></p></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-grids"></a>4.2.2.9
+Grids</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\psgrid(x0,y0)(x1,y1)(x2,y2)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2553459" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">gridwidth=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2553490" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">.8pt</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">gridcolor=color</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2553530" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">black</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">griddots=num</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2553569" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">0</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">gridlabels=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2553608" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">10pt</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">gridlabelcolor=color</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2553647" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">black</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">subgriddiv=int</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2553687" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">5</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">subgridwidth=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2553726" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">.4pt</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">subgridcolor=color</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2553766" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">gray</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">subgriddots=num</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2553805" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">0</tt></p></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-plots"></a>4.2.2.10
+Plots</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\fileplot*[par]{file}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2553866" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\dataplot*[par]{commands}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2553898" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\savedata{command}[data]</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2553929" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\readdata{command}{file}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2553961" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\listplot*[par]{list}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2553992" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\psplot*[par]{xmin}{xmax}{function}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2554024" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\parametricplot*[par]{tmin}{tmax}{function}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2554056" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">plotstyle=style</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2554087" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">line</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">plotpoints=int</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2554126" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">50</tt></p></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-coordinate"></a>4.2.2.11
+Coordinate systems</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">origin={coor}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2554188" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">0pt,0pt</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">swapaxes=true</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2554228" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default:
+<tt class="literal">false</tt></p></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-line-styles"></a>4.2.2.12 Line
+styles</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">linestyle=style</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2554289" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">solid</tt></p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">dash=dim1
+dim2</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2554328" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">5pt 3pt</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">dotsep=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2554368" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">3pt</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">border=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2554407" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">0pt</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">bordercolor=color</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2554446" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">white</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">doubleline=true/false</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2554485" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">false</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">doublesep=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2554524" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">1.25\pslinewidth</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">doublecolor=color</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2554564" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">white</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">shadow=true/false</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2554604" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">false</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">shadowsize=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2554643" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">3pt</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">shadowangle=angle</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2554683" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">-45</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">shadowcolor=color</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2554722" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">darkgray</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">dimen=outer/inner/middle</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2554761" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default:
+<tt class="literal">outer</tt></p></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-fill-styles"></a>4.2.2.13 Fill
+styles</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">fillstyle=style</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2554823" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">none</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">fillcolor=color</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2554862" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">white</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">hatchwidth=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2554902" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">.8pt</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">hatchsep=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2554941" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">4pt</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">hatchcolor=color</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2554981" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">black</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">hatchangle=rot</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2555020" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">45</tt></p></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-arrowheads"></a>4.2.2.14
+Arrowheads and such</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">arrows=style</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2555080" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">-</tt></p>
+<p>Arrows: <tt class="literal">-, &lt;-&gt;, &gt;-&lt;,
+&lt;&lt;-&gt;&gt;, &gt;&gt;-&lt;&lt;, |-|, |*-|*, [-], (-), o-o,
+*-*, oo-oo, **-**, c-c, cc-cc, C-C</tt></p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">arrowsize=dim
+num</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2555133" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">2pt 3</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">arrowlength=num</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2555172" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">1.4</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">arrowinset=num</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2555211" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">.4</tt></p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">tbarsize=dim
+num</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2555250" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">2pt 5</tt></p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">bracketlength=num,
+rbracketlength=num</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2555290" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2555306"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">.15</tt></p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">dotsize=dim
+num</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2555346" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">.5pt 2.5</tt></p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">arrowscale=num1
+num2</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2555385" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">1</tt></p></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-custom"></a>4.2.2.15 Custom
+styles</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\newpsobject{name}{object}{par1=value1,...}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2555446" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\newpsstyle{name}{par1=value1,...}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2555478" class="indexterm"></a></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-basics"></a>4.2.2.16 The
+basics</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pscustom*[par]{commands}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2555530" class="indexterm"></a></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-parameters"></a>4.2.2.17
+Parameters</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">linetype=int</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2555583" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">0</tt></p></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-graphics-objects"></a>4.2.2.18
+Graphics objects</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">liftpen=0/1/2</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2555644" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">0</tt></p></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="safe-tricks"></a>4.2.2.19 Safe
+tricks</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\newpath</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2555705" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\moveto(coor)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2555736" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\closepath</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2555767" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\stroke[par]</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2555798" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\fill[par]</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2555830" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\gsave</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2555861" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\grestore</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2555892" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\translate(coor)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2555923" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\scale{num1
+num2}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2555955" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\rotate{angle}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2555986" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\swapaxes</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2556017" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\msave</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2556048" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\mrestore</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2556080" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\openshadow[par]</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2556111" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\closedshadow[par]</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2556142" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\movepath(coor)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2556174" class="indexterm"></a></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pretty-safe-tricks"></a>4.2.2.20 Pretty
+safe tricks</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\lineto(coor)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2556226" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\rlineto(coor)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2556258" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\curveto(x1,y1)(x2,y2)(x3,y3)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2556289" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\rcurveto(x1,y1)(x2,y2)(x3,y3)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2556320" class="indexterm"></a></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="hackers"></a>4.2.2.21 For hackers
+only</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\code{code}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2556373" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\dim{dim}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2556404" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\coor(x1,y1)(x2,y2)...(xn,yn)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2556436" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\rcoor(x1,y1)(x2,y2)...(xn,yn)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2556467" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\file{file}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2556499" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\arrows{arrows}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2556530" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\setcolor{color}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2556561" class="indexterm"></a></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pictures"></a>4.2.2.22
+Pictures</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pspicture*[baseline](x0,y0)(x1,y1)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2556613" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\endpspicture</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2556644" class="indexterm"></a></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="placing"></a>4.2.2.23 Placing and rotating
+whatever</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\rput*[refpoint]{rotation}(x,y){stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2556698" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\uput*{labelsep}[refangle]{rotation}(x,y){stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2556729" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pslabelsep</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2556761" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">labelsep=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2556792" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">5pt</tt></p></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-repetition"></a>4.2.2.24
+Repetition</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\multirput*[refpoint]{angle}(x0,y0)(x1,y1){int}{stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2556854" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\multips{angle}(x0,y0)(x1,y1){int}{graphics}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2556886" class="indexterm"></a></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-axes"></a>4.2.2.25
+Axes</h5></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2556920" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\psaxes*[par]{arrows}(x0,y0)(x1,y1)(x2,y2)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="informaltable">
+<table border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">
+<span class="emphasis"><em>Horizontal</em></span></td>
+<td align="left">
+<span class="emphasis"><em>Vertical</em></span></td>
+<td align="left"><span class="emphasis"><em>Dflt</em></span></td>
+<td align="justify">
+<span class="emphasis"><em>Description</em></span></td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">Ox=num</td>
+<td align="left">Oy=num</td>
+<td align="left">0</td>
+<td align="justify">Label at origin.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">Dx=num</td>
+<td align="left">Dy=num</td>
+<td align="left">1</td>
+<td align="justify">Label increment.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">dx=dim</td>
+<td align="left">oy=dim</td>
+<td align="left">0pt</td>
+<td align="justify">Dist btwn
+labels.</td></tr></tbody></table></div></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">labels=all/x/y/none</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2557092" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">all</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">showorigin=true/false</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2557132" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">true</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">ticks=all/x/y/none</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2557173" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">all</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">tickstyle=full/top/bottom</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2557213" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">full</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">ticksize=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2557254" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">3pt</tt></p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\psxlabel,
+\psylabel</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2557295" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2557311"
+class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">axesstyle=axes/frame/none</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2557343" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">axes</tt></p></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-framed"></a>4.2.2.26 Framed
+boxes</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">framesep=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2557406" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">3pt</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">boxsep=true/false</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2557446" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">true</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\psframebox*[par]{stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2557487" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\psdblframebox*[par]{stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2557519" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\psshadowbox*[par]{stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2557551" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pscirclebox*[par]{stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2557582" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\cput*[par]{angle}(x,y){stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2557614" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\psovalbox*[par]{stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2557645" class="indexterm"></a></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-clipping"></a>4.2.2.27
+Clipping</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\clipbox[dim]{stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2557698" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\psclip{graphics} ...
+\endpsclip</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2557730" class="indexterm"></a></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-rotation"></a>4.2.2.28 Rotation
+and scaling boxes</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\rotateleft{stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2557782" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\rotateright{stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2557813" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\rotatedown{stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2557845" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\scalebox{num1
+num2}{stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2557876" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\scaleboxto(x,y){stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2557908" class="indexterm"></a></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-nodes"></a>4.2.2.29
+Nodes</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\rnode[refpoint]{name}{stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2557961" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\Rnode(x,y){name}{stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2557992" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\RnodeRef</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558023" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pnode(x,y){name}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558054" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\cnode*[par](x,y){radius}{name}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558086" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\circlenode*[par]{name}{stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558118" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\cnodeput*[par]{angle}(x,y){name}{stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558150" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\ovalnode*[par]{name}{stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558181" class="indexterm"></a></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-connections"></a>4.2.2.30 Node
+connections</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">nodesep=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558235" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">0</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">offset=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558276" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">0</tt></p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">arm=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558316" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">10pt</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">angle=angle</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558356" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">0</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">arcangle=angle</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558397" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">8</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">ncurv=num</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558438" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">.67</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">loopsize=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558478" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">1cm</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\ncline*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558519" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\ncLine*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558551" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\nccurve*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558582" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\ncarc*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558614" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\ncbar*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558646" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\ncdiag*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558677" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\ncdiagg*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558709" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\ncangle*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558741" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\ncangles*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558772" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\ncloop*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558804" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\nccircle*[par]{arrows}{node}{radius}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558836" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pcline*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558868" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pccurve*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558899" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pcarc*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558931" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pcbar*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558963" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pcdiag*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2558995" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pcangle*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2559026" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pcloop*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2559058" class="indexterm"></a></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-attaching"></a>4.2.2.31 Attaching
+labels to node connections</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\lput*[refpoint]{rotation}(pos){stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2559112" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\aput*[labelsep]{angle}(pos){stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2559144" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\bput*[labelsep]{angle}(pos){stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2559175" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\mput*[refpoint]{stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2559206" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\Aput*[labelsep]{stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2559238" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\Bput*[labelsep]{stuff}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2559269" class="indexterm"></a></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-coils"></a>4.2.2.32 Coils and
+zigzags</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pscoil*[par]{arrows}(x0,y0)(x1,y1)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2559323" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\psCoil*[par]{angle1}{angle2}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2559355" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pszigzag*[par]{arrows}(x0,y0)(x1,y1)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2559386" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">coilwidth=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2559418" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">1cm</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">coilheight=num</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2559458" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">1</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">coilarm=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2559498" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">.5cm</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">coilaspect=angle</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2559540" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">45</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">coilinc=angle</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2559580" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">10</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\nccoil*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2559621" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\nczigzag*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2559652" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pccoil*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2559684" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pczigzag*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2559716" class="indexterm"></a></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-coordinates"></a>4.2.2.33 Special
+coordinates</h5></div></div></div>
+<p><tt class="literal">\SpecialCoor</tt></p>
+<a id="id2559759" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="table"><a id="id2559775"></a>
+<p class="title"><b>Table&nbsp;1.12.&nbsp;Special coordinates and
+angles</b></p>
+<table summary="Special coordinates and angles" border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">
+<span class="emphasis"><em>Coordinate</em></span></td>
+<td align="left">
+<span class="emphasis"><em>Example</em></span></td>
+<td align="justify">
+<span class="emphasis"><em>Description</em></span></td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">(x,y)</td>
+<td align="left">(3,4)</td>
+<td align="justify">Cartesian coordinate.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">(r;a)</td>
+<td align="left">(3;110)</td>
+<td align="justify">Polar coordinate.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">(node)</td>
+<td align="left">(A)</td>
+<td align="justify">Center of node.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">([par]node)</td>
+<td align="left">([angle=45]A)</td>
+<td align="justify">Relative to node.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">(!ps)</td>
+<td align="left">(!5 3.3 2 exp)</td>
+<td align="justify">Raw PostScript.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">(coor1|coor2)</td>
+<td align="left">(A|1in;30)</td>
+<td align="justify">Combination.</td></tr></tbody></table>
+<table summary="Special coordinates and angles" border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">&nbsp;</td>
+<td class="auto-generated">&nbsp;</td>
+<td class="auto-generated">&nbsp;</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left"><span class="emphasis"><em>Angle</em></span></td>
+<td align="left">
+<span class="emphasis"><em>Example</em></span></td>
+<td align="justify">
+<span class="emphasis"><em>Description</em></span></td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">num</td>
+<td align="left">45</td>
+<td align="justify">Angle.</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">(coor)</td>
+<td align="left">(-1,1)</td>
+<td align="justify">Coordinate (vector).</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">!ps</td>
+<td align="left">!33 sqrt</td>
+<td align="justify">Raw PostScript.</td></tr></tbody></table></div>
+<p><tt class="literal">\NormalCoor</tt></p>
+<a id="id2560044" class="indexterm"></a></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-overlays"></a>4.2.2.34
+Overlays</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\overlaybox
+stuff\endoverlaybox</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2560093" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\psoverlay{string}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2560124" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\putoverlaybox{string}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2560156" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">gradbegin=color</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2560187" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">gradbegin</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">gradend=color</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2560228" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">gradend</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">gradlines=int</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2560269" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">500</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">gradmidpoint=num</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2560309" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">.9</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">gradangle=angle</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2560350" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">0</tt></p></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-path"></a>4.2.2.35 Typesetting
+text along a path</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pstextpath[pos](x,y){graphics
+object}{text}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2560412" class="indexterm"></a></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-stroking"></a>4.2.2.36 Stroking
+and filling character paths</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pscharpath*[par]{text}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2560465" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pscharclip*[par]{text}
+... \endpscharclip</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2560497" class="indexterm"></a></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-exporting"></a>4.2.2.37 Exporting
+EPS files</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\TeXtoEPS ...
+\endTeXtoEPS</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2560550" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\PSTtoEPS[par]{file}{graphics
+objects}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2560581" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">bbllx=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2560613" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">-1pt</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">bblly=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2560653" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">-1pt</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">bburx=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2560694" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">1pt</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">bbury=dim</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2560734" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">1pt</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">headerfile=file</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2560774" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">s</tt></p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">headers=none/all/user</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2560815" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">none</tt></p></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-boxes"></a>4.2.2.38
+Boxes</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\psmathboxtrue,
+\psmathboxfalse</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2560878" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2560894"
+class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\everypsbox{commands}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2560925" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pslongbox{name}{cmd}</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2560956" class="indexterm"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\psverbboxtrue,
+\psverbboxfalse</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2560988" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2561004"
+class="indexterm"></a></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-tricks"></a>4.2.2.39 Tips and
+More Tricks</h5></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">\pslbrace,
+\psrbrace</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2561058" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2561073"
+class="indexterm"></a></dd></dl></div></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="pstricks-add-packages"></a>4.2.3 List of
+Additional PSTricks Packages</h4></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><a href="ftp://ftp.dante.de/pub/tex/graphics/pstricks/contrib/psgo/"
+ target="_top"><tt class="literal">psgo</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dd>Draw Go diagrams</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><a href="ftp://ftp.dante.de/pub/tex/graphics/pstricks/contrib/pst-blur/"
+ target="_top"><tt class="literal">pst-blur</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dd>PSTricks package for "blurred" shadows</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><a href="http://dominique.rodriguez.9online.fr/pst-eucl/"
+ target="_top"><tt class="literal">pst-euc</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dd>G&eacute;om&eacute;trie en LaTeX et PSTricks</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><a href="http://www.tug.org/applications/PSTricks/More/pst-fr3d.tar.gz"
+ target="_top"><tt class="literal">pst-fr3d</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dd>Three dimensional framed Boxes</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><a href="ftp://ftp.dante.de/pub/tex/graphics/pstricks/contrib/pst-ghsb/"
+ target="_top"><tt class="literal">pst-ghsb</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dd>PSTricks package for HSB Gradients</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><a href="ftp://ftp.dante.de/pub/tex/graphics/pstricks/contrib/pst-gr3d/"
+ target="_top"><tt class="literal">pst-gr3d</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dd>PSTricks package for 3D grids</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><a href="http://members.aol.com/ManuelLuque2/optique.htm"
+ target="_top"><tt class="literal">pst-lens</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dd>Optique g&eacute;om&eacute;trique</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><a href="ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/graphics/pstricks/generic/"
+ target="_top"><tt class="literal">pst-node</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dd>PSTricks package for nodes</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><a href="http://members.aol.com/Mluque5130/pst-ob3d.tar.gz"
+ target="_top"><tt class="literal">pst-ob3d</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dd>A PSTricks package for three dimensional basic objects</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><a href="http://www.tug.org/applications/PSTricks/Physics/Oscilloscopes/"
+ target="_top"><tt class="literal">pst-osci</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dd>Oscilloscopes with PSTricks</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><a href="ftp://ftp.dante.de/pub/tex/graphics/pstricks/contrib/pst-poly/"
+ target="_top"><tt class="literal">pst-poly</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dd>Polygons with PSTricks</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><a href="ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/graphics/pstricks/generic/"
+ target="_top"><tt class="literal">pst-tree</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dd>PSTricks package for trees</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><a href="http://www.ensta.fr/~diam/latex/pst-uml/"
+ target="_top"><tt class="literal">pst-uml</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dd>Draw easily diagrams with UML notation</dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><a href="http://perso.enst.fr/~lombardy/Vauc/"
+target="_top"><tt class="literal">vaucansom.sty</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dd>Drawing automata</dd></dl></div></div></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="fontinst"></a>5
+<tt class="filename">fontinst</tt> (tbd.)</h2></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2561444" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>tbd.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="context"></a>6 ConTeXt
+(tbd.)</h2></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2561469" class="indexterm"></a><a id="id2561478"
+class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="context-ovw"></a>6.1
+Overview</h3></div></div></div>
+<p>ConTeXt is based on PlainTeX and MetaPost and gets controlled
+with some Perl scripts. It's mainly targeted towards layout
+oriented users and especially useful for presentations. It's
+extensible by the use of modules and has in it's base distribution
+already a large amount of functionality. The preferred output
+format is PDF, but DVI is possible too.</p>
+<p>Some of the unique features of ConTeXt are:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>Inline XML (including MathML, ChemML, and PhysML)</li>
+<li>really good XML support in general</li>
+<li>inline MetaPost</li></ul></div></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="texinfo"></a>7 Texinfo
+(tbd.)</h2></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2561513" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>tbd.</p></div></div>
+<div class="chapter" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title">
+<a id="pdftex"></a>Chapter&nbsp;2.&nbsp;pdfTeX</h2></div></div></div>
+<div class="toc">
+<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-options">1
+Options</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-file-line-error-style">
+1.1
+<tt class="filename">--file-line-error-style</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-fmt">1.2
+<tt class="filename">--fmt format</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-help">1.3
+<tt class="filename">--help</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-ini">1.4
+<tt class="filename">--ini</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-interaction%20mode">1.5
+<tt class="filename">--interaction mode</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-ipc">1.6
+<tt class="filename">--ipc</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-ipc-start">1.7
+<tt class="filename">--ipc-start</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-jobname-name">1.8
+<tt class="filename">--jobname name</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-kpathsea-debug">1.9
+<tt class="filename">--kpathsea-debug bitmask</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-maketex">1.10
+<tt class="filename">--maketex fmt</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-no-maketex">1.11
+<tt class="filename">--no-maketex fmt</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-output-comment">1.12
+<tt class="filename">--output-comment string</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-parse-first-line">1.13
+<tt class="filename">--parse-first-line</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-progname">1.14
+<tt class="filename">--progname name</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-recorder">1.15
+<tt class="filename">--recorder</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-shell-escape">1.16
+<tt class="filename">--shell-escape</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-translate-file">1.17
+<tt class="filename">--translate-file tcxname</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-version">1.18
+<tt class="filename">--version</tt></a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-environment">2
+Environment</a></span></dt></dl></div>
+<a id="id2561599" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
+<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
+<p>The contents of this section was taken from
+<tt class="filename">pdftex(1)</tt>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="pdftex-options"></a>1
+Options</h2></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2561639" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>pdfTeX understands the following command line options.</p>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title">
+<a id="pdftex-option-file-line-error-style"></a>1.1
+<tt class="filename">--file-line-error-style</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2561675" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Print error messages in the form
+<tt class="literal">file:line:error</tt> which is similar to the
+way many compilers format them.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-fmt"></a>1.2
+<tt class="filename">--fmt format</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2561719" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Use <tt class="literal">format</tt> as the name of the format to
+be used, instead of the name by which pdfTeX was called or a
+<tt class="literal">%&amp;</tt> line.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-help"></a>1.3
+<tt class="filename">--help</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2561774" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Print help message and exit.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-ini"></a>1.4
+<tt class="filename">--ini</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2561810" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Be <span><b class="command">pdfinitex</b></span>, for dumping
+formats; this is implicitly true if the program is called as
+<span><b class="command">pdfinitex</b></span>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-interaction mode"></a>1.5
+<tt class="filename">--interaction mode</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2561860" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be one of
+<tt class="literal">batchmode</tt>,
+<tt class="literal">nonstopmode</tt>,
+<tt class="literal">scrollmode</tt>, and
+<tt class="literal">errorstopmode</tt>. The meaning of these modes
+is the same as that of the corresponding
+<tt class="literal">\commands</tt>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-ipc"></a>1.6
+<tt class="filename">--ipc</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2561928" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Send DVI or PDF output to a socket as well as the usual output
+file. Whether this option is available is the choice of the
+installer.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-ipc-start"></a>1.7
+<tt class="filename">--ipc-start</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2561967" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>As <tt class="literal">--ipc</tt>, and starts the server at the
+other end as well. Whether this option is available is the choice
+of the installer.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-jobname-name"></a>1.8
+<tt class="filename">--jobname name</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2562011" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Use <tt class="literal">name</tt> for the job name, instead of
+deriving it from the name of the input file.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-kpathsea-debug"></a>1.9
+<tt class="filename">--kpathsea-debug
+bitmask</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2562055" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Sets path searching debugging flags according to the
+<tt class="literal">bitmask</tt>. See the Kpathsea manual for
+details.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-maketex"></a>1.10
+<tt class="filename">--maketex fmt</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2562099" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Enable <span><b class="command">mktexfmt</b></span>, where
+<tt class="literal">fmt</tt> must be one of
+<tt class="literal">tex</tt> or
+<tt class="literal">tfm</tt>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-no-maketex"></a>1.11
+<tt class="filename">--no-maketex fmt</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2562160" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Disable <span><b class="command">mktexfmt</b></span>, where
+<tt class="literal">fmt</tt> must be one of
+<tt class="literal">tex</tt> or
+<tt class="literal">tfm</tt>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-output-comment"></a>1.12
+<tt class="filename">--output-comment
+string</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2562220" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Use <tt class="literal">string</tt> for the DVI file comment
+instead of the date.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-parse-first-line"></a>1.13
+<tt class="filename">--parse-first-line</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2562260" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>If the first line of the main input file begins with
+<tt class="literal">%&amp;</tt> parse it to look for a dump name or
+a <tt class="literal">--translate-file</tt> option.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-progname"></a>1.14
+<tt class="filename">--progname name</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2562311" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Pretend to be program <tt class="literal">name</tt>. This
+affects both the format used and the search paths.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-recorder"></a>1.15
+<tt class="filename">--recorder</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2562354" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Enable the filename recorder. This leaves a trace of the files
+opened for input and output in a file with extension
+<tt class="literal">.fls</tt>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-shell-escape"></a>1.16
+<tt class="filename">--shell-escape</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2562399" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Enable the <tt class="literal">\write18{command}</tt> construct.
+The command can be any Bourne shell command. This construct is
+normally disallowed for security reasons.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-translate-file"></a>1.17
+<tt class="filename">--translate-file
+tcxname</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2562444" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Use the <tt class="literal">tcxname</tt> translation
+table.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-version"></a>1.18
+<tt class="filename">--version</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2562487" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Print version information and exit.</p></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
+<a id="pdftex-environment"></a>2 Environment</h2></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2562518" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path
+specifications' node) for the details of how the environment
+variables are used when searching. The
+<span><b class="command">kpsewhich</b></span> utility can be used
+to query the values of the variables.</p>
+<p>One caveat: In most pdfTeX formats, you cannot use ~ in a
+filename you give directly to pdfTeX, because ~ is an active
+character, and hence is expanded, not taken as part of the
+filename. Other programs, such as Metafont, do not have this
+problem.</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">TEXMFOUTPUT</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2562576" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Normally, pdfTeX puts its output files in the current directory.
+If any output file cannot be opened there, it tries to open it in
+the directory specified in the environment variable
+<tt class="literal">TEXMFOUTPUT</tt>. There is no default value for
+that variable. For example, if you say
+<span><b class="command">pdftex paper</b></span> and the current
+directory is not writable, if <tt class="literal">TEXMFOUTPUT</tt>
+has the value <tt class="literal">/tmp</tt>, pdfTeX attempts to
+create <tt class="literal">/tmp/paper.log</tt> (and
+<tt class="literal">/tmp/paper.pdf</tt>, if any output is
+produced.)</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">TEXINPUTS</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2562664" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Search path for <tt class="literal">\input</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">\openin</tt> files. This should probably start
+with ``.'', so that user files are found before system files. An
+empty path component will be replaced with the paths defined in the
+<tt class="filename">texmf.cnf</tt> file. For example, set
+<tt class="literal">TEXINPUTS</tt> to
+<tt class="literal">".:/home/usr/tex:"</tt> to prepend the current
+direcory and <tt class="literal">``/home/user/tex''</tt> to the
+standard search path.</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">TEXFONTS</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2562741" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>earch path for font metric (<tt class="literal">.tfm</tt>)
+files.</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">TEXFORMATS</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2562783" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Search path for format files.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">TEXPOOL</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2562818" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Search path for <span><b class="command">pdfinitex</b></span>
+internal strings.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">TEXEDIT</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2562859" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Command template for switching to editor. The default, usually
+<span><b class="command">vi</b></span>, is set when pdfTeX is
+compiled.</p></dd></dl></div></div></div>
+<div class="chapter" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title">
+<a id="metafont"></a>Chapter&nbsp;3.&nbsp;Metafont
+(tbd.)</h2></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2562920" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>tbd.</p></div>
+<div class="chapter" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title">
+<a id="metapost"></a>Chapter&nbsp;4.&nbsp;MetaPost</h2></div></div></div>
+<div class="toc">
+<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-options">1
+Options</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-file-line-error-style">
+1.1
+<tt class="filename">--file-line-error-style</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-help">1.2
+<tt class="filename">--help</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-ini">1.3
+<tt class="filename">--ini</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-intercation">1.4
+<tt class="filename">--interaction mode</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-jobname">1.5
+<tt class="filename">--jobname name</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-kpathsea-debug">1.6
+<tt class="filename">--kpathsea-debug bitmask</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-mem">1.7
+<tt class="filename">--mem mem</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-parse-first-line">1.8
+<tt class="filename">--parse-first-line</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-progname">1.9
+<tt class="filename">--progname name</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-recorder">1.10
+<tt class="filename">--recorder</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-T">1.11
+<tt class="filename">-T</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-translate-file">1.12
+<tt class="filename">--translate-file tcxname</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-troff">1.13
+<tt class="filename">--troff</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-version">1.14
+<tt class="filename">--version</tt></a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-environment">2
+Environment</a></span></dt></dl></div>
+<a id="id2562948" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
+<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
+<p>The contents of this section was taken from
+<tt class="filename">mpost(1)</tt>.</p></div>
+<p>MetaPost is a programming language much like Knuth's Metafont
+except that it outputs PostScript programs instead of bitmaps.
+Borrowed from Metafont are the basic tools for creating and
+manipulating pictures. These include numbers, coordinate pairs,
+cubic splines, affine transformations, text strings, and boolean
+quantities. Additional features facilitate integrating text and
+graphics and accessing special features of PostScript such as
+clipping, shading, and dashed lines. Another feature borrowed from
+Metafont is the ability to solve linear equations that are given
+implicitly, thus allowing many programs to be written in a largely
+declarative style. By building complex operations from simpler
+ones, MetaPost achieves both power and exibility.</p>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
+<a id="metapost-options"></a>1 Options</h2></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2563000" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>MetaPost understands the following command line options.</p>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title">
+<a id="metapost-option-file-line-error-style"></a>1.1
+<tt class="filename">--file-line-error-style</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2563034" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Print error messages in the form
+<tt class="literal">file:line:error</tt> which is similar to the
+way many compilers format them.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-help"></a>1.2
+<tt class="filename">--help</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2563078" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Print help message and exit.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-ini"></a>1.3
+<tt class="filename">--ini</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2563114" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Be <span><b class="command">inimpost</b></span>, for dumping
+bases; this is implicitly true if the program is called as
+<span><b class="command">inimpost</b></span>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-intercation"></a>1.4
+<tt class="filename">--interaction mode</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2563164" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be one of
+<tt class="literal">batchmode</tt>,
+<tt class="literal">nonstopmode</tt>,
+<tt class="literal">scrollmode</tt>, and
+<tt class="literal">errorstopmode</tt>. The meaning of these modes
+is the same as that of the corresponding commands.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-jobname"></a>1.5
+<tt class="filename">--jobname name</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2563226" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Use <tt class="literal">name</tt> for the job name, instead of
+deriving it from the name of the input file.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-kpathsea-debug"></a>1.6
+<tt class="filename">--kpathsea-debug
+bitmask</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2563270" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Sets path searching debugging flags according to the
+<tt class="literal">bitmask</tt>. See the Kpathsea manual for
+details.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-mem"></a>1.7
+<tt class="filename">--mem mem</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2563313" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Use <tt class="literal">mem</tt> as the name of the mem to be
+used, instead of the name by which MetaPost was called or a
+<tt class="literal">%&amp;</tt> line.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-parse-first-line"></a>1.8
+<tt class="filename">--parse-first-line</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2563365" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>If the first line of the main input file begins with
+<tt class="literal">%&amp;</tt> parse it to look for a dump name or
+a <tt class="literal">--translate-file</tt> option.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-progname"></a>1.9
+<tt class="filename">--progname name</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2563416" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Pretend to be program <tt class="literal">name</tt>. This
+affects both the format used and the search paths.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-recorder"></a>1.10
+<tt class="filename">--recorder</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2563459" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Enable the filename recorder. This leaves a trace of the files
+opened for input and output in a file with extension
+<tt class="literal">.fls.</tt></p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-T"></a>1.11
+<tt class="filename">-T</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2563501" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Produce TROFF output.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-translate-file"></a>1.12
+<tt class="filename">--translate-file
+tcxname</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2563538" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Use the <tt class="literal">tcxname</tt> translation
+table.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-troff"></a>1.13
+<tt class="filename">--troff</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2563582" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>As -T.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-version"></a>1.14
+<tt class="filename">--version</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2563618" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Print version information and exit.</p></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
+<a id="metapost-environment"></a>2
+Environment</h2></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2563650" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path
+specifications' node) for the details of how the environment
+variables are use when searching. The
+<span><b class="command">kpsewhich</b></span> utility can be used
+to query the values of the variables.</p>
+<p>If the environment variable <tt class="literal">TEXMFOUTPUT</tt>
+is set, MetaPost attempts to put its output files in it, if they
+cannot be put in the current directory.</p>
+<p>Here is a list of the environment variables which affect the
+behavior of MetaPost:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">MPINPUTS</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2563705" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Search path for input files.</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">MFINPUTS</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2563738" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Auxiliary search path for input files with
+<tt class="literal">.mf</tt> extensions.</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">MPSUPPORT</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2563776" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Directory for various tables for handling included TeX and
+troff.</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">MPXCOMMAND</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2563813" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The name of a shell script that converts embedded typesetting
+commands to a form that MetaPost understands. Defaults:
+<tt class="literal">makempx</tt> for TeX and
+<tt class="literal">troffmpx</tt> for troff.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">TEX</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2563864" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The version of TeX - or LaTeX - to use when processing
+<span><b class="command">btex</b></span> and
+<span><b class="command">verbatimtex</b></span> commands. Default
+TeX. This version of MetaPost allows you to use a
+<tt class="literal">`%&amp;format'</tt> line instead.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">TROFF</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2563928" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The troff pipeline for <span><b class="command">btex</b></span>
+and <span><b class="command">verbatimtex</b></span> commands.
+Default <tt class="literal">eqn -d\$\$ | troff</tt></p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">MPEDIT</tt></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="id2563978" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>A command template for invoking an editor.</p></dd></dl></div>
+<p>A <tt class="literal">.mem</tt> file is a binary file that
+permits fast loading of macro packages. MetaPost reads the default
+<tt class="literal">plain.mem</tt> unless another
+<tt class="literal">.mem</tt> file is specified at the start of the
+first line with an <tt class="literal">&amp;</tt> just before it.
+There is also an <tt class="literal">mfplain.mem</tt> that
+simulates plain Metafont so that MetaPost can read
+<tt class="literal">.mf</tt> fonts. (Plain Metafont is described in
+<span class="emphasis"><em>The Metafontbook</em></span>).</p>
+<p>Experts can create <tt class="literal">.mem</tt> files by
+invoking <span><b class="command">inimpost</b></span> and giving
+macro definitions followed by a dump command.</p>
+<p>The MetaPost language is similar to Metafont, but the manual
+<span class="emphasis"><em>A User's Manual for MetaPost</em></span>
+assumes no knowledge of Metafont. MetaPost does not have bitmap
+output commands or Metafont's online display
+mechanism.</p></div></div>
+<div class="chapter" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title">
+<a id="bibtex"></a>Chapter&nbsp;5.&nbsp;BibTeX</h2></div></div></div>
+<div class="toc">
+<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-parameters">1
+Parameters</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-command-qualifiers">2
+Command Qualifiers</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bib-files">3 bib
+files</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-string-command">3.1
+<tt class="filename">@STRING</tt> command</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-entry-format">3.2 Entry
+Format</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-entry-types">3.3 Entry
+Types</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-field-text">3.4 Field
+Text</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-field-types">3.5 Field
+Types</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bst-files">4 bst
+files</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bst-abbr">4.1
+<tt class="filename">ABBRV.BST</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bst-alpha">4.2
+<tt class="filename">ALPHA.BST</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bst-plain">4.3
+<tt class="filename">PLAIN.BST</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bst-sample">4.4
+<tt class="filename">SAMPLE.BST</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bst-unsrt">4.5
+<tt class="filename">UNSRT.BST</tt></a></span></dt></dl></dd></dl></div>
+<a id="id2564099" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
+<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
+<p>The contents of this section was taken from the HTML helppages
+for BibTeX of Norman Walsh (Version 1.0, 12 Apr 94).</p></div>
+<p>Invokes the BibTeX utility to compile a bibliography file for
+LaTeX. Full details can be found in "LaTeX: A Document Preparation
+System" by Leslie Lamport.</p>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
+<a id="bibtex-parameters"></a>1 Parameters</h2></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2564142" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">bibliography-file-spec</tt></p>
+<p>Specifies the name of the bibliography database file to be
+compiled by BibTeX. If the file specification does not include a
+file type, BibTeX assumes a default type of BIB.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
+<a id="bibtex-command-qualifiers"></a>2 Command
+Qualifiers</h2></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2564187" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p><tt class="literal">/BIBINPUTS /BIBINPUTS=(name,...)</tt></p>
+<p>Specify directories containing input files, and the order in
+which they will be searched to locate each input file. A null value
+in the list indicates the current directory. The search procedure
+TeX uses to locate input files is to first search your default
+directory and then search each of the directories specified by the
+<tt class="literal">/BIBINPUTS</tt> option.</p>
+<p>Default is <tt class="literal">/BIBINPUTS=(TEX_BIB:)</tt>; TeX
+looks in the directory associated with the logical name
+<tt class="literal">TEX_BIB.</tt></p>
+<p><tt class="literal">/STATS /STATS /NOSTATS [D]</tt></p>
+<p>This qualifier is used while debugging
+<tt class="literal">.BST</tt> files to determine BIBTEX memory
+usage.</p>
+<p><tt class="literal">/TEXINPUTS /TEXINPUTS=(name,...)</tt></p>
+<p>Specify directories containing input files, and the order in
+which they will be searched to locate each input file. A null value
+in the list indicates the current directory. The search procedure
+TeX uses to locate input files is to first search your default
+directory and then search each of the directories specified by the
+<tt class="literal">/TEXINPUTS</tt> option.</p>
+<p>Default is <tt class="literal">/TEXINPUTS=(TEX_INPUTS)</tt>; TeX
+looks in the directory associated with the logical name
+<tt class="literal">TEX_INPUTS</tt>.</p>
+<p><tt class="literal">/TRACE /TRACE /NOTRACE [D]</tt></p>
+<p>This qualifier is used while debugging
+<tt class="literal">.BST</tt> files to follow program
+flow.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
+<a id="bibtex-bib-files"></a>3 bib files</h2></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2564338" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>This help entry contains the same information as Appendix B of
+the LaTeX manual. It describes the format of a bibliography
+database (<tt class="literal">.BIB</tt>) file.</p>
+<p>A bibliography database file may contains two types of entry -
+an abbreviation definition or a reference entry for citation.</p>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="bibtex-string-command"></a>3.1
+<tt class="filename">@STRING</tt> command</h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2564389" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">@STRING</tt> command is used to define
+abbreviations for use by BibTeX within the bibliography database
+file. The command</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+ @string{jgg1 = "Journal of Gnats and Gnus, Series~1"}
+</pre>
+<p>defines 'jgg1' to be the abbreviation for the string "Journal of
+Gnats and Gnus, Series~1". Parentheses can be used in place of the
+outermost braces in the @string command, and braces can be used
+instead of the quotation marks. The text must have matching
+braces.</p>
+<p>The case of letters is ignored in an abbreviation as well as in
+the command name @string, so the command above could have been
+written:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+ @STRING{JgG1 = "Journal of Gnats and Gnus, Series~1"}
+</pre>
+<p>A <tt class="literal">@string</tt> command can appear anywhere
+before or between entries in a bibliography database file. However,
+it must come before any use of the abbreviation, so a sensible
+place for <tt class="literal">@string</tt> commands is at the
+beginning of the file. A <tt class="literal">@string</tt> command
+in the bibliography database file takes precedence over a
+definition made by the bibliography style, so it can be used to
+change the definition of an abbreviation such as 'Feb'.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-format"></a>3.2 Entry
+Format</h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2564482" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>A bibliography database file contains a series of reference
+entries like the following:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+ @BOOK{kn:gnus,
+ AUTHOR = "Donald E. Knudson",
+ TITLE = "1966 World Gnus Almanac",
+ PUBLISHER = {Permafrost Press},
+ ADDRESS = {Novisibirsk} }
+</pre>
+<p>The <tt class="literal">@BOOK</tt> states that this is an entry
+of type book. various entry types are described below. The
+'kn:gnus' is the citation key, as it appears in the argument of a
+<tt class="literal">\cite</tt> command referring to the entry.</p>
+<p>This entry has four fields, named
+<tt class="literal">AUTHOR</tt>, <tt class="literal">TITLE</tt>,
+<tt class="literal">PUBLISHER</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">ADDRESS</tt>. The meanings of these and other
+fields are described below. A field consists of the name, an '='
+character with optional space around it, followed by its text. The
+text of a field is a string of characters, with no unmatched
+braces, surrounded by either a pair of braces or a pair of '"'
+characters. Entry fields are separated from one another, and from
+the citation key, by commas. A comma may have optional space around
+it.</p>
+<p>The outermost braces that surround the entire entry may be
+replaced by parentheses. As in TeX input files, an end-of-line
+character counts as a space and one space is equivalent to many
+spaces. Unlike TeX, BibTeX ignores the case of letters in the entry
+type, citation key and field names. The above entry could have been
+typed as follows:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@BOOK(kn:gnus, author = {Donald E. Knudson},
+ TITLE = "1966 World Gnus Almanac",
+ PUBLISHER = {Permafrost Press},
+ ADDRESS = {Novisibirsk} )
+</pre>
+<p>However, the case of letters does matter to LaTeX, so the
+citation key ("kn:gnus" in the example above) should appear exactly
+the same in all <tt class="literal">\cite</tt> commands in the
+LaTeX input file.</p>
+<p>The quotes or braces can be omitted around text consisting
+entirely of numerals. The following two fields are equivalent:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+Volume = "27" Volume = 27
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types"></a>3.3 Entry
+Types</h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2564636" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>When entering a reference in the bibliography database, the
+first thing to decide is what type of entry it is. No fixed
+classification scheme can be complete, but BibTeX provides enough
+entry types to handle almost any reference reasonably well.</p>
+<p>References to different types of publications contain different
+information; a reference to a journal might include the volume and
+number of the journal, which is usually not meaningful for a book.
+Therefore, database entries of different types have different
+fields for each entry type, the fields are divided into three
+classes:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term">Required</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>omitting the field will produce an error message and may result
+in a badly formatted bibliography entry. If the required
+information is not meaningful, you are using the wrong entry
+type.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">Optional</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>the field's information will be used if present, but can be
+omitted without causing any formatting problems. A reference should
+contain any available information that might help the reader, so
+you should include the optional field if it is applicable.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">Ignored</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>the field is ignored. BibTeX ignores any field that is not
+required or optional, so you can include any fields you want in a
+bibliography entry. It's often a good idea to put all relevant
+information about a reference in its bibliography entry - even
+information that may never appear in the bibliography. For example,
+if you want to keep an abstract of a paper in a computer file, put
+it in an 'abstract' field in the paper's bibliography entry. The
+bibliography database file is likely to be as good a place as any
+for the abstract, and it is possible to design a bibliography style
+for printing selected abstracts.</p></dd></dl></div>
+<p>BibTeX ignores the case of letters in the entry type.</p>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-article"></a>3.3.1
+article entry</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2564768" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>An article from a journal or magazine.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@ARTICLE{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-author"
+title="3.5.3 author field">author</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-title"
+title="3.5.20 title field">title</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-journal"
+title="3.5.10 journal field">journal</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-year"
+title="3.5.23 year field">year</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-volume"
+title="3.5.22 volume field">volume</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-number"
+title="3.5.14 number field">number</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-pages"
+title="3.5.16 pages field">pages</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-month"
+title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-note"
+title="3.5.13 note field">note</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-key"
+title="3.5.11 key field">key</a></p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-book"></a>3.3.2 book
+entry</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2564903" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>A book with an explicit publisher.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@BOOK{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-author"
+title="3.5.3 author field">author</a> or
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-editor"
+title="3.5.7 editor field">editor</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-title"
+title="3.5.20 title field">title</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-publisher"
+title="3.5.17 publisher field">publisher</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-year"
+title="3.5.23 year field">year</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-volume"
+title="3.5.22 volume field">volume</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-series"
+title="3.5.19 series field">series</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-address"
+title="3.5.1 address field">address</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-edition"
+title="3.5.6 edition field">edition</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-month"
+title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-note"
+title="3.5.13 note field">note</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-key"
+title="3.5.11 key field">key</a></p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-booklet"></a>3.3.3
+booklet entry</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2565048" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>A work that is printed and bound, but without a named publisher
+or sponsoring institution.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@BOOKLET{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-title"
+title="3.5.20 title field">title</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-author"
+title="3.5.3 author field">author</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-howpublished"
+title="3.5.8 howpublished field">howpublished</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-address"
+title="3.5.1 address field">address</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-month"
+title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-year"
+title="3.5.23 year field">year</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-note"
+title="3.5.13 note field">note</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-key"
+title="3.5.11 key field">key</a></p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-conference"></a>3.3.4
+conference entry</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2565158" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>An article in the proceedings of a conference. This entry is
+identical to the 'inproceedings' entry and is included for
+compatibility with another text formatting system.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@CONFERENCE{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-author"
+title="3.5.3 author field">author</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-title"
+title="3.5.20 title field">title</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-booktitle"
+title="3.5.4 booktitle field">booktitle</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-year"
+title="3.5.23 year field">year</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-editor"
+title="3.5.7 editor field">editor</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-pages"
+title="3.5.16 pages field">pages</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-organization"
+title="3.5.15 organization field">organization</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-publisher"
+title="3.5.17 publisher field">publisher</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-address"
+title="3.5.1 address field">address</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-month"
+title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-note"
+title="3.5.13 note field">note</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-key"
+title="3.5.11 key field">key</a></p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-inbook"></a>3.3.5
+inbook entry</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2565304" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>A part of a book, which may be a chapter and/or a range of
+pages.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@INBOOK{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-author"
+title="3.5.3 author field">author</a> or
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-editor"
+title="3.5.7 editor field">editor</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-title"
+title="3.5.20 title field">title</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-chapter"
+title="3.5.5 chapter field">chapter</a> and/or
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-pages"
+title="3.5.16 pages field">pages</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-publisher"
+title="3.5.17 publisher field">publisher</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-year"
+title="3.5.23 year field">year</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-volume"
+title="3.5.22 volume field">volume</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-series"
+title="3.5.19 series field">series</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-address"
+title="3.5.1 address field">address</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-edition"
+title="3.5.6 edition field">edition</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-month"
+title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-note"
+title="3.5.13 note field">note</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-key"
+title="3.5.11 key field">key</a></p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-incollection"></a>3.3.6
+incollection entry</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2565459" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>A part of a book with its own title.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@INCOLLECTION{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-author"
+title="3.5.3 author field">author</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-title"
+title="3.5.20 title field">title</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-booktitle"
+title="3.5.4 booktitle field">booktitle</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-year"
+title="3.5.23 year field">year</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-editor"
+title="3.5.7 editor field">editor</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-pages"
+title="3.5.16 pages field">pages</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-organization"
+title="3.5.15 organization field">organization</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-publisher"
+title="3.5.17 publisher field">publisher</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-address"
+title="3.5.1 address field">address</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-month"
+title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-note"
+title="3.5.13 note field">note</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-key"
+title="3.5.11 key field">key</a></p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="bibtex-entry-types-inproceedings"></a>3.3.7 inproceedings
+entry</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2565598" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>An article in the proceedings of a conference.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@INPROCEEDINGS{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-author"
+title="3.5.3 author field">author</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-title"
+title="3.5.20 title field">title</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-booktitle"
+title="3.5.4 booktitle field">booktitle</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-year"
+title="3.5.23 year field">year</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-editor"
+title="3.5.7 editor field">editor</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-pages"
+title="3.5.16 pages field">pages</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-organization"
+title="3.5.15 organization field">organization</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-publisher"
+title="3.5.17 publisher field">publisher</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-address"
+title="3.5.1 address field">address</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-month"
+title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-note"
+title="3.5.13 note field">note</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-key"
+title="3.5.11 key field">key</a></p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-manual"></a>3.3.8
+manual entry</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2565738" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Technical documentation.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@MANUAL{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-title"
+title="3.5.20 title field">title</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-author"
+title="3.5.3 author field">author</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-organization"
+title="3.5.15 organization field">organization</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-address"
+title="3.5.1 address field">address</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-edition"
+title="3.5.6 edition field">edition</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-month"
+title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-year"
+title="3.5.23 year field">year</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-note"
+title="3.5.13 note field">note</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-key"
+title="3.5.11 key field">key</a></p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="bibtex-entry-types-mastersthesis"></a>3.3.9 mastersthesis
+entry</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2565854" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>A Master's thesis.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@MASTERSTHESIS{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-author"
+title="3.5.3 author field">author</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-title"
+title="3.5.20 title field">title</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-school"
+title="3.5.18 school field">school</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-year"
+title="3.5.23 year field">year</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-address"
+title="3.5.1 address field">address</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-month"
+title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-note"
+title="3.5.13 note field">note</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-key"
+title="3.5.11 key field">key</a></p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-misc"></a>3.3.10 misc
+entry</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2565963" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Use this type when nothing else seems appropriate.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@MISC{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: none</p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-author"
+title="3.5.3 author field">author</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-title"
+title="3.5.20 title field">title</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-howpublished"
+title="3.5.8 howpublished field">howpublished</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-month"
+title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-year"
+title="3.5.23 year field">year</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-note"
+title="3.5.13 note field">note</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-key"
+title="3.5.11 key field">key</a></p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-phdthesis"></a>3.3.11
+phdthesis entry</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2566065" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>A PhD thesis.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@PHDTHESIS{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-author"
+title="3.5.3 author field">author</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-title"
+title="3.5.20 title field">title</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-school"
+title="3.5.18 school field">school</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-year"
+title="3.5.23 year field">year</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-address"
+title="3.5.1 address field">address</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-month"
+title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-note"
+title="3.5.13 note field">note</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-key"
+title="3.5.11 key field">key</a></p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-proceedings"></a>3.3.12
+proceedings entry</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2566173" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The proceedings of a conference.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@PROCEEDINGS{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-title"
+title="3.5.20 title field">title</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-year"
+title="3.5.23 year field">year</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-editor"
+title="3.5.7 editor field">editor</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-publisher"
+title="3.5.17 publisher field">publisher</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-organization"
+title="3.5.15 organization field">organization</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-address"
+title="3.5.1 address field">address</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-month"
+title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-note"
+title="3.5.13 note field">note</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-key"
+title="3.5.11 key field">key</a></p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-techreport"></a>3.3.13
+techreport entry</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2566290" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>A report published by a school or other institution, usually
+numbered within a series.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@TECHREPORT{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-author"
+title="3.5.3 author field">author</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-title"
+title="3.5.20 title field">title</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-institution"
+title="3.5.9 institution field">institution</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-year"
+title="3.5.23 year field">year</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-type"
+title="3.5.21 type field">type</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-number"
+title="3.5.14 number field">number</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-address"
+title="3.5.1 address field">address</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-month"
+title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-note"
+title="3.5.13 note field">note</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-key"
+title="3.5.11 key field">key</a></p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-unpublished"></a>3.3.14
+unpublished entry</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2566418" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>A document with an author and title, but not formally
+published.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@UNPUBLISHED{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-author"
+title="3.5.3 author field">author</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-title"
+title="3.5.20 title field">title</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-note"
+title="3.5.13 note field">note</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a href="#bibtex-field-types-month"
+title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-year"
+title="3.5.23 year field">year</a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-key"
+title="3.5.11 key field">key</a></p></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-text"></a>3.4 Field
+Text</h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2566513" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The text of the field is enclosed in braces or double quote
+characters. A part of the text is said to be enclosed in braces if
+it lies inside a matching pair of braces other than the ones
+enclosing the entire entry or the entire field text.</p>
+<p>BibTeX manipulates the case of letters in the field text as
+described in the subtopics below.</p>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-text-names"></a>3.4.1
+Names</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2566554" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The text of an author or editor field represents a list of
+names. The bibliography style determines the format in which the
+name is printed: whether the first name or last name appears first,
+if the full first name or just the first initial is used, etc. The
+bibliography file entry simply tells BibTeX what the name is.</p>
+<p>You should type an author's complete name and let the
+bibliography style decide what to abbreviate. (But an author's
+complete name may be "Donald~E. Knuth" or even "J.~P.~Morgan"; you
+should type it the way the author would like it to appear, if
+that's known.)</p>
+<p>Most names can be entered in the obvious way, either with or
+without a comma, as in the following examples:</p>
+<p>"John Paul Jones" "Jones, John Paul" "Ludwig von Beethoven" "von
+Beethoven, Ludwig"</p>
+<p>Some people have multiple last names - for example, Per Brinch
+Hansen's last name is Brinch~Hansen. His name should be typed with
+a comma:</p>
+<p>"Brinch Hansen, Per"</p>
+<p>To understand why, you must understand how BibTeX handles names
+(for what follows, a "name" corresponds to a person).</p>
+<p>Each name consists of four parts: First, von, Last, and~Jr; each
+part consists of a (possibly empty) list of name-tokens. For
+example the First part of Per Brinch~Hansen's name has the single
+token "Per"; the Last part has two, "Brinch" and "Hansen"; and the
+von and Jr parts are empty. If you had typed</p>
+<p>"Per Brinch Hansen"</p>
+<p>instead, BibTeX would erroneously think "Brinch" were a
+First-part token, just as "Paul" is a First-part token in
+"John~Paul Jones".</p>
+<p>Here's another example:</p>
+<p>"Charles Louis Xavier Joseph de la Vallee Poussin"</p>
+<p>This name has four tokens in the First part, two in the von, and
+two in the Last. Here BibTeX knows where one part ends and the
+other begins because the tokens in the von part begin with
+lower-case letters.</p>
+<p>If you want BibTeX to consider something a single token, enclose
+it in braces. You should do this, for example, if a comma is part
+of a name:</p>
+<p>"{Barnes and Noble, Inc.}" "{Barnes and} {Noble, Inc.}"
+"{Barnes} {and} {Noble,} {Inc.}"</p>
+<p>The braces surrounding the comma keep "Inc." from being
+interpreted as a First token; this name has only a Last part, with
+either one, two, or four tokens (there must be a space separating
+the tokens in the second and third forms). Probably the second form
+is slightly more meaningful, but don't lose sleep over this since
+only rarely will an institution be an author or editor.</p>
+<p>So the two names</p>
+<p>"von Beethoven, Ludwig" "{von Beethoven}, Ludwig"</p>
+<p>are considered by BibTeX to be different names. In the first,
+"Beethoven" is the Last part and "von" is the von part; in the
+second, which in this case happens to be incorrect, the Last part
+has a single token and there's no von part. The bibliography style
+will probably print both the same, but it may alphabetize and label
+them differently.</p>
+<p>"Juniors" pose a special problem. Most people having "Jr." in
+their name precede it with a comma. Such a name should be entered
+as follows:</p>
+<p>"Ford, Jr., Henry"</p>
+<p>However, a few people do not use a comma. They are handled by
+considering the "Jr." to be part of the last Last token:</p>
+<p>"{Steele Jr.}, Guy L." "Guy L. {Steele Jr.}"</p>
+<p>This name has no Jr part.</p>
+<p>To summarize, you may type a name in one of three forms:</p>
+<p>"First von Last" "von Last, First" "von Last, Jr, First"</p>
+<p>You may almost always use the first form; you shouldn't if
+either there's a Jr part or the Last part has multiple tokens but
+there's no von part.</p>
+<p>If there are multiple authors or editors, their names must be
+separated by the word "and", surrounded by spaces, not enclosed in
+braces:</p>
+<p>AUTHOR = "Ralph Alpher and Bethe, Hans and George Gamow"</p>
+<p>Since BibTeX interprets commas as separating parts of a name and
+"and" as separating names themselves, this example has three
+coauthors: Ralph Alpher, Hans Bethe, and George Gamow. If the word
+"and" appears as part of a name, it must be enclosed in braces, as
+in the example of "Barnes and Noble,~Inc." given above. If you have
+too many names to list in a field, you can end the list with "and
+others"; the standard styles appropriately append an "et al."</p>
+<p>BibTeX's rules are actually a bit more complicated than
+indicated here, but this description will suffice for most
+names.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-text-titles"></a>3.4.2
+Titles</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2566787" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The bibliography style determines whether or not a title is
+capitalized; the titles of books usually are, the title of articles
+usually are not. You type a title the way it should appear if it is
+capitalized (you should capitalize everything but articles and
+unstressed conjunctions and prepositions, and even these should be
+capitalized as the first word or the first after a colon):</p>
+<p>TITLE = "The Agony and the Ecstasy"</p>
+<p>BibTeX will change uppercase letters to lowercase if
+appropriate. Uppercase letters that should not be changed are
+enclosed in braces. The following two titles are equivalent; the
+"A" of "Africa" will not be made lowercase.</p>
+<p>"The Gnats and Gnus of {Africa}" "The Gnats and Gnus of
+{A}frica"</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-text-abbr"></a>3.4.3
+Abbreviations</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2566843" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Instead of an ordinary text string, the text of a field can be
+replaced by an abbreviation for it. An abbreviation is a string of
+characters that starts with a letter and does not contain a space
+or any of the following ten characters:</p>
+<p><tt class="literal">" # % ' ( ) , = { }</tt></p>
+<p>The abbreviation is typed in place of the text field, with no
+braces or quotation marks. If 'jgg1' is an abbreviation for</p>
+<p>Journal of Gnats and Gnus, Series~1</p>
+<p>then the following are equivalent:</p>
+<p>JOURNAL = jgg1 JOURNAL = "Journal of Gnats and Gnus,
+Series~1"</p>
+<p>Some abbreviations are predefined by the bibliography style.
+These always include the usual 3 letter abbreviations for the
+month: jan, feb, mar etc.</p>
+<p>Bibliography styles usually contain abbreviations for the names
+of commonly referenced journals. Consult the Local Guide for a list
+of the predefined abbreviations for the bibliography styles
+available.</p>
+<p>You can define your own abbreviations by using BibTeX's
+<tt class="literal">@STRING</tt> command.</p></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types"></a>3.5 Field
+Types</h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2566930" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Below is a list of all fields recognized by the standard
+bibliography styles. An entry can also contain other fields, which
+are ignored by those styles.</p>
+<p>BibTeX ignores the case of letters in the field names.</p>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-address"></a>3.5.1
+address field</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2566969" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Publisher's address. For major publishing houses, just the city
+is given. For small publishers, you can help the reader by giving
+the complete address.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+ADDRESS = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-annote"></a>3.5.2
+annote field</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2567012" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>An annotation, used only for annotated bibliography styles
+(which are not among the standard ones).</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+ANNOTE = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-author"></a>3.5.3
+author field</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2567054" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The name(s) of the author(s).</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+AUTHOR = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-booktitle"></a>3.5.4
+booktitle field</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2567096" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Title of a book, part of which is being cited.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+BOOKTITLE = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-chapter"></a>3.5.5
+chapter field</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2567138" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>A chapter number.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+CHAPTER = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-edition"></a>3.5.6
+edition field</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2567178" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The edition of a book - for example, "second".</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+EDITION = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-editor"></a>3.5.7
+editor field</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2567220" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Name(s) of editor(s). If there is also an "author" field, then
+the "editor" field gives the editor of the book or collection in
+which the reference appears.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+EDITOR = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-howpublished"></a>3.5.8
+howpublished field</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2567263" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>How something strange has been published.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+HOWPUBLISHED = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-institution"></a>3.5.9
+institution field</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2567304" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The institution that published the work.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+INSTITUTION = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-journal"></a>3.5.10
+journal field</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2567346" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>A journal name. Abbreviations are provided for many journals;
+see the Local Guide.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+JOURNAL = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-key"></a>3.5.11 key
+field</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2567388" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Used for alphabetizing and creating a label when the "author"
+and "editor" fields are missing. This field should not be confused
+with the citation key that appears in the
+<tt class="literal">\cite</tt> command and at the beginning of the
+entry.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+KEY = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-month"></a>3.5.12 month
+field</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2567438" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The month in which the work was published or, for an unpublished
+work, in which it was written.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+MONTH = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-note"></a>3.5.13 note
+field</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2567480" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Any additional information that can help the reader.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+NOTE = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-number"></a>3.5.14
+number field</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2567521" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The number of a journal, magazine, or technical report. An issue
+of a journal or magazine is usually identified by its volume and
+number; the organization that issues a technical report usually
+gives it a number.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+NUMBER = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="bibtex-field-types-organization"></a>3.5.15 organization
+field</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2567565" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The organization sponsoring a conference.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+ORGANIZATION = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-pages"></a>3.5.16 pages
+field</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2567607" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>A page number or range of numbers such as "42--111"; you may
+also have several of these, separating them with commas:
+"7,41,73--97". The standard styles convert a single dash to a
+double. &gt;</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+PAGES = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-publisher"></a>3.5.17
+publisher field</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2567654" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The publisher's name.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+PUBLISHER = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-school"></a>3.5.18
+school field</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2567695" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The name of the school where a thesis was written.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+SCHOOL = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-series"></a>3.5.19
+series field</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2567737" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The name of a series or set of books. When citing an entire
+book, the the "title" field gives its title and an optional
+"series" field gives the name of a series in which the book is
+published.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+SERIES = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-title"></a>3.5.20 title
+field</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2567781" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The work's title.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+TITLE = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-type"></a>3.5.21 type
+field</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2567821" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The type of a technical report - for example, "Research
+Note".</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+TYPE = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-volume"></a>3.5.22
+volume field</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2567862" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The volume of a journal or multivolume book work.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+VOLUME = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-year"></a>3.5.23 year
+field</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2567903" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The year of publication or, for an unpublished work, the year it
+was written. This field's text should contain only numerals.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+YEAR = field_text
+</pre></div></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
+<a id="bibtex-bst-files"></a>4 bst files</h2></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2567947" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Bibliography style files define the style of a bibliography
+source list.</p>
+<p>The standard bibliography style files are
+<a href="#bibtex-bst-plain"
+title="4.3 PLAIN.BST"><tt class="filename">PLAIN</tt></a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-bst-unsrt"
+title="4.5 UNSRT.BST"><tt class="filename">UNSRT</tt></a>,
+<a href="#bibtex-bst-alpha"
+title="4.2 ALPHA.BST"><tt class="filename">ALPHA</tt></a> and
+<a href="#bibtex-bst-abbr"
+title="4.1 ABBRV.BST"><tt class="filename">ABBRV</tt></a>.</p>
+<p>If you want to make a bibliography style of your own, look at
+<a href="#bibtex-bst-sample"
+title="4.4 SAMPLE.BST"><tt class="filename">SAMPLE.BST</tt></a>.</p>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="bibtex-bst-abbr"></a>4.1
+<tt class="filename">ABBRV.BST</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2568057" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>This style is the same as the style defined in
+<tt class="filename">PLAIN.BST</tt>, except that entries are more
+compact because first names, month names and journal names are
+abbreviated.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="bibtex-bst-alpha"></a>4.2
+<tt class="filename">ALPHA.BST</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2568101" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>This style is the same as the style defined in
+<tt class="filename">PLAIN.BST</tt> except that entry labels like
+"Knu66", formed from the author's name and the year of publication,
+are used.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="bibtex-bst-plain"></a>4.3
+<tt class="filename">PLAIN.BST</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2568146" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>This style is formatted more or less as suggested by Mary-Claire
+van Leunen in "A Handbook for Scholars" (Alfred A. Knopf, New York,
+1979). Entries are sorted alphabetically and are labelled with
+numbers.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="bibtex-bst-sample"></a>4.4
+<tt class="filename">SAMPLE.BST</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2568185" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>This is a sample bibliography style file meant to help you
+construct a new style. It creates a bibliography in which entries
+appear as follows:</p>
+<p>[Jones79] Jones, R. L. and Richards, P. Q. The Birds and the
+Bees. {\it Journal of Irreproducible Results 4}, 2 (Jan. 1979),
+27-33.</p>
+<p>[Jones82a] Jones, P. G. The Bees and the Trees ... (1982).</p>
+<p>[Jones82b] Jones, R. L. The Trees and the Peas ... (1982).</p>
+<p>[Krist74] Kristofferson, R. P. Peopl and Places ... (1974)</p>
+<p>It should illustrate how you write a style file. The functions
+are described in an informal Pascal-like style in comments. Because
+of the way while loops and if-then-else statements must use
+functions, the following convention is used. If a while loop is
+labeled 'foo' in the informal description, then its test and body
+are the functions named 'foo.test' and 'foo.body'. If an if
+statement is labeled 'foo', then its two clauses are the functions
+named 'foo.then' and 'foo.else'. (Null clauses just use the 'skip$'
+function.) Note that because functions have to be defined in terms
+of already-defined functions, the actual function definitions are
+given in a 'bottom-up' order.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="bibtex-bst-unsrt"></a>4.5
+<tt class="filename">UNSRT.BST</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2568257" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>This style is that same as <tt class="filename">PLAIN.BST</tt>
+except that entries appear in the order of their first
+citation.</p></div></div></div>
+<div class="chapter" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title">
+<a id="makeindex"></a>Chapter&nbsp;6.&nbsp;Make-Index</h2></div></div></div>
+<div class="toc">
+<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-options">1
+Options</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-c">1.1
+<tt class="filename">-c</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-g">1.2
+<tt class="filename">-g</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-i">1.3
+<tt class="filename">-i</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-l">1.4
+<tt class="filename">-l</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-q">1.5
+<tt class="filename">-q</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-r">1.6
+<tt class="filename">-r</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-s-sty">1.7
+<tt class="filename">-s sty</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-o-ind">1.8
+<tt class="filename">-o ind</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-t-log">1.9
+<tt class="filename">-t log</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-p-no">1.10
+<tt class="filename">-p no</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-L">1.11
+<tt class="filename">-L</tt></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-T">1.12
+<tt class="filename">-T</tt></a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-style-file">2 Style
+File</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-style">2.1 Input
+Style Specifiers</a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-output-style-specs">2.2
+Output Style Specifiers</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-example">3
+Example</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-ordering">4
+Ordering</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-special-effects">5
+Special Effects</a></span></dt></dl></div>
+<a id="id2568311" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
+<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
+<p>The contents of this section was taken from the HTML helppages
+for Make-Index of Norman Walsh (Version 1.0, 12 Apr 94).</p>
+<p>Some obvious errors in this documentation have been corrected
+according to <tt class="filename">makeindex(1L)</tt>.</p>
+<p>Additional information was taken from
+<tt class="filename">makeindex(1L)</tt> and the program source
+files as found in teTeX 2.0.2.</p></div>
+<p>Make-Index is a general purpose index processor. It takes one or
+more raw index files (normally generated by a formatter), sorts the
+entries, and produces the actual index file. It is not dependent on
+any particular format of raw index file, although the
+<tt class="literal">.idx</tt> file generated by LaTeX is the
+default. Up to three levels (0, 1, and 2) of subitem nesting within
+the same entry is supported. The input format may be redefined in a
+style file so that raw index or glossary output from other
+formatters may be processed. The style file also defines the style
+of output index file. Unless specified otherwise, the file name
+base of the first input file (<tt class="literal">idx0</tt>) is
+used to determine other related input/output files. The default
+input file type is <tt class="literal">.idx</tt>.</p>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
+<a id="makeindex-options"></a>1 Options</h2></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2568409" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Make-Index is a Unix program, and therefore has a Unix-style
+command line. Instead of qualifiers delimited with a slash
+(<tt class="literal">/</tt>), Make-Index options are delimited with
+a hyphen (<tt class="literal">-</tt>).</p>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-option-c"></a>1.1
+<tt class="filename">-c</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2568460" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Enable blank compression. By default every blank counts in the
+index key. The <tt class="literal">-c</tt> option ignores leading
+and trailing blanks and tabs and compresses intermediate ones to a
+single space.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-option-g"></a>1.2
+<tt class="filename">-g</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2568504" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Employ German word ordering in the index, in accord with rules
+set forth in DIN 5007. The quote character must be redefined in a
+style file (for example, redefine quote as
+<tt class="literal">'+'</tt>). If the quote character is not
+redefined, Make-Index will produce an error message and
+abort.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-option-i"></a>1.3
+<tt class="filename">-i</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2568553" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Use <tt class="literal">stdin</tt> as the input file. When this
+option is specified and the <tt class="literal">-o</tt> is not,
+output is written to <tt class="literal">stdout</tt>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-option-l"></a>1.4
+<tt class="filename">-l</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2568607" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Use letter ordering. Default is word ordering (explained in the
+<a href="#makeindex-ordering" title="4 Ordering">Ordering</a>
+section).</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-option-q"></a>1.5
+<tt class="filename">-q</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2568652" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Quiet mode, send no messages to <tt class="literal">stderr</tt>.
+By default progress and error messages are sent to
+<tt class="literal">stderr</tt> as well as the transcript file. The
+<tt class="literal">-q</tt> option disables the
+<tt class="literal">stderr</tt> messages.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-option-r"></a>1.6
+<tt class="filename">-r</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2568712" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Disable implicit page range formation. By default three or more
+successive pages will be automatically abbreviated as a range (e.g.
+1--5). The <tt class="literal">-r</tt> option disables it, making
+the explicit range operators the only way to create page ranges
+(see the <a href="#makeindex-special-effects"
+title="5 Special Effects">Special Effects</a> section
+below).</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-option-s-sty"></a>1.7
+<tt class="filename">-s sty</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2568768" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Take <tt class="literal">sty</tt> as the style file. There is no
+default for the style file name. The environment variable
+INDEXSTYLE defines the path where the style file should be
+found.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-option-o-ind"></a>1.8
+<tt class="filename">-o ind</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2568813" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Take <tt class="literal">ind</tt> as the output index file. By
+default the file name base of the first input file
+<tt class="literal">idx0</tt> concatenated with the extension
+<tt class="literal">.ind</tt> is used as the output file
+name.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-option-t-log"></a>1.9
+<tt class="filename">-t log</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2568869" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Take <tt class="literal">log</tt> as the transcript file. By
+default the file name base of the first input file
+<tt class="literal">idx0</tt> concatenated with the extension
+<tt class="literal">.ilg</tt> is used as the transcript file
+name.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-option-p-no"></a>1.10
+<tt class="filename">-p no</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2568925" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Set the starting page number of the output index file to be
+<tt class="literal">no</tt>. This is useful when the index file is
+to be formatted separately. Other than pure numbers, three special
+cases are allowed for no: <tt class="literal">any</tt>,
+<tt class="literal">odd</tt>, and <tt class="literal">even</tt>. In
+these special cases, the starting page number is determined by
+retrieving the last page number from the source log file. The
+source log file name is determined by concatenating the file name
+base of the first raw index file (<tt class="literal">idx0</tt>)
+with the extension <tt class="literal">.log</tt>. The last source
+page is obtained by searching backward in the log file for the
+first instance of a number included in
+<tt class="literal">[...]</tt>. If a page number is missing or the
+log file is not found, no attempt will be made to set the starting
+page number. The meaning of each of these cases follows:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term">any</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The starting page is the last source page number plus
+1.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">odd</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The starting page is the first odd page following the last
+source page number.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">even</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The starting page is the first even page following the last
+source page number.</p></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-option-L"></a>1.11
+<tt class="filename">-L</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2569061" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Sort based on locale settings. String comparisons for sorting
+are done using <span><b class="command">strcoll(3)</b></span>,
+which compares strings according to the current locale category
+<tt class="literal">LC_COLLATE</tt>.</p>
+<p>Not available on all systems (depends on compile time
+settings).</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-option-T"></a>1.12
+<tt class="filename">-T</tt></h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2569115" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Special support for Thai documents.</p>
+<p>Not available on all systems (depends on compile time
+settings).</p></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
+<a id="makeindex-style-file"></a>2 Style
+File</h2></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2569152" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The style file format is very simple. It is a list of
+<tt class="literal">&lt;specifier, attribute&gt;</tt> pairs. There
+are two types of specifiers (input and output). The pairs don't
+have to obey any particular order in the file. A line lead by
+`<tt class="literal">%</tt>' is a comment. The following is a list
+of all the specifiers and their respective arguments where
+<tt class="literal">&lt;string&gt;</tt> is an arbitrary string
+delimited by double quotes (<tt class="literal">"..."</tt>),
+<tt class="literal">&lt;char&gt;</tt> is a single letter embraced
+by single quotes (<tt class="literal">'...'</tt>), and
+<tt class="literal">&lt;number&gt;</tt> is a nonnegative integer.
+The maximum length of a <tt class="literal">&lt;string&gt;</tt> is
+144. Notice that a backslash must be escaped (by an extra
+backslash) in the string quotation. Anything not specified in the
+style file will be assigned a default value, which is shown on a
+separate line. This file can reside anywhere in the path defined by
+the environment variable <tt class="envar">INDEXSTYLE</tt>.</p>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-style"></a>2.1 Input Style
+Specifiers</h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2569242" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-actual-char"></a>2.1.1 actual
+&lt;char&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2569266" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">@</tt></p>
+<p>The symbol which indicates that the next entry is to appear in
+the actual index file.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-arg-close"></a>2.1.2 arg_close
+&lt;char&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2569306" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">}</tt></p>
+<p>This is the closing delimiter for the index entry
+argument.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-style-arg-open"></a>2.1.3
+arg_open &lt;char&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2569350" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">{</tt></p>
+<p>This is the opening delimiter for the index entry
+argument.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-encap-char"></a>2.1.4 encap
+&lt;char&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2569390" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">|</tt></p>
+<p>The symbol which indicates that the rest of the argument list is
+to be used as the encapsulating command for the page
+number.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-escape-char"></a>2.1.5 escape
+&lt;char&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2569430" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">\\</tt></p>
+<p>The symbol which escapes the next letter, unless its preceding
+letter is escape. In other words, quote is used to escape the
+letter which immediately follows it. But if it is preceded by
+escape, it does not escape anything.</p>
+<p>Notice that the two symbols must be distinct.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-style-string"></a>2.1.6 keyword
+&lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2569478" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">"\\indexentry"</tt></p>
+<p>This is the command which tells Make-Index that its argument is
+an index entry.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-level-char"></a>2.1.7 level
+&lt;char&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2569521" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">!</tt></p>
+<p>The delimiter which denotes a new level of subitem.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-quote-char"></a>2.1.8 quote
+&lt;char&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2569561" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">"</tt></p>
+<p><tt class="literal">quote</tt> is used to escape the letter
+which immediately follows it, but if it is preceded by escape, it
+is treated as a ordinary character. These two symbols must be
+distinct.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-range-close"></a>2.1.9
+range_close &lt;char&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2569608" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">)</tt></p>
+<p>The closing delimiter indicating the end of an explicit page
+range.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-range-open"></a>2.1.10
+range_open &lt;char&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2569648" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">(</tt></p>
+<p>The opening delimiter indicating the beginning of an explicit
+page range.</p></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-style-specs"></a>2.2
+Output Style Specifiers</h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2569690" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-page-compositor"></a>2.2.1
+page_compositor &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2569713" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">"-"</tt></p>
+<p>This specifier is used to separate a range of page numbers.</p>
+<p>Officially undocumented!</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="makeindex-output-preamble-string"></a>2.2.2 preamble
+&lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2569758" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">"\\begin{theindex}\n"</tt></p>
+<p>The preamble of actual index file.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="makeindex-output-postamble-string"></a>2.2.3 postamble
+&lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2569798" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">"\n\n\\end{theindex}\n"</tt></p>
+<p>The postamble of actual index file.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-setpage-prefix"></a>2.2.4
+setpage_prefix &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2569838" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">"\n \\setcounter{page}{"</tt></p>
+<p>The prefix of the command which sets the starting page
+number.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-setpage-suffix"></a>2.2.5
+setpage_suffix &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2569880" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">"}\n"</tt></p>
+<p>The suffix of the command which sets the starting page
+number.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-group-skip"></a>2.2.6
+group_skip &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2569921" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">"\n\n \\indexspace\n"</tt></p>
+<p>The vertical space to be inserted before a new group
+begins.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="makeindex-output-heading-prefix-string"></a>2.2.7
+heading_prefix &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2569960" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">""</tt></p>
+<p>The header prefix to be inserted before a new letter
+begins.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="makeindex-output-heading-suffix-string"></a>2.2.8
+heading_suffix &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2570000" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">""</tt></p>
+<p>The header suffix to be inserted before a new letter
+begins.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-headings-flag"></a>2.2.9
+headings_flag &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2570041" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">0</tt></p>
+<p>The flag indicating the condition of inserting new letter
+header. Default is 0, which means no header. Positive means insert
+an uppercase letter between prefix and suffix. Negative means
+insert a lowercase letter.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="makeindex-output-symhead-positive"></a>2.2.10
+symhead_positive &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2570084" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">"Symbols"</tt></p>
+<p>Heading for symbols to be inserted if
+<tt class="literal">headings_flag</tt> is positive.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="makeindex-output-symhead-negative"></a>2.2.11
+symhead_negative &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2570131" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">"symbols"</tt></p>
+<p>Heading for symbols to be inserted if
+<tt class="literal">headings_flag</tt> is negative.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="makeindex-output-numhead-positive"></a>2.2.12
+numhead_positive &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2570178" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">"Numbers"</tt></p>
+<p>Heading for numbers to be inserted if
+<tt class="literal">headings_flag</tt> is positive.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="makeindex-output-numhead-negative"></a>2.2.13
+numhead_negative &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2570224" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">"numbers"</tt></p>
+<p>Heading for numbers to be inserted if
+<tt class="literal">headings_flag</tt> is negative.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-item-0"></a>2.2.14 item_0
+&lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2570271" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">"\n \\item "</tt></p>
+<p>The command to be inserted between two primary (level 0)
+items.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-item-1"></a>2.2.15 item_1
+&lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2570312" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">"\n \\subitem "</tt></p>
+<p>The command to be inserted between two secondary (level 1)
+items.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-item-2"></a>2.2.16 item_2
+&lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2570352" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">"\n \\subsubitem "</tt></p>
+<p>The command to be inserted between two level 2 items.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-item-01"></a>2.2.17
+item_01 &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2570392" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">"\n \\subitem "</tt></p>
+<p>The command to be inserted between a level 0 item and a level 1
+item.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-item-x1"></a>2.2.18
+item_x1 &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2570432" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">"\n \\subitem "</tt></p>
+<p>The command to be inserted between a level 0 item and a level 1
+item. The difference between this and previous is that in this case
+the level 0 item doesn't have any page numbers.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-item-12"></a>2.2.19
+item_12 &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2570474" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">"\n \\subsubitem "</tt></p>
+<p>The command to be inserted between a level 1 item and a level 2
+item.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-item-x2"></a>2.2.20
+item_x2 &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2570515" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">"\n \\subsubitem "</tt></p>
+<p>The command to be inserted between a level 1 item and a level 2
+item. The difference between this and previous is that in this case
+the level 1 item doesn't have any page numbers.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-delim-0"></a>2.2.21
+delim_0 &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2570557" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">", "</tt></p>
+<p>The delimiter to be inserted between a level 0 key and its first
+page number. Default is a comma followed by a blank.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-delim-1"></a>2.2.22
+delim_1 &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2570598" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">", "</tt></p>
+<p>The delimiter to be inserted between a level 1 key and its first
+page number. Default is a comma followed by a blank.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-delim-2"></a>2.2.23
+delim_2 &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2570640" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">", "</tt></p>
+<p>The delimiter to be inserted between a level 2 key and its first
+page number. Default is a comma followed by a blank.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-delim-n"></a>2.2.24
+delim_n &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2570681" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">", "</tt></p>
+<p>The delimiter to be inserted between two page numbers for the
+same key in any level. Default is a comma followed by a
+blank.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-delim-r"></a>2.2.25
+delim_r &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2570722" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">"--"</tt></p>
+<p>The delimiter to be inserted between the starting and ending
+page numbers of a range.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-delim-t"></a>2.2.26
+delim_t &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2570762" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">""</tt></p>
+<p>The delimiter to be inserted at the end of a page list. This
+delimiter has no effect on entries which have no associated page
+list.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-encap-prefix"></a>2.2.27
+encap_prefix &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2570803" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">"\\"</tt></p>
+<p>The prefix for the command which encapsulates the page
+number.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-encap-infox"></a>2.2.28
+encap_infix &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2570844" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">"{"</tt></p>
+<p>The prefix for the command which encapsulates the page
+number.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-encap-suffix"></a>2.2.29
+encap_suffix &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2570885" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">"}"</tt></p>
+<p>The suffix for the command which encapsulates the page
+number.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-line-max"></a>2.2.30
+line_max &lt;number&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2570925" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">72</tt></p>
+<p>The maximum length of a line in the output beyond which a line
+wraps around.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-indent-space"></a>2.2.31
+indent_space &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2570965" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">"\t\t"</tt></p>
+<p>The space to be inserted in front of a wrapped line. Default is
+two tabs.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-indent-length"></a>2.2.32
+indent_length &lt;number&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2571006" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">16</tt></p>
+<p>The length of indent_space. In the default case this is 16 (for
+2 tabs).</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-suffix-2p"></a>2.2.33
+suffix_2p &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2571047" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">""</tt></p>
+<p>Delimiter to replace the range delimiter and the second page
+number of a two page list. When present, it overrides
+<tt class="literal">delim_r</tt>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-suffix-3p"></a>2.2.34
+suffix_3p &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2571094" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">""</tt></p>
+<p>Delimiter to replace the range delimiter and the second page
+number of a three page list. When present, it overrides
+<tt class="literal">delim_r</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">suffix_mp</tt>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-suffix-mp"></a>2.2.35
+suffix_mp &lt;string&gt;</h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2571147" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Default: <tt class="literal">""</tt></p>
+<p>Delimiter to replace the range delimiter and the second page
+number of a multiple page list (three or more pages). When present,
+it overrides
+<tt class="literal">delim_r</tt>.</p></div></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
+<a id="makeindex-example"></a>3 Example</h2></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2571196" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The following example shows a style file called
+<tt class="literal">book.isty</tt> which defines a stand-alone
+index for a book. By stand-alone, we mean it can be formatted
+independent of the main source.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+preamble
+"\\documentstyle[12pt]{book}
+\\begin{document}
+\\begin{theindex}
+{\\small\n"
+
+postamble
+"\n\n}
+\\end{theindex}
+\\end{document}\n"
+</pre>
+<p>Suppose a particular book style requires the index (as well as
+any chapters) to start from an odd page number. Given
+<tt class="literal">foo.idx</tt> as the raw index file, the
+following command line produces an index in file
+<tt class="literal">foo-.ind</tt>.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+makeindex -s book.isty -o foo-.ind -p odd foo
+</pre>
+<p>The reason to use a non-default output file name is to avoid
+clobbering the source output (presumably
+<tt class="literal">foo.dvi</tt>) because if the index is in file
+<tt class="literal">foo.ind</tt>, its output will also be in
+<tt class="literal">foo.dvi</tt> as a result of separate formatting
+using . In the example the index is in
+<tt class="literal">foo-.ind</tt>, its output will be in
+<tt class="literal">foo-.dvi</tt> and thus introduces no
+confusion.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
+<a id="makeindex-ordering"></a>4 Ordering</h2></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2571306" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>By default <tt class="literal">makeindex</tt> assumes word
+ordering. The <tt class="literal">-l</tt> option turns it into
+letter ordering. The only difference is whether a blank is treated
+as an effective letter or not. In word ordering, a blank precedes
+any letter in the alphabet, whereas in letter ordering, it doesn't
+count at all. This is best illustrated by the following
+example:</p>
+<div class="informaltable">
+<table border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="left" /></colgroup>
+<thead>
+<tr>
+<th align="left"><span class="emphasis"><em>word
+order</em></span></th>
+<th align="left"><span class="emphasis"><em>letter
+order</em></span></th></tr></thead>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">sea lion</td>
+<td align="left">seal</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">seal</td>
+<td align="left">seal lion</td></tr></tbody></table></div>
+<p>Numbers are sorted in numeric order. For instance,</p>
+<div class="informaltable">
+<table border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">9 (nine), 123</td></tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">123 10 (ten), see Derek,
+Bo</td></tr></tbody></table></div>
+<p>Letters are first sorted with uppercase and lowercase considered
+identical; then, within identical words the uppercase letter
+precedes its lowercase counterpart.</p>
+<p>Patterns lead by a special symbol precede numbers, which precede
+patterns lead by a letter. The symbol here refers to anything not
+in the union of digits and English alphabet. This includes those
+which follow 'z' in the ASCII chart. As a special case, anything
+started with a digit but mixed with non-digits is considered a
+symbol-leading pattern instead of a number.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
+<a id="makeindex-special-effects"></a>5 Special
+Effects</h2></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2571484" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>In the normal case entries such as</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\indexentry{alpha}{1}
+\indexentry{alpha!beta}{3}
+\indexentry{alpha!beta!gamma}{10}
+</pre>
+<p>in the raw index file will be converted to</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\item alpha, 1
+ \subitem beta, 3
+ \subsubitem gamma, 10
+</pre>
+<p>in the output index file by Make-Index. Notice that the level
+symbol (<tt class="literal">!</tt>) is used to delimit levels of
+nesting.</p>
+<p>It is possible to make an item appear in a designated form by
+using the actual (<tt class="literal">@</tt>) operator. For
+instance,</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\indexentry{alpha@{\it alpha\/}}{1}
+</pre>
+<p>will become</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\item {\it alpha\/} 1
+</pre>
+<p>after the conversion. The idea is that the pattern preceding
+<tt class="literal">@</tt> is used as sort key, whereas the one
+following it is put in the actual result. However, the same key
+with and without the actual part are regarded as distinct
+entries.</p>
+<p>It is also possible to encapsulate a page number with a
+designated command using the encap (<tt class="literal">|</tt>)
+operator. For example, in the default case,</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\indexentry{alpha|bold}{1}
+</pre>
+<p>will be converted to</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\item alpha \bold{1}
+</pre>
+<p>where <tt class="literal">\bold{n}</tt> will expand to
+<tt class="literal">{\bf n}</tt>. This allows the encap operator to
+be used to set pages in different fonts, thereby conveying more
+information about whatever being indexed. For instance, given the
+same key the page where its definition appears can be in one font
+while where its primary example is given can be in another, with
+other ordinary appearances in a third. Notice that in this example,
+the three output attributes associated with page encapsulation
+<tt class="literal">encap_prefix</tt>,
+<tt class="literal">encap_infix</tt>, and
+<tt class="literal">encap_suffix</tt> correspond respectively to
+backslash, left brace, and right brace. If this is to be formatted
+by languages other than , they would be defined differently.</p>
+<p>By the same token, the <tt class="literal">encap</tt> operator
+can be used to make cross references in the index. For
+instance,</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\indexentry{alpha|see{beta}}{1}
+</pre>
+<p>will become</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\item alpha \see{beta}{1}
+</pre>
+<p>in the output index file after the conversion, where</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\see{beta}{1}
+</pre>
+<p>will expand to</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{\it see\/} beta
+</pre>
+<p>Notice that in a cross reference like this the page number
+disappears. Therefore, where to insert such a command in the source
+is immaterial.</p>
+<p>A pair of encap concatenated with
+<tt class="literal">range_open</tt> (<tt class="literal">|(</tt>)
+and with <tt class="literal">range_close</tt>
+(<tt class="literal">|)</tt>) creates an explicit page range. That
+is,</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\indexentry{alpha|(}{1}
+\indexentry{alpha|)}{5}
+</pre>
+<p>will become</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\item alpha, 1--5
+</pre>
+<p>Intermediate pages indexed by the same key will be merged into
+the range implicitly. This is especially useful when an entire
+section about a particular subject is to be indexed, in which case
+only the range opening and closing operators need to be inserted at
+the beginning and end of the section, respectively.</p>
+<p>This explicit page range formation can also include an extra
+command to set the page range in a designated font. Thus</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\indexentry{alpha|(bold}{1}
+\indexentry{alpha|)}{5}
+</pre>
+<p>will become</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\item alpha, \bold{1--5}
+</pre>
+<p>A couple of special cases are worth mentioning here. First,
+entries like</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\indexentry{alpha|(}{1}
+\indexentry{alpha|bold}{3}
+\indexentry{alpha|)}{5}
+</pre>
+<p>will be interpreted as</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\item alpha, \bold{3}, 1--5
+</pre>
+<p>but with a warning message in the transcript about the encounter
+of an inconsistent page encapsulator. Secondly, an explicit range
+beginning in a Roman page number and ending in Arabic is considered
+an error. In a case like this the range is broken into two
+subranges, if possible, one in Roman, the other in Arabic. For
+instance,</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\indexentry{alpha|(}{i}
+\indexentry{alpha}{iv}
+\indexentry{alpha}{3}
+\indexentry{alpha|)}{7}
+</pre>
+<p>will be turned into</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\item alpha, 1--iv, 3--7
+</pre>
+<p>with a warning message in the transcript complaining about the
+illegal range formation.</p>
+<p>Finally, every special symbol mentioned in this section may be
+escaped by the quote operator (<tt class="literal">"</tt>).
+Thus</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\indexentry{alpha"@beta}{1}
+</pre>
+<p>will actually become</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\item alpha@beta, 1
+</pre>
+<p>as a result of executing Make-Index. However, if quote is
+preceded by escape (<tt class="literal">\</tt>), its following
+letter is not escaped. That is,</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\indexentry{f\"ur}{1}
+</pre>
+<p>means</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\item f\"ur, 1
+</pre>
+<p>which represents umlaut accented <tt class="literal">u</tt> to
+the family of processors.</p></div></div>
+<div class="chapter" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title">
+<a id="xindy"></a>Chapter&nbsp;7.&nbsp;xindy</h2></div></div></div>
+<div class="toc">
+<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#xindy-command-list">1 Command
+List</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#xindy-command-list-processing">1.1
+Processing Commands</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#xindy-command-list-markup">1.2
+Markup Commands</a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="section"><a href="#xindy-command-list-raw-index">1.3
+Raw Index Interface</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#xindy-invoking">2 Invoking
+xindy</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#xindy-invoking-cmdline">2.1
+Command Line Options</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#xindy-search-path">2.2 Search
+Path</a></span></dt></dl></dd></dl></div>
+<a id="id2571856" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
+<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
+<p>The content of this section was taken from the original
+documentation of xindy V2.1
+(<tt class="filename">Doc/manual*.html</tt>).</p></div>
+<p><span class="emphasis"><em>xindy</em></span> means
+fle<span class="emphasis"><em>x</em></span>ible
+<span class="emphasis"><em>ind</em></span>exing
+s<span class="emphasis"><em>y</em></span>stem. It is an indexing
+system that can be used to generate book-like indexes for arbitrary
+document preparation systems. This term includes systems such as
+TeX and LaTeX, the Nroff-family or SGML-based systems (e.g. HTML)
+that process some kind of text and generate indexing information.
+It is not fixed to any specific system, but can be configured for a
+wide variety of purposes.</p>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
+<a id="xindy-command-list"></a>1 Command
+List</h2></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2571920" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>Here is the complete list of xindy's commands that may be used
+in the index style. The symbol <tt class="literal">name</tt> always
+refers to a string. We separate the commands into the processing
+and markup commands. The commands are listed in alphabetical
+order.</p>
+<p>The parenthesis <tt class="literal">[</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">]</tt> denote optional parts of the syntax and
+<tt class="literal">{</tt> and <tt class="literal">}</tt> denote
+the grouping of elements. A vertical bar indicates alternatives.
+However, the enclosing round braces
+<span class="emphasis"><em>are</em></span> part of the syntax and
+must be supplied.</p>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="xindy-command-list-processing"></a>1.1
+Processing Commands</h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2571990" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="xindy-command-list-processing-define-alphabet"></a>1.1.1
+<tt class="literal">define-alphabet</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2572018" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-alphabet name string-list)
+</pre>
+<p>Defines <tt class="literal">name</tt> to be the alphabet
+consisting of all elements of the
+<tt class="literal">string-list</tt>. Examples:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-alphabet "example-alphabet" ("An" "Example" "Alphabet"))
+</pre>
+<p>defines an alphabet consisting of exactly three symbols. For the
+successor relationship holds:
+<tt class="literal">succ("An")="Example"</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">succ("Example")="Alphabet"</tt>. The built-in
+alphabet <tt class="literal">digits</tt> is defined as follows:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-alphabet "digits"
+ ("0" "1" "2" "3" "4" "5" "6" "7" "8" "9"))
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="xindy-command-list-processing-define-attributes"></a>1.1.2
+<tt class="literal">define-attributes</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2572110" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-attributes attribute-list)
+</pre>
+<p>Defines all attributes the raw index may contain. Parameter
+<tt class="literal">attribute-list</tt> is a list of list of
+strings. The nesting level must not be more than 2. So
+<tt class="literal">(..(..)..)</tt> is allowed, whereas
+<tt class="literal">(..(..(..)..)..)</tt> is not.</p>
+<p>The list has two kinds of elements: strings and list of strings.
+A single string is treated as if it were a single element list. So
+the lists <tt class="literal">("definition")</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">( ("definition") )</tt> are equivalent. All
+elements forming a list are a so-called
+<span class="emphasis"><em>attribute group</em></span>. The members
+of a group are written to the output file before any member of the
+following groups are written.</p>
+<p>Examples of valid attributes lists are:</p>
+<p><tt class="literal">("definition" "usage")</tt> defines two
+attribute groups. The first one contains all references with the
+attribute <tt class="literal">definition</tt> and the second one
+all with the attribute <tt class="literal">usage</tt>.</p>
+<p><tt class="literal">(("definition" "important") "usage")</tt>
+defines two attribute groups. The first one contains all references
+with the attributes <tt class="literal">definition</tt> or
+<tt class="literal">important</tt> and the second one all with the
+attribute <tt class="literal">usage</tt>. In the attribute group
+<tt class="literal">("definition" "important")</tt> the attribute
+<tt class="literal">definition</tt> overrides
+<tt class="literal">important</tt>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="xindy-command-list-processing-define-crossref-class"></a>1.1.3
+<tt class="literal">define-crossref-class</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2572272" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-crossref-class name [:unverified])
+</pre>
+<p>Defines <tt class="literal">name</tt> to be a class of cross
+references. We distinguish two types of cross reference classes.
+<span class="emphasis"><em>Verified</em></span> cross reference
+classes can be checked for dangling references. If for instance a
+cross reference points to the non-existent keyword `foo' a warning
+is issued and the user is advised to correct the invalid cross
+reference. This is the default. If for some reasons this mechanism
+must be deactivated the switch <tt class="literal">:unverified</tt>
+can be used to suppress this behaviour.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="xindy-command-list-processing-define-letter-group"></a>1.1.4
+<tt class="literal">define-letter-group</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2572338" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-letter-group name [:before lgname] [:after lgname]
+ [:prefixes list-of-prefixes])
+</pre>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-letter-groups list-of-letter-groups)
+</pre>
+<p>This command defines a letter group with name
+<tt class="literal">name</tt>, which must be a string value,
+grouping all index entries that have a
+<span class="emphasis"><em>sort key</em></span> beginning with the
+prefix <tt class="literal">name</tt>. The command</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-letter-group "a")
+</pre>
+<p>is equivalent to the command</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-letter-group "a" :prefixes ("a"))
+</pre>
+<p>Using the latter form one can associate more than one prefix
+with a given letter group. Also further prefixes can be added to an
+already existing letter group by simply defining the same letter
+group again. This results not in a redefinition but in adding more
+prefixes to the currently defined prefixes.</p>
+<p>Example:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-letter-group "a")
+</pre>
+<p>defines a letter group containing all index entries beginning
+with the string <tt class="literal">"a"</tt>.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-letter-group "c" :after "a")
+</pre>
+<p>defines a letter group containing all index entries beginning
+with the string <tt class="literal">"c"</tt>. The letter group
+appears behind the letter group <tt class="literal">"a"</tt></p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-letter-group "b" :after "a" :before "c")
+</pre>
+<p>inserts letter group <tt class="literal">"b"</tt> between letter
+group <tt class="literal">"a"</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">"c"</tt>. This allows incremental definition of
+letter groups by extending already defined ones.</p>
+<p>The arguments <tt class="literal">:after</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">:before</tt> define a partial order on the
+letter groups. xindy tries to convert this partial order into a
+total one. If this is impossible due to circular definitions, an
+error is reported. If more than one possible total ordering can
+result, it is left open which one is used, so one should always
+define a complete total order.</p>
+<p>The command <tt class="literal">define-letter-groups</tt> (with
+an `s' at the end) is simply an abbreviation for a sequence of
+<tt class="literal">define-letter-group</tt> definitions where the
+elements are ordered in the ordering given by the list.
+Example:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-letter-groups ("a" "b" "c")
+</pre>
+<p>equals the definitions</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-letter-group "a")
+(define-letter-group "b" :after "a")
+(define-letter-group "c" :after "b")
+</pre>
+<p>See also commands
+<tt class="literal">markup-letter-group-list</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">markup-letter-group</tt> for further
+information.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="xindy-command-list-processing-define-location-class"></a>1.1.5
+<tt class="literal">define-location-class</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2572569" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-location-class name layer-list
+ [:min-range-length num]
+ [:hierdepth depth]
+ [:var])
+</pre>
+<p>Defines <tt class="literal">name</tt> to be a location class
+consisting of the given list of layers. A list of layers consists
+of names of basetypes and/or strings representing separators.
+Separators must follow the keyword argument
+<tt class="literal">:sep</tt>. If the keyword
+<tt class="literal">:min-range-length</tt> is specified we define
+the <span class="emphasis"><em>minimum range length</em></span> to
+be used when building ranges. The argument
+<tt class="literal">num</tt> must be a positive integer number or
+the keyword <tt class="literal">none</tt> in which case the
+building of ranges is disallowed. If the switch
+<tt class="literal">:var</tt> is specified the declared class is of
+type <span class="emphasis"><em>variable</em></span>, i.e. it is a
+<span class="emphasis"><em>var-location-class</em></span>. Since
+building of ranges is currently only allowed for standard classes
+<tt class="literal">:var</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">:min-range-length</tt> must not be used
+together. The keyword argument <tt class="literal">:hierdepth</tt>
+can be used to declare that the location references have to be
+tagged in a hierarchical form. Its argument
+<tt class="literal">depth</tt> must be an integer number indicating
+the number of layers the hierarchy does contain. See command
+<tt class="literal">markup-locref-list</tt> for more information.
+Examples:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-location-class "page-numbers" ("arabic-numbers")
+ :minimum-range-length 3)
+</pre>
+<p>Defines the location class <tt class="literal">page-numbers</tt>
+consisting of one layer which is the alphabet
+<tt class="literal">arabic-numbers</tt>. Since the minimum range
+length is set to 3 the location references 2, 3 and 4 don't form a
+range because the range length is only 2. But the references 6, 7,
+8, and 9 are enough to form a range. Some example instances of this
+class are <tt class="literal">0, 1, ... 2313</tt>, etc.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-location-class "sections" :var
+ ("arabic-numbers" :sep "."
+ "arabic-numbers" :sep "."
+ "arabic-numbers"))
+</pre>
+<p>defines a variable location class. Valid instances are
+<tt class="literal">1, 1.1, 1.2, 2, 2.4.5</tt>, but none of
+<tt class="literal">2-3</tt> (wrong separator),
+<tt class="literal">1.2.3.4</tt> (more than 3 layers),
+<tt class="literal">2.3.iv</tt> (roman number instead of arabic
+one).</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="xindy-command-list-processing-define-location-class-order"></a>1.1.6
+<tt class="literal">define-location-class-order</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2572772" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-location-class-order list)
+</pre>
+<p>Defines the order in which the location classes are written to
+the output file. The parameter <tt class="literal">list</tt> is a
+list of names of location classes. Examples:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-location-class-order
+ ("page-numbers" "sections" "xrefs"))
+</pre>
+<p>tells the system that the page numbers should appear before the
+section numbers and that the cross references should appear at the
+end. If this command is omitted, the declaration order of the
+location classes in the index style is implicitly used as the
+output order. In the case that a location class does not appear in
+the list, the output may behave unexpectedly, so one should always
+enumerate all used location classes when using this
+command.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="xindy-command-list-processing-define-rule-set"></a>1.1.7
+<tt class="literal">define-rule-set</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2572847" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-rule-set name
+ [ :inherit-from ("rule-set" "rule-set-2") ]
+ :rules (&lt;rule&gt;...) )
+</pre>
+<p>A complete specification of a multi-phase sorting process for a
+language requires that some rules have to appear in several
+subsequent sorting phases. Rule sets can be used to define a set of
+rules that can be instantiated in an arbitrary sorting phase.
+Basically, they offer means to separate the definition of sorting
+rules from their instantiation, hence, acting as a wrapper for
+calls to <tt class="literal">sort-rule</tt>. They do not add new
+functionality that is not already present with
+<tt class="literal">sort-rule</tt>.</p>
+<p>A rule can be of the form:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+&lt;rule&gt; ::= ("pattern" "replacement"
+ [:string|:bregexp|:egegexp] [:again])
+</pre>
+<p>The following incomplete example defines a new rule set of name
+<tt class="literal">isolatin1-tolower</tt> that inherits
+definitions from rule set <tt class="literal">latin-tolower</tt>,
+overriding or adding the sort rules in the list of
+<tt class="literal">:rules</tt>.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-rule-set "isolatin1-tolower"
+
+ :inherit-from ("latin-tolower")
+
+ :rules (("?" "?" :string :again)
+ ("?" "?" :string :again)
+ ("?" "?" :string :again)
+ ("?" "?" :string :again)
+ ("?" "?" :string :again)
+ ("?" "?" :string :again)
+ ("?" "?" :string :again)
+ ...
+ )
+...)
+</pre>
+<p>Rule sets can be instantiated with the command
+<tt class="literal">use-rule-set</tt>. For further descriptions on
+the sorting model refer to the command
+<tt class="literal">sort-rule</tt>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="xindy-command-list-processing-define-sort-rule-orientations">
+</a>1.1.8
+<tt class="literal">define-sort-rule-orientations</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2572976" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-sort-rule-orientations (orientations...))
+</pre>
+<p>Defines the order for the different sorting phases. The
+currently implemented
+<span class="emphasis"><em>orientations</em></span> are
+<tt class="literal">forward</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">backward</tt>. This command must precede all
+<tt class="literal">sort-rule</tt> commands in an index style. It
+defines the orientations and implicitly sets the maximum number of
+sorting phases performed.</p>
+<p>For further descriptions on the sorting model refer to the
+command <tt class="literal">sort-rule</tt>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="xindy-command-list-processing-merge-rule"></a>1.1.9
+<tt class="literal">merge-rule</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2573057" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(merge-rule pattern replacement [:again]
+ [:bregexp | :eregexp | :string])
+</pre>
+<p>Defines a keyword mapping rule that can be used to generate the
+<span class="emphasis"><em>merge key</em></span> from the
+<span class="emphasis"><em>main key</em></span> of an index entry.
+This mapping is necessary to map all keywords that are differently
+written but belong to the same keyword to the same canonical
+keyword.</p>
+<p>The parameter <tt class="literal">pattern</tt> can be a
+POSIX-compliant regular expression or an ordinary string. The
+implementation uses the GNU Rx regular expression library which
+implements the POSIX regular expressions. Regular expressions (REs)
+can be specified as <span class="emphasis"><em>basic regular
+expressions</em></span> (BREs) or
+<span class="emphasis"><em>extended regular expressions</em></span>
+(EREs). You can use the switch <tt class="literal">:bregexp</tt> to
+force the interpretation of the pattern as a BRE, or
+<tt class="literal">:eregexp</tt> to interpret it as an ERE. If you
+want xindy to interpret the pattern literally, use the switch
+<tt class="literal">:string</tt>. If none of these switches is
+selected, xindy uses an auto-detection mechanism to decide, if the
+pattern is a regular expression or not. If it recognizes the
+pattern as a RE, it interprets it as an ERE by default.</p>
+<p>The parameter <tt class="literal">replacement</tt> must be a
+string possibly containing the special characters
+<tt class="literal">&amp;</tt> (substitutes for the complete match)
+and <tt class="literal">\1 ,..., \9</tt> (substituting for the
+<span class="emphasis"><em>n</em></span>-th submatch. Examples:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(merge-rule "A" "a")
+</pre>
+<p>replaces each occurrence of the uppercase letter
+<tt class="literal">`A'</tt> with its lowercase counterpart.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(merge-rule "\~"([AEOUaeou])" "\1")
+</pre>
+<p>transforms the TeX umlaut-letters into their stripped
+counterparts, such that <tt class="literal">`\"A '</tt> is treated
+as an <tt class="literal">`A'</tt> afterwards.</p>
+<p>The following sequences have a special meaning:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">` ~n '</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>End of line symbol
+(<span class="emphasis"><em>linefeed</em></span>).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">` ~b '</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The ISO-Latin character with the lowest ordinal number.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">` ~e '</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The ISO-Latin character with the highest ordinal
+number.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">` ~~ '</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The tilde character.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">` ~" '</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The double quote character.</p></dd></dl></div>
+<p>Tilde characters and double quotes have to be quoted themselves
+with a tilde character. The special characters
+<tt class="literal">` ~b '</tt> and <tt class="literal">` ~e '</tt>
+allow the definition of arbitrary sorting orders by rules. In
+connection with an additional character every position in the
+alphabet can be described. E.g. <tt class="literal">` m~e '</tt> is
+lexicographically placed between <tt class="literal">`m'</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">`n'</tt>.</p>
+<p>Due to efficiency, rules that just exchange characters or
+substitute constant character sequences are not treated as regular
+expressions. Therefore, instead of using the rule</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(merge-rule "[A-Z]" "&amp;")
+</pre>
+<p>it is more efficient (though less comfortable) to use</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(merge-rule "A" "Ax")
+(merge-rule "B" "Bx")
+...
+(merge-rule "Z" "Zx")
+</pre>
+<p>Usually rules are applied in order of their definition. Rules
+with a special prefix precede those that begin with a class of
+characters, so that the search pattern
+<tt class="literal">`alpha'</tt> is checked before
+<tt class="literal">`.*'</tt>, but <tt class="literal">`auto'</tt>
+and <tt class="literal">`a.*'</tt> are checked in order of their
+definition.</p>
+<p>The first rule from a style file that matches the input is
+applied and the process restarts behind the substituted text. If no
+rule could be applied, the actual character is copied from the
+input and the process continues with the next character.</p>
+<p>Sometimes it is necessary to apply rules anew to the result of a
+transformation. By specifying the keyword argument
+<tt class="literal">:again</tt> in the merge rule the rule is
+marked as mutable, which means that after using this rule the
+transformation process shall restart at the same place. E.g. the
+rule</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(merge-rule "\$(.*)\$" "\1" :again)
+</pre>
+<p>deletes <span class="emphasis"><em>all</em></span> surrounding
+<tt class="literal">`$ '</tt> symbols from the input.</p>
+<p>See also command <tt class="literal">sort-rule</tt>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="xindy-command-list-processing-merge-to"></a>1.1.10
+<tt class="literal">merge-to</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2573462" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(merge-to attr-from attr-to [:drop])
+</pre>
+<p>A merge rule says that the attribute
+<tt class="literal">attr-from</tt> can be used to build ranges in
+<tt class="literal">attr-to</tt>. Both attributes must name valid
+attribute names. The switch <tt class="literal">:drop</tt>
+indicates, that the original location reference with attribute
+<tt class="literal">attr-from</tt> has to be dropped (removed), if
+a successful range was built with location references in attribute
+<tt class="literal">attr-to</tt>. A detailed description is given
+in the section about processing phases.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="xindy-command-list-processing-require"></a>1.1.11
+<tt class="literal">require</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2573541" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(require filename)
+</pre>
+<p>This command allows to load more index style modules. The module
+is searched in the directories defined in the search path. The file
+is read in and processing of the current file continues. The
+argument <tt class="literal">filename</tt> must be a string. This
+allows to decompose the index style into several modules that can
+be included into the topmost index style file. Example:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(require "french/alphabet.xdy")
+(require "french/sort-rules.xdy")
+(require "tex/locations.xdy")
+(require "tex/markup.xdy")
+</pre>
+<p>Submodules can load other submodules as well. If a file is
+required that was already loaded, the
+<tt class="literal">require</tt> command is simply ignored and
+processing continues without including this file twice. See also
+command searchpath.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="xindy-command-list-processing-searchpath"></a>1.1.12
+<tt class="literal">searchpath</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2573612" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(searchpath {path-string | path-list})
+</pre>
+<p>This command adds the given paths to the list of paths, xindy
+searches for index style files. The argument
+<tt class="literal">path-string</tt> must be a colon-separated
+string of directory names. If this path ends with a colon the
+default search path is added to the end of the path list.
+Example:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(searchpath ".:/usr/local/lib/xindy:/usr/local/lib/xindy/english:")
+</pre>
+<p>adds the specified directories to the search path. Since the
+last path ends with a colon, the built-in search path is added at
+the end. Specifying</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(searchpath ("."
+ "/usr/local/lib/xindy"
+ "/usr/local/lib/xindy/english"
+ :default))
+</pre>
+<p>yields exactly the same result as the example above. Here
+<tt class="literal">path-list</tt> must be a list of strings and/or
+the keyword(s) <tt class="literal">:default</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">:last</tt>. The keyword
+<tt class="literal">:default</tt> signifies that the default
+pathnames are to be inserted at the specified position in the list.
+The keyword <tt class="literal">:last</tt> allows to insert the
+currently active paths at the indicated position. Since this allows
+to insert the built-in paths at any position and incrementally
+adding new paths to the search path, this version of the command
+ist more flexible than the first version.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="xindy-command-list-processing-sort-rule"></a>1.1.13
+<tt class="literal">sort-rule</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2573722" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(sort-rule pattern replacement [:run level] [:again])
+</pre>
+<p>Defines a keyword mapping rule that can be used to generate the
+<span class="emphasis"><em>sort key</em></span> of an index entry
+from the <span class="emphasis"><em>merge key</em></span>. This key
+is used to sort the index entries lexicographically after they have
+been merged using the merge key.</p>
+<p>The argument <tt class="literal">:run</tt> indicates that this
+rule is only in effect a the specified
+<span class="emphasis"><em>level</em></span> (default is level 0).
+For a detailed discussion on the definition of sort rules for
+different layers refer to the documentation about the new sorting
+scheme (<tt class="literal">new-sort-rules</tt>) that comes with
+this distribution.</p>
+<p>See command <tt class="literal">merge-rule</tt> for more
+information about keyword rules.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title">
+<a id="xindy-command-list-processing-use-rule-set"></a>1.1.14
+<tt class="literal">use-rule-set</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2573810" class="indexterm"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(use-rule-set [:run phase]
+ [:rule-set ( &lt;rule-set&gt;... ))
+</pre>
+<p>This command instantiates the gives rule sets to be in effect at
+sorting phase <tt class="literal">phase</tt>. The order of the rule
+sets given with argument <tt class="literal">:rule-set</tt> is
+significant. Rule set entries of rule set appearing at the
+beginning of the list override entries in rule sets at the end of
+the list.</p>
+<p>The following example declares that in phase 0 the rule sets
+<tt class="literal">din5007</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">isolatin1-tolower</tt> should be active,
+whereas in phase 2 the other rule sets have to be applied.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(use-rule-set :run 0
+ :rule-set ("din5007" "isolatin1-tolower"))
+
+(use-rule-set :run 1
+ :rule-set ("resolve-umlauts"
+ "resolve-sharp-s"
+ "isolatin1-tolower"
+ ))
+</pre>
+<p>For a discussion on rule sets refer to command
+<tt class="literal">define-rule-set</tt>.</p></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="xindy-command-list-markup"></a>1.2 Markup
+Commands</h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2573907" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The following commands can be used to define the markup of the
+index. They don't have any influence on the indexing process. Since
+the markup scheme is characterized by the concept of
+<span class="emphasis"><em>environments</em></span>, the syntax and
+naming scheme of all commands follows a simple structure.</p>
+<p>The commands can be separated into
+<span class="emphasis"><em>environment</em></span> and
+<span class="emphasis"><em>list-environment</em></span> commands.
+All commands of the first group support the keyword arguments
+<tt class="literal">:open</tt> and <tt class="literal">:close</tt>,
+whereas the second group additionally supports the keyword argument
+<tt class="literal">:sep</tt>. If one of these keyword arguments is
+missing, the default markup tag is always the empty tag. The
+<tt class="literal">:open</tt> tag is always printed before the
+object itself and the <tt class="literal">:close</tt> tag is always
+printed after the object has been printed. If a list is printed the
+<tt class="literal">:sep</tt> tag is printed between two elements
+of the list but not before the first element, or after the last
+one. All commands dealing with a list have the suffix
+<tt class="literal">`-list'</tt> as part of their command name.</p>
+<p>Since the number of commands and the heavy usage of
+<span class="emphasis"><em>default</em></span> and
+<span class="emphasis"><em>specialized</em></span> tags makes the
+markup somehow complex (but very powerful) we have added a
+mechanism to trace the markup tags xindy omits during its markup
+phase with the command <tt class="literal">markup-trace</tt>.</p>
+<p>Here follows the list of markup commands in alphabetical order
+with some of the commands grouped together.</p>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="id2574023"></a>1.2.1
+<tt class="literal">markup-attribute-group-list</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-attribute-group-list [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:sep string])
+
+(markup-attribute-group [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:group group-num])
+</pre>
+<p>Location class groups consist of lists of attribute groups. The
+markup of this list can be defined with the command
+<tt class="literal">markup-attribute-group-list</tt>.</p>
+<p>To allow different markup for different attribute groups the
+command <tt class="literal">markup-attribute-group</tt> can be
+specialized on the group number with the keyword argument
+<tt class="literal">:group</tt> which must be an integer number.
+E.g., given are the groups <tt class="literal">("definition"
+"theorem")</tt> and <tt class="literal">("default")</tt> with group
+numbers 0 and 1, then</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-attribute-group :open "&lt;group0&gt;" :close &lt;/group0&gt;"
+ :group 0)
+
+(markup-attribute-group :open "&lt;group1&gt;" :close "&lt;/group1&gt;"
+ :group 1)
+</pre>
+<p>can be used to assign different markup for both groups in a
+SGML-based language.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="id2574100"></a>1.2.2
+<tt class="literal">markup-crossref-list</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-crossref-list [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:sep string]
+ [:class crossref-class])
+
+(markup-crossref-layer-list [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:sep string]
+ [:class crossref-class])
+
+(markup-crossref-layer [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:class crossref-class])
+</pre>
+<p>A crossref class group contains cross references of the same
+class. The separator between the classes is defined with the
+<tt class="literal">(markup-locclass-list :sep)</tt>-parameter. A
+list of cross references can be tagged with the
+<tt class="literal">command markup-crossref-list</tt> that
+specializes on the <tt class="literal">:class</tt> argument.</p>
+<p>Each cross reference is determined by a list of layers
+indicating the target of the cross reference. To define a suitable
+markup for such a list the <tt class="literal">command
+markup-crossref-layer-list</tt> can be used.</p>
+<p>Each layer of a cross reference can be assigned two tags that
+specialize on the class of the reference, like all other
+commands.</p>
+<p>A suitable markup for a cross reference class
+<tt class="literal">see</tt> within LaTeX2e could look like
+that:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-crossref-list :class "see" :open "\emph{see} "
+ :sep "; ")
+(markup-crossref-layer-list :class "see" :sep ",")
+(markup-crossref-layer :class "see"
+ :open "\textbf{" :close "}")
+</pre>
+<p>An example output could look like <tt class="literal">... see
+house; garden,winter; greenhouse</tt></p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="id2574200"></a>1.2.3
+<tt class="literal">markup-index</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-index [:open string] [:close string]
+ [ :flat | :tree | :hierdepth depth ])
+</pre>
+<p>Defines the markup tags that enclose the whole index via the
+<tt class="literal">:open</tt> and <tt class="literal">:close</tt>
+parameters. Examples:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-index :open "Here comes the index~n"
+ :close "That's all folks!~n")
+</pre>
+<p>defines that the <tt class="literal">:open</tt> string is
+printed before the rest of the index and the
+<tt class="literal">:close</tt> string appears after the index is
+printed.</p>
+<p>Additionally one can specify the form of the generated index. It
+is possible to produce flat indexes by specifying the switch
+<tt class="literal">:flat</tt>, to generate a tree with the
+<tt class="literal">:tree</tt> switch or any kind of mixture
+between both by specifying the depth up to which trees shall be
+built with the parameter <tt class="literal">:hierdepth</tt>. Its
+argument depth is the number of layers that can be formed into a
+tree. Therefore <tt class="literal">:flat</tt> is an abbrevation of
+<tt class="literal">:hierdepth 0</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">:tree</tt> is an abbrevation of
+<tt class="literal">:hierdepth max-depth</tt>, with
+<tt class="literal">max-depth</tt> being the maximum number of
+layers a keyword has. An example: the keywords</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+("tree" "binary" "AVL")
+("tree" "binary" "natural")
+</pre>
+<p>can be transformed in the following ways:</p>
+<p>A flat index (<tt class="literal">:flat</tt> or
+<tt class="literal">:hierdepth 0</tt>)</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+tree binary AVL
+tree binary natural
+</pre>
+<p>with <tt class="literal">:hierdepth 1</tt></p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+tree
+ binary AVL
+ binary natural
+</pre>
+<p>and a tree (<tt class="literal">:tree</tt> or
+<tt class="literal">:hierdepth &gt; 1</tt>)</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+tree
+ binary
+ AVL
+ natural
+</pre>
+<p>Most often one will create tree-like indexes or ones that are
+flat.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="id2574381"></a>1.2.4
+<tt class="literal">markup-indexentry-list</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-indexentry-list [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:sep string] [:depth integer])
+
+(markup-indexentry [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:depth integer])
+</pre>
+<p>Letter groups consists of a list of index entries. The command
+<tt class="literal">markup-indexentry-list</tt> defines the markup
+of these lists. The markup can be specialized on the depth if the
+index is hierarchically organized. The command</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-indexentry-list :open "\begin{IdxentList}"
+ :close "\end{IdxentList}"
+ :sep "~n")
+</pre>
+<p>defines that the index entries of all layers are wrapped into
+the given markup tags. If additionally</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-indexentry-list :open "\begin{IdxentListII}"
+ :close "\end{IdxentListII}"
+ :sep "~n"
+ :depth 2)
+</pre>
+<p>is defined, all index entry lists of all layers (except layer 2)
+are tagged according to the first specification, and the index
+entry list within depth 2 are tagged according to the second
+rule.</p>
+<p>The command <tt class="literal">markup-indexentry</tt> defines
+the markup of an index entry at a given depth. Since index entries
+may also contain subentries and the markup for subentries may be
+different in different layers, the optional keyword argument
+<tt class="literal">:depth</tt> can be used to assign different
+markup for different layers. If depth is ommited the default markup
+for all possible depths is defined. The top-most index entries have
+depth 0.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-indexentry :open "\begin{Indexentry}"
+ :close "\end{Indexentry}")
+</pre>
+<p>defines that the index entries of all layers are wrapped into
+the given markup tags. If additionally</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-indexentry :open "\begin{IndexentryII}"
+ :close "\end{IndexentryII}"
+ :depth 2)
+</pre>
+<p>is defined, all index entries of all layers (except layer 2) are
+tagged according to the first specification, and the index entries
+with depth 2 are tagged according to the second rule.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="id2574484"></a>1.2.5
+<tt class="literal">markup-keyword-list</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-keyword-list [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:sep string] [:depth integer])
+
+(markup-keyword [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:depth integer])
+</pre>
+<p>The print key of an index entry consists of a list of strings.
+The markup of this list can be defined with the command
+<tt class="literal">markup-keyword-list</tt>. The keyword argument
+<tt class="literal">:depth</tt> may be specified to define the
+markup of the list at a particular depth.</p>
+<p>The keyword of an index entry consists of a list of strings.
+Each of these components is tagged with the strings defined with
+the command <tt class="literal">markup-keyword</tt>. Since we maybe
+need different markup for different layers, the optional keyword
+argument can be used to specialize this markup for some
+depth.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="id2574539"></a>1.2.6
+<tt class="literal">markup-letter-group-list</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-letter-group-list [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:sep string])
+
+(markup-letter-group [:open string] [:close string] [:group group-name]
+ [:open-head string] [:close-head string]
+ [:upcase | :downcase | :capitalize])
+</pre>
+<p>The first command defines the markup of the letter group with
+name <tt class="literal">group-name</tt>. Since the markup of
+letter groups often contains the name of the letter group as a part
+of it, the other keyword arguments allow an additional markup for
+this group name. If one of the parameters
+<tt class="literal">:open-head</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">:close-head</tt> is specified additional markup
+is added as can be described as follows:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+&lt;OPEN&gt;
+ IF (:open-head OR :close-head)
+ &lt;OPEN-HEAD&gt;
+ transformer-of(&lt;GROUP-NAME&gt;)
+ &lt;CLOSE-HEAD&gt;
+ FI
+ &lt;INDEXENTRIES...&gt;
+&lt;CLOSE&gt;
+</pre>
+<p>Here, <tt class="literal">transformer-of</tt> is a function that
+possibly transforms the string representing the group name into
+another string. The transformers we currently support can be
+specified with the switches <tt class="literal">:upcase</tt>,
+<tt class="literal">:downcase</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">:capitalize</tt> which result in the
+corresponding string conversions. If none of them is specified no
+transformation is done at all.</p>
+<p>The command <tt class="literal">markup-letter-group</tt> defines
+the markup of the list of letter groups.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="id2574639"></a>1.2.7
+<tt class="literal">markup-locclass-list</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-locclass-list [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:sep string])
+</pre>
+<p>Each index entry contains a list of location class groups. This
+markup command can be used to define the markup of this
+list.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="id2574664"></a>1.2.8
+<tt class="literal">markup-locref</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-locref [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:class locref-class]
+ [:attr attribute]
+ [:depth integer])
+</pre>
+<p>The markup tags of a location reference can be specialized on
+the three arguments <tt class="literal">:class</tt>,
+<tt class="literal">:attr</tt> and additionally, if sub-references
+are used, <tt class="literal">:depth</tt>. Most often one will only
+use a tag depending on the attribute. For example, all location
+references with the attribute <tt class="literal">definition</tt>
+should appear in a font series like bold, emphasizing the
+importance of this location reference; those with the attribute
+<tt class="literal">default</tt> in font shape italic. The markup
+in this case would not specialize on the depth or any particular
+class. A valid definition, suitable for a usage within HTML, could
+look like this.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-locref :open "&lt;B&gt;" :close "&lt;/B&gt;" :attr "definition")
+(markup-locref :open "&lt;I&gt;" :close "&lt;/I&gt;" :attr "default")
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="id2574736"></a>1.2.9
+<tt class="literal">markup-locref-class</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-locref-class [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:class locref-class])
+</pre>
+<p>All location references of a particular location reference class
+can be wrapped into the tags defined by this command. It
+specializes on the keyword argument
+<tt class="literal">:class</tt>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="id2574768"></a>1.2.10
+<tt class="literal">markup-locref-layer</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-locref-layer [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:depth integer] [:layer integer]
+ [:class locref-class])
+
+(markup-locref-layer-list [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:sep string]
+ [:depth integer]
+ [:class locref-class])
+</pre>
+<p>A location reference contains a list of location reference
+layers. The second markup command can be used to markup this list.
+It specializes on the class of the location references and the
+depth (if sub-references are used).</p>
+<p>The first command allows to tag the elements of a layer list
+differently. The first element of this list can is specialisable
+with <tt class="literal">:layer 0</tt>, the next element with
+<tt class="literal">:layer 1</tt>, etc. See the next example for an
+example.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="id2574818"></a>1.2.11
+<tt class="literal">markup-locref-list</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-locref-list [:open string] [:close string] [:sep string]
+ [:depth integer] [:class locref-class])
+</pre>
+<p>An attribute group contains a list of location references and/or
+ranges. Additionally a layered location reference itself may
+contain sub-references that are stored as a list of location
+references. We specialize the markup for these lists on the
+location class they belong to with the keyword argument
+<tt class="literal">:class</tt>, and on
+<tt class="literal">:depth</tt> that specializes on the different
+subentry levels when using location references with
+sub-references.</p>
+<p>Given is a list of location references that have the class
+description</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-location-class "Appendix"
+ ("ALPHA" :sep "-" "arabic-numbers")
+ :hierdepth 2)
+</pre>
+<p>This location class has instances like
+<tt class="literal">A-1</tt>, <tt class="literal">B-5</tt>, etc.
+The keyword argument <tt class="literal">:hierdepth 2</tt> informs
+xindy to markup these location references in a hierarchical form.
+With the commands</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-locref-list :sep "; "
+ :depth 0 :class "Appendix")
+(markup-locref-list :open " " :sep ","
+ :depth 1 :class "Appendix")
+(markup-locref-layer :open "{\bf " :close "}" :layer 0
+ :depth 0 :class "Appendix")
+</pre>
+<p>we obtain a markup sequence for some example data that could
+look like</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+ \bf A} 1,2,5; {\bf B} 5,6,9; {\bf D} 1,5,8; ...
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="id2574916"></a>1.2.12
+<tt class="literal">markup-range</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-range [:open string] [:close string] [:sep string]
+ [:class locref-class]
+ [:length num] [:ignore-end])
+</pre>
+<p>A range consists of two location references. Markup can be
+specified with the <tt class="literal">:open</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">:close</tt> arguments and one separator given
+by the argument <tt class="literal">:sep</tt>.</p>
+<p>Since both location references are tagged with markup defined by
+the command <tt class="literal">markup-locref</tt> a specialization
+on attributes or depth is not necessary. Specialization is allowed
+on the class they belong to, because the separator between two
+location refences may be different for each location class.
+Argument <tt class="literal">:length</tt> can be used to define
+different markup for different lengths. In conjunction with
+<tt class="literal">:length</tt> is may be useful not to print the
+second location reference at all. For example, one wishes to markup
+ranges of length 1 in the form Xf. instead of X--Y. This can be
+accomplished with the switch
+<tt class="literal">:ignore-end</tt>.</p>
+<p>The markup tags for a range (X,Y) can be described as
+follows:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+&lt;OPEN&gt;
+ Markup of location reference X
+&lt;SEP&gt;
+ IF (not :ignore-end)
+ Markup of location reference Y
+ FI
+&lt;CLOSE&gt;
+</pre>
+<p>The following tags can be used to define a range of page numbers
+(given in a location class <tt class="literal">page-numbers</tt>)
+without considering the open and close parameters:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-range :sep "-" :class "page-numbers")
+</pre>
+<p>Location ranges then appear separated by a hyphen in a form like
+this:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+ ..., 5-8, 19-23, ...
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="id2575040"></a>1.2.13
+<tt class="literal">(markup-trace [:on] [:open string] [:close
+string])</tt></h4></div></div></div>
+<p>This command can be used to activate the tracing of all markup
+commands xindy executes. The switch <tt class="literal">:on</tt>
+activates the trace. If <tt class="literal">:on</tt> is omitted,
+the command line flag <tt class="literal">-t</tt> can be used as
+well. All tags which are emitted but not yet defined explicitly by
+the user are tagged with a symbolic notation indicating the
+commands that must be used to define this tag. The defaults for the
+keyword argument <tt class="literal">:open</tt> is
+<tt class="literal">`&lt;'</tt> and for
+<tt class="literal">:close</tt> is <tt class="literal">`&gt;'</tt>.
+The beginning of an example output could look like:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+&lt;INDEX:OPEN&gt;
+ &lt;LETTER-GROUP-LIST:OPEN&gt;
+ &lt;LETTER-GROUP:OPEN ["a"]&gt;
+ &lt;INDEXENTRY-LIST:OPEN [0]&gt;
+ &lt;INDEXENTRY:OPEN [0]&gt;
+ &lt;KEYWORD-LIST:OPEN [0]&gt;
+ &lt;KEYWORD:OPEN [0]&gt;
+ ...
+</pre>
+<p>We use a simple indentation scheme to make the structure of the
+tags visible. The symbolic tag
+<tt class="literal">&lt;LETTER-GROUP:OPEN ["a"]&gt;</tt> for
+example indicates that the tag that can be specified with the
+command</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-letter-group :open "XXX" :group "a" ... )
+</pre>
+<p>is emitted at this point in the markup process. By incrementally
+adding markup commands to the index, more and more tags can be
+defined until the whole markup is defined. This general mechanism
+should allow everyone understand the markup process. The best is to
+start with a small index, define the complete markup and afterwards
+process the whole index. Additionally one can enclose the symbolic
+tags into an environment that is neutral to the document
+preparation system, such as a comment. For TeX this could be</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-trace :open "%%" :close "~n")
+</pre>
+<p>or a definition in the TeX document like</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\def\ignore#1{}
+</pre>
+<p>combined with the command</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-trace :open "\ignore{" :close "}")
+</pre></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="xindy-command-list-raw-index"></a>1.3 Raw
+Index Interface</h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2575175" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>This section can be skipped if the reader is not interested in
+adapting xindy to a new document preparation system.</p>
+<p>The raw index is the file that represents the index that is to
+be processed. Since many different document preparation systems may
+use different forms of index representations, their output must be
+transformed in a form readable by xindy. We also could have written
+an configurable parser performing this task, but usually a tool
+written with some text processing tools such as
+<span><b class="command">perl</b></span>,
+<span><b class="command">sed</b></span> or
+<span><b class="command">awk</b></span> can achieve the same task
+as well. Therefore, adapting xindy to a completely different system
+can mostly be done by writing an appropriate raw index filter.</p>
+<p>The format of the raw index interface of xindy is defined as
+follows:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(indexentry { :key string-list [:print string-list]
+ | :tkey list-of-layers }
+ [:attr string]
+ { :locref string [:open-range | :close-range]
+ | :xref string-list } )
+</pre>
+<p>The pseudo variable
+<span class="emphasis"><em>string</em></span> is a sequence of
+characters surrounded by double quotes, e.g.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+"Hi, it's me" "one" "a string with two \"double quotes\""
+</pre>
+<p>are three examples of valid strings. If you need to include a
+double quote as a literal character, you must quote it itself with
+a backslash as shown in the third example. A
+<span class="emphasis"><em>string list</em></span> is simply a list
+of strings separated by whitespaces and surrounded by round braces.
+An example of a string list is</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+("This" "is" "a" "list" "of" "strings")
+</pre>
+<p>So far about the syntax. The semantics of the different elements
+are described here.</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">:key</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The argument <span class="emphasis"><em>string list</em></span>
+defines the keyword of the index entry. It must be a list of
+strings, since the keyword may consist of different layers such as
+<tt class="literal">("heap" "fibonacci")</tt>.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">:print</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The optional <span class="emphasis"><em>print key</em></span>
+defines the way the keyword has to be printed in the markup
+phase.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">:tkey</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Another possibility to define the keys of an index entry is with
+the <tt class="literal">:tkey</tt> keyword argument. It can be used
+instead of the <tt class="literal">:key</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">:print</tt> arguments. Instead of specifying
+separately the key and the corresponding print key, we define the
+keyword by its layers. Each layer consist of a list of one or two
+strings. The first string will be interpreted as the main key,
+whereas the second one will become the print key. If the print key
+is ommited, the main key is taken instead. So the definition</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+:tkey (("This") ("is") ("a") ("bang" "BANG !!!"))
+</pre>
+<p>is equivalent to</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+:key ("This" "is" "a" "bang")
+:print ("This" "is" "a" "BANG !!!")
+</pre></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">:locref</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The reference an index entry describes can be a
+<span class="emphasis"><em>location reference</em></span> or a
+<span class="emphasis"><em>cross reference</em></span>. The switch
+<tt class="literal">:locref</tt> describes a location reference.
+Its optional arguments are <tt class="literal">:open-range</tt> and
+<tt class="literal">:close-range</tt>. The
+<span class="emphasis"><em>string</em></span> that must be supplied
+must somehow encode the location reference. It might look like the
+string <tt class="literal">"25"</tt> representing the page number
+25, or <tt class="literal">"Appendix-I"</tt> representing the first
+appendix numbered in uppercase roman numerals.</p></dd>
+<dt>
+<span class="term"><tt class="literal">:open-range,:close-range</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>These are switches that do not take any arguments. They describe
+the beginning and ending of a
+<span class="emphasis"><em>range</em></span>, starting or ending
+from the location reference that is given by the argument
+<tt class="literal">:locref</tt>. If they are supplied, the
+location reference may have influence on the way ranges are
+build.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">:xref</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>These arguments choose the second alternative. The argument
+<span class="emphasis"><em>string list</em></span> of parameter
+<tt class="literal">:xref</tt> describes where the index entry
+should point to.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><tt class="literal">:attr</tt></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>This parameter may be used to tag a location reference with a
+certain attribute or it names the class of a cross reference. It
+may also used to associate different markup for different
+attributes in the markup phase. If this parameter is omitted or is
+the empty string, the indexentry is declared to have the attribute
+<tt class="literal">default</tt>.</p></dd></dl></div>
+<p>Some examples:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(indexentry :key ("airplane") :locref "25" :attr "default")
+</pre>
+<p>defines an index entry with the key
+<span class="emphasis"><em>airplane'</em></span> indexed on page
+<span class="emphasis"><em>25'</em></span>. This index entry has
+the attribute <tt class="literal">default</tt>.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(indexentry :key ("house") :xref("building") :attr "see")
+</pre>
+<p>defines a cross reference with the key
+<tt class="literal">house</tt> pointing to the term
+<tt class="literal">building</tt>. This cross reference belongs to
+the cross reference class <tt class="literal">see</tt>.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(indexentry :key ("house") :xref("building") :open-range)
+</pre>
+<p>is an invalid specification, since
+<tt class="literal">:open-range</tt> mustn't be used together with
+cross references.</p></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="xindy-invoking"></a>2
+Invoking xindy</h2></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2575621" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="xindy-invoking-cmdline"></a>2.1 Command
+Line Options</h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2575644" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The following command line options are accepted:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+xindy [-h] [-t] [-v] [-l logfile] [-o outfile]
+ [-L n] [-f filterprog]
+ indexstyle raw-index
+</pre>
+<p>The argument <tt class="literal">indexstyle</tt> names a file,
+containing the index style description. The argument
+<tt class="literal">raw-index</tt> names a file, containing the raw
+index. Both arguments are mandatory.</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term">-h</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Gives a short summary of all command line options.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-l</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Writes helpful information into the specified
+<tt class="literal">logfile</tt>. For example, the keyword mappings
+are written into this file, so one can check if the intended
+mappings were actually performed this way.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-o</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Explicitly defines the name of the
+<tt class="literal">output</tt> file. If not given, the name of the
+<tt class="literal">raw-index</tt> is used with its extension
+changed to <tt class="literal">.ind</tt> (or added, if it had no
+extension at all).</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-t</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Enters tracing mode of the symbolic markup tags. The format of
+the emitted tags can be defined with the command
+<tt class="literal">markup-trace</tt>.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-L</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Set the xindy logging-level to
+<tt class="literal">n</tt>.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-f</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Run <tt class="literal">filterprog</tt> on
+<tt class="literal">raw-index</tt> before reading. The program must
+act as a filter reading from <tt class="literal">stdin</tt> and
+writing to <tt class="literal">stdout</tt>. The most obvious use of
+this option in conjunction with TeX is to run
+<tt class="literal">-f tex2xindy</tt> on the index file prior to
+reading the entries into xindy.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-v</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Shows the version number of xindy.</p></dd></dl></div>
+<p>Errors and warnings are reported to
+<tt class="literal">stdout</tt> and additionally to the logfile if
+<tt class="literal">-l</tt> was specified.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="xindy-search-path"></a>2.2 Search
+Path</h3></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2575892" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The system uses the concept of a search path for finding the
+index style files and modules. The searchpath can be set with the
+environment variable <tt class="envar">XINDY_SEARCHPATH</tt> which
+must contain a list of colon-separated directories. If it ends with
+a colon, the built-in searchpath is added to the entire searchpath.
+See the command <a href="#xindy-command-list-processing-searchpath"
+title="1.1.12 searchpath">searchpath</a> for further
+details.</p></div></div></div>
+<div class="appendix" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title">
+<a id="appendices"></a>Appendix&nbsp;A.&nbsp;Appendices</h2></div></div></div>
+<div class="toc">
+<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#issues">1 Bugs / Known Issues /
+Missing Features</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#about">2 About this
+Document</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#release-news">3 Release
+News</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl">4 GNU Free Documentation
+License</a></span></dt>
+<dt>
+<span class="index"><a href="#tex-refs-idx">Index</a></span></dt></dl></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="issues"></a>1 Bugs /
+Known Issues / Missing Features</h2></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2575966" class="indexterm"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term">PDF</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The PDF file is an experimental version generated using
+<a href="http://dblatex.sf.net" target="_top">DB2LaTeX</a>. There
+is much room for improvements and we will work on this.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">Texinfo</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Currently we don't know any working solution to convert DocBook
+XML to Texinfo (at least not for a complex document). Anyone who
+wants to work on this issue is highly welcome. A starting point
+could be the <span class="emphasis"><em>docbook2X</em></span>
+project at <a href="http://docbook2x.sourceforge.net"
+target="_top">http://docbook2x.sourceforge.net</a>.</p></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">vim-help</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Quite a few poeple are asking for a version in vim-help format.
+<a href="mailto:srinath@eecs.berkeley.edu" target="_top">Srinath
+Avadhanula</a> has already done some work on
+this.</p></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="about"></a>2 About
+this Document</h2></div></div></div>
+<a id="id2576071" class="indexterm"></a>
+<p>The source format of this document is
+<a href="http://www.oasis-open.org/committees/docbook/"
+target="_top">DocBook XML (V4.3)</a>.</p>
+<p>The various output formats were generated using:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc">
+<li><a href="http://xmlsoft.org/XSLT/" target="_top">xsltproc
+(libxml2-2.6.16/libxslt-1.1.12)</a> as XSLT processor</li>
+<li><a href="http://sourceforge.net/projects/docbook"
+target="_top">DocBook XSL Stylesheets (V1.68.1)</a> for HTML</li>
+<li><a href="http://db2latex.sf.net/" target="_top">DB2LaTeX XSL
+Stylesheets (V0.8pre1+20050330</a> for LaTeX/PDF</li>
+<li><tt class="literal">scrbook [2004/09/16 v2.9t LaTeX2e KOMA
+document class]</tt> of
+<a href="ftp://dante.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/"
+ target="_top">KOMA-Script</a></li>
+<li>
+<a href="ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/fonts/ps-type1/lm/tex/latex/lm/"
+ target="_top">Latin Modern Type 1 Fonts (V0.92)</a></li>
+<li>pdfLaTeX (3.14159-1.10b) for generating PDF
+output</li></ul></div>
+<p>You'll always find the newest version of this document at
+<a href="http://www.miwie.org/tex-refs/"
+target="_top">http://www.miwie.org/tex-refs/</a>.</p></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="release-news"></a>3
+Release News</h2></div></div></div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.3.9 05-05-14</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>Consistent naming scheme of IDs to ease the use of this
+reference for other projects</li>
+<li>Added new section <a href="#float" title="3.3 float">float</a>
+in chapter <a href="#latex"
+title="2 LaTeX">LaTeX</a></li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.3.8 04-10-28</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>Minor changes in <a href="#page-styles"
+title="2.3.15 Page Styles">\maketitle</a></li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.3.7 04-08-26</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>Corrected typos and markup errors in chapter <a href="#bibtex"
+title="Chapter&nbsp;5.&nbsp;BibTeX">BibTeX</a></li>
+<li>Switched to DocBook XML V4.3</li>
+<li>Added new section <a href="#opt-latex"
+title="2.1 Options">Options</a> in chapter <a href="#latex"
+title="2 LaTeX">LaTeX</a></li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.3.6 04-06-21</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>Added a note in chapter <a href="#latex"
+title="2 LaTeX">LaTeX</a> with the copyright and permission notice
+of the original file <tt class="filename">latex2.texi</tt></li>
+<li>Corrected typos and added missing hyperlinks in chapter
+<a href="#xindy" title="Chapter&nbsp;7.&nbsp;xindy">xindy</a></li>
+<li>PDF file optimized/linearized and some
+finetuning</li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.3.5 04-05-01</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>Added content to chapters <a href="#metapost"
+title="Chapter&nbsp;4.&nbsp;MetaPost">MetaPost</a> and
+<a href="#pdftex"
+title="Chapter&nbsp;2.&nbsp;pdfTeX">pdfTeX</a></li>
+<li>Enhanced index for chapter <a href="#metapost"
+title="Chapter&nbsp;4.&nbsp;MetaPost">Make-Index</a></li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.3.4 04-04-24</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>Version control system changed from CVS to SVN</li>
+<li>Added missing entries to chapter <a href="#makeindex"
+title="Chapter&nbsp;6.&nbsp;Make-Index">Make-Index</a></li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.3.3 04-01-26</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>Corrected again section <a href="#makeindex-output-style-specs"
+title="2.2 Output Style Specifiers">Output Style Specifiers</a> and
+<a href="#makeindex-style" title="2.1 Input Style Specifiers">Input
+Style Specifiers</a> of chapter <a href="#makeindex"
+title="Chapter&nbsp;6.&nbsp;Make-Index">Make-Index</a></li>
+<li>Corrected some symbols in the index</li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.3.2 04-01-16</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>Corrected sections <a href="#makeindex-output-style-specs"
+title="2.2 Output Style Specifiers">Output Style Specifiers</a> and
+<a href="#makeindex-style" title="2.1 Input Style Specifiers">Input
+Style Specifiers</a> of chapter <a href="#makeindex"
+title="Chapter&nbsp;6.&nbsp;Make-Index">Make-Index</a></li>
+<li>Enhanced index in PDF</li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.3.1 04-01-06</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>More work on PDF</li>
+<li>Modularized XSL stylesheet files</li>
+<li>Corrected some typos</li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.3.0 03-12-25</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>Changed document root to
+<span class="emphasis"><em>book</em></span></li>
+<li>More work on PDF version</li>
+<li>Using new XSL stylesheets V1.64.1</li>
+<li>Minor fixes</li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.2.6 03-10-27</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>Rearranged appendix</li>
+<li>Work on PDF version</li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.2.5 03-10-17</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>Added contents of <a href="#gfdl"
+title="4 GNU Free Documentation License">GNU FDL</a> in
+appendix</li>
+<li>Using new XSL stylesheets V1.62.4</li>
+<li>Switched to <a href="http://xmlsoft.org/XSLT/"
+target="_top"><tt class="literal">xsltproc</tt></a> as
+XSLT-processor</li>
+<li>Reedited some deeply nested sections</li>
+<li>Changed colors in CSS</li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.2.4 03-09-06</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>Added subsection <a href="#dcolumn"
+title="3.2 dcolumn"><tt class="literal">dcolumn</tt></a></li>
+<li>Subsection <a href="#fontenc"
+title="3.4 fontenc"><tt class="literal">fontenc</tt></a> translated
+into english</li>
+<li>Corrected typo in
+<a href="#cmd-sbox"><tt class="filename">\sbox</tt></a></li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.2.3 03-04-12</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>Provide PDF output using <a href="http://www.pragma-ade.com/"
+target="_top">ConTeXt</a> and
+<a href="http://www.hobby.nl/~scaprea/context/index.html"
+target="_top">DocBook In ConTeXt</a> (still experimental)</li>
+<li>Reedited (beautified) sections LaTeX / Commands /
+<a href="#counters" title="2.3.1 Counters">Counters</a> |
+<a href="#cross-references" title="2.3.2 Cross References">Cross
+References</a> | <a href="#definitions"
+title="2.3.3 Definitions">Definitions</a> | <a href="#layout"
+title="2.3.5 Layout">Layout</a> | <a href="#env-latex"
+title="2.3.6 Environments">Environments</a> | <a href="#footnotes"
+title="2.3.7 Footnotes">Footnotes</a></li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.2.2 03-01-26</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>Added bzip2 compressed version of source and outfiles
+tarball</li>
+<li>Using new XSL stylesheets V1.60.1</li>
+<li>Eliminated more spurious &amp;Acirc; characters in HTML
+output</li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.2.1 03-01-18</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>Using new XSL stylesheets V1.59.2</li>
+<li>Eliminated spurious &amp;Acirc; characters</li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.2.0 03-01-11</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>Using new XSL stylesheets V1.58.1</li>
+<li>Minor changes to CSS file</li>
+<li>License changed to
+<a href="http://www.gnu.org/licenses/fdl.html" target="_top">GNU
+Free Documentation License</a></li>
+<li>Added subsection <a href="#pstricks-commands"
+title="4.2.2 Commands and Parameters">Commands and Parameters</a>
+to section <a href="#pstricks"
+title="4.2 PSTricks">PSTricks</a></li>
+<li>Reworked <a href="#inputenc" title="3.8 inputenc">inputenc</a>
+section</li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.1.3 02-10-17</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>Started rework of <a href="#komascript"
+title="3.9 KOMA-Script">KOMA-Script</a> section</li>
+<li>Added subsection <a href="#pstricks-add-packages"
+title="4.2.3 List of Additional PSTricks Packages">Additional
+PSTricks Packages</a></li>
+<li>Using new XSL stylesheets V1.56.1</li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.1.2 02-10-01</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>Reworked <a href="#hyperref" title="3.7 hyperref">hyperref</a>
+section</li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.1.1 02-09-19</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>Added template sections for <a href="#pictex"
+title="4.1 PiCTeX (tbd.)">PiCTeX</a> and <a href="#texinfo"
+title="7 Texinfo (tbd.)">Texinfo</a></li>
+<li>Added subsection <a href="#release-news"
+title="3 Release News">Release News</a> in appendix
+<a href="#about" title="2 About this Document">About this
+Document</a></li>
+<li>Using new XSL stylesheets V1.55.0</li>
+<li>Added missing CSS file to outfiles tarball</li>
+<li>Corrected wrong FPI</li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.1.0 02-08-20</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>Eliminated trailing '.' in numbered sections</li>
+<li>Minor markup errors corrected</li>
+<li>Reworked CSS file</li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.0.5 02-08-10</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>Switched to DocBook XML 4.2</li>
+<li>Sections 'Bibindex' and 'xindy' completed</li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.0.4 02-07-25</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>Section 'Makeindex' completed</li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.0.3 02-07-13</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>New XSL stylesheets solve bug in creating index (no other
+changes)</li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.0.2 02-07-05</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>New (template) sections 'fontinst', 'Bibtex', 'Makeindex', and
+'xindy'</li>
+<li>New section 'Special Symbols'</li>
+<li>Added information for 'german' package</li>
+<li>Registered as a new project (tex-refs) on
+freshmeat.net</li></ul></div></dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.0.1 02-06-21</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li>First official
+announcement</li></ul></div></dd></dl></div></div>
+<div class="section" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="gfdl"></a>4 GNU Free
+Documentation License</h2></div></div></div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="id2577462"></a>Version 1.2, November
+2002</h5>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+ Copyright (C) 2000,2001,2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+
+0. PREAMBLE
+
+The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
+functional and useful document "free" in the sense of freedom: to
+assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
+with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.
+Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way
+to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible
+for modifications made by others.
+
+This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
+works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It
+complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
+license designed for free software.
+
+We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free
+software, because free software needs free documentation: a free
+program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the
+software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals;
+it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or
+whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License
+principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
+
+
+1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
+
+This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that
+contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be
+distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a
+world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that
+work under the conditions stated herein. The "Document", below,
+refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a
+licensee, and is addressed as "you". You accept the license if you
+copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission
+under copyright law.
+
+A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
+Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
+modifications and/or translated into another language.
+
+A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section of
+the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
+publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject
+(or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly
+within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in part a
+textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any
+mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical
+connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal,
+commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding
+them.
+
+The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose titles
+are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice
+that says that the Document is released under this License. If a
+section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not
+allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero
+Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant
+Sections then there are none.
+
+The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are listed,
+as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that
+the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may
+be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
+
+A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
+represented in a format whose specification is available to the
+general public, that is suitable for revising the document
+straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of
+pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available
+drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or
+for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input
+to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file
+format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart
+or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent.
+An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount
+of text. A copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque".
+
+Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
+ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML
+or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple
+HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification. Examples of
+transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats
+include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by
+proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or
+processing tools are not generally available, and the
+machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word
+processors for output purposes only.
+
+The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
+plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material
+this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in
+formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title Page" means
+the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title,
+preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
+
+A section "Entitled XYZ" means a named subunit of the Document whose
+title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following
+text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a
+specific section name mentioned below, such as "Acknowledgements",
+"Dedications", "Endorsements", or "History".) To "Preserve the Title"
+of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a
+section "Entitled XYZ" according to this definition.
+
+The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which
+states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty
+Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this
+License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
+implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has
+no effect on the meaning of this License.
+
+
+2. VERBATIM COPYING
+
+You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
+commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
+copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies
+to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other
+conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use
+technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further
+copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept
+compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough
+number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
+
+You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and
+you may publicly display copies.
+
+
+3. COPYING IN QUANTITY
+
+If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have
+printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the
+Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the
+copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover
+Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on
+the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify
+you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present
+the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and
+visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition.
+Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve
+the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated
+as verbatim copying in other respects.
+
+If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
+legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
+reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent
+pages.
+
+If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering
+more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent
+copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy
+a computer-network location from which the general network-using
+public has access to download using public-standard network protocols
+a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material.
+If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps,
+when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure
+that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
+location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an
+Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that
+edition to the public.
+
+It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the
+Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give
+them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
+
+
+4. MODIFICATIONS
+
+You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under
+the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release
+the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified
+Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution
+and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy
+of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
+
+A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct
+ from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions
+ (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section
+ of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version
+ if the original publisher of that version gives permission.
+B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities
+ responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified
+ Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the
+ Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than five),
+ unless they release you from this requirement.
+C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
+ Modified Version, as the publisher.
+D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
+E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
+ adjacent to the other copyright notices.
+F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice
+ giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the
+ terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below.
+G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections
+ and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice.
+H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
+I. Preserve the section Entitled "History", Preserve its Title, and add
+ to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
+ publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If
+ there is no section Entitled "History" in the Document, create one
+ stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as
+ given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified
+ Version as stated in the previous sentence.
+J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for
+ public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise
+ the network locations given in the Document for previous versions
+ it was based on. These may be placed in the "History" section.
+ You may omit a network location for a work that was published at
+ least four years before the Document itself, or if the original
+ publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
+K. For any section Entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
+ Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all
+ the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements
+ and/or dedications given therein.
+L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
+ unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers
+ or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
+M. Delete any section Entitled "Endorsements". Such a section
+ may not be included in the Modified Version.
+N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled "Endorsements"
+ or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
+O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
+
+If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
+appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material
+copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all
+of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the
+list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice.
+These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
+
+You may add a section Entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
+nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
+parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
+been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a
+standard.
+
+You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a
+passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list
+of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of
+Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
+through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already
+includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or
+by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of,
+you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit
+permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
+
+The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License
+give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or
+imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
+
+
+5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
+
+You may combine the Document with other documents released under this
+License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified
+versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the
+Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and
+list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its
+license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
+
+The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
+multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
+copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but
+different contents, make the title of each such section unique by
+adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original
+author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number.
+Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of
+Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
+
+In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled "History"
+in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled
+"History"; likewise combine any sections Entitled "Acknowledgements",
+and any sections Entitled "Dedications". You must delete all sections
+Entitled "Endorsements".
+
+
+6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
+
+You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents
+released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this
+License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in
+the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for
+verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.
+
+You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute
+it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this
+License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all
+other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
+
+
+7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
+
+A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate
+and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or
+distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the copyright
+resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights
+of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit.
+When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not
+apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves
+derivative works of the Document.
+
+If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
+copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of
+the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on
+covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
+electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form.
+Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole
+aggregate.
+
+
+8. TRANSLATION
+
+Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
+distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4.
+Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
+permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
+translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
+original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a
+translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
+Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include
+the original English version of this License and the original versions
+of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between
+the translation and the original version of this License or a notice
+or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.
+
+If a section in the Document is Entitled "Acknowledgements",
+"Dedications", or "History", the requirement (section 4) to Preserve
+its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual
+title.
+
+
+9. TERMINATION
+
+You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except
+as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to
+copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will
+automatically terminate your rights under this License. However,
+parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this
+License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+
+10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
+
+The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions
+of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new
+versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
+differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See
+http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
+
+Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number.
+If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this
+License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the option of
+following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or
+of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the
+Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version
+number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not
+as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+
+ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
+
+To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
+the License in the document and put the following copyright and
+license notices just after the title page:
+
+ Copyright (c) YEAR YOUR NAME.
+ Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
+ under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2
+ or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
+ with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts.
+ A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
+ Free Documentation License".
+
+If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts,
+replace the "with...Texts." line with this:
+
+ with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the
+ Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST.
+
+If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
+combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
+situation.
+
+If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
+recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
+free software license, such as the GNU General Public License,
+to permit their use in free software.
+</pre></div>
+<div class="index">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title">
+<a id="tex-refs-idx"></a>Index</h2></div></div></div>
+<div class="index">
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>Symbols</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>$, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\!, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\' (tabbing), <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\(, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\), <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\+, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\,, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\- (hyphenation), <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp;
+Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\- (tabbing) , <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\;, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\&lt; , <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\=, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\&gt;, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\a, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\addcontentsline, <a href="#table-of-contents">Table of
+Contents</a></dt>
+<dt>\address, <a href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\addtocontents, <a href="#table-of-contents">Table of
+Contents</a></dt>
+<dt>\addtocounter{counter}{value},
+<a href="#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\addtolength, <a href="#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>\addvspace, <a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp;
+Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\alph, <a href="#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\Alph, <a href="#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\appendix, <a href="#sectioning">Sectioning</a></dt>
+<dt>\arabic, <a href="#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\areaset,
+<a href="#komascript-page-layout">Page-Layout</a></dt>
+<dt>\author, <a href="#page-styles">Page Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>\backslash, <a href="#special-characters">Special
+Characters</a></dt>
+<dt>\begin, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\bfseries, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\bibitem, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\bibliography, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\bibliographystyle, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\bigskip, <a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp;
+Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\bm, <a href="#bm-package">bm</a></dt>
+<dt>\boldsymbol, <a href="#amsmath">amsmath</a></dt>
+<dt>\boldsymbold, <a href="#bm-package">bm</a></dt>
+<dt>\caption, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\cc, <a href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\cdots, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\centering, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\chapter, <a href="#sectioning">Sectioning</a></dt>
+<dt>\circle, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\cite, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\cleardoublepage, <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp;
+Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\clearpage, <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page
+Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\cline, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\closing, <a href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\COLON, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\dashbox, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\date, <a href="#page-styles">Page Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>\ddots, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\depth, <a href="#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>\documentclass, <a href="#document-classes">Document
+Classes</a></dt>
+<dt>\dotfill, <a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp;
+Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\emph, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\encl, <a href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\end, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\enlargethispage, <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp;
+Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\ensuremath{}, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\fbox, <a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\floatname, <a href="#float">float</a></dt>
+<dt>\floatplacement, <a href="#float">float</a></dt>
+<dt>\floatstyle, <a href="#float">float</a></dt>
+<dt>\flushbottom, <a href="#layout">Layout</a></dt>
+<dt>\fnsymbol, <a href="#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\fontencoding, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\fontfamily, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\fontseries, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\fontshape, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\fontsize, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\footnote, <a href="#footnotes">Footnotes</a></dt>
+<dt>\footnotemark, <a href="#footnotes">Footnotes</a></dt>
+<dt>\footnotesize, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\footnotetext, <a href="#footnotes">Footnotes</a></dt>
+<dt>\frac, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\frame, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\framebox, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a>,
+<a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\fussy, <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page
+Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\graphicspath, <a href="#graphicspath">\graphicspath</a></dt>
+<dt>\height, <a href="#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>\hfill, <a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\hline, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\hrulefill, <a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp;
+Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\hspace, <a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp;
+Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\huge, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\Huge, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\hyphenation, <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page
+Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\include, <a href="#splitting-the-input">Splitting the
+Input</a></dt>
+<dt>\includegraphics,
+<a href="#includegraphics">\includegraphics</a></dt>
+<dt>\includeonly, <a href="#splitting-the-input">Splitting the
+Input</a></dt>
+<dt>\indent, <a href="#making-paragraphs">Making
+Paragraphs</a></dt>
+<dt>\input, <a href="#splitting-the-input">Splitting the
+Input</a></dt>
+<dt>\item, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\itshape, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\kill, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\label, <a href="#cross-references">Cross References</a></dt>
+<dt>\large, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\Large, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\LARGE, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\ldots, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\lefteqn, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\line, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\linebreak, <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page
+Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\linethickness, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\listof, <a href="#float">float</a></dt>
+<dt>\listoffigures, <a href="#table-of-contents">Table of
+Contents</a></dt>
+<dt>\listoftables, <a href="#table-of-contents">Table of
+Contents</a></dt>
+<dt>\location, <a href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\makebox, <a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp;
+Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\makebox (picture), <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\makelabels, <a href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\maketitle, <a href="#page-styles">Page Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>\markboth, <a href="#page-styles">Page Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>\markright, <a href="#page-styles">Page Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>\mathbf, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\mathcal, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\mathit, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\mathnormal, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\mathrm, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\mathsf, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\mathtt, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\mathversion, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\mbox, <a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\mdseries, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\medskip, <a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp;
+Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\multicolumn, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\multiput, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\name, <a href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\newcommand, <a href="#definitions">Definitions</a></dt>
+<dt>\newcounter, <a href="#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\newenvironment, <a href="#definitions">Definitions</a></dt>
+<dt>\newfloat, <a href="#float">float</a></dt>
+<dt>\newfont, <a href="#definitions">Definitions</a></dt>
+<dt>\newlength, <a href="#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>\newline, <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page
+Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\newpage, <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page
+Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\newsavebox, <a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp;
+Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\newtheorem, <a href="#definitions">Definitions</a></dt>
+<dt>\nocite, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\nofiles, <a href="#table-of-contents">Table of
+Contents</a></dt>
+<dt>\noindent, <a href="#making-paragraphs">Making
+Paragraphs</a></dt>
+<dt>\nolinebreak, <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page
+Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\nopagebreak, <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page
+Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\normalfont, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\normalsize, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\onecolumn, <a href="#layout">Layout</a></dt>
+<dt>\opening, <a href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\oval, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\overbrace, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\overline, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\pagebreak, <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page
+Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\pagenumbering, <a href="#page-styles">Page Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>\pageref, <a href="#cross-references">Cross References</a></dt>
+<dt>\pagestyle, <a href="#page-styles">Page Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>\par, <a href="#making-paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a></dt>
+<dt>\paragraph, <a href="#sectioning">Sectioning</a></dt>
+<dt>\parbox, <a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp;
+Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\pmb, <a href="#amsmath">amsmath</a></dt>
+<dt>\poptabs, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\ps, <a href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\pushtabs, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\put, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\raggedbottom, <a href="#layout">Layout</a></dt>
+<dt>\raggedleft, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\raggedright, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\raisebox, <a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp;
+Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\ref, <a href="#cross-references">Cross References</a></dt>
+<dt>\refstepcounter, <a href="#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\restylefloat, <a href="#float">float</a></dt>
+<dt>\rmfamily, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\roman, <a href="#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\Roman, <a href="#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\rule, <a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\samepage, <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page
+Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\savebox, <a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp;
+Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\sbox, <a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\scriptsize, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\scshape, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\selectfont, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\setcounter, <a href="#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\setlength, <a href="#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>\settodepth, <a href="#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>\settoheight, <a href="#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>\settowidth, <a href="#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>\sffamily, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\shortstack, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\signature, <a href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\sloppy, <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page
+Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\slshape, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\small, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\smallskip, <a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp;
+Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\sqrt, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\startbreaks, <a href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\stepcounter, <a href="#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\stopbreaks, <a href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\subparagraph, <a href="#sectioning">Sectioning</a></dt>
+<dt>\subsection, <a href="#sectioning">Sectioning</a></dt>
+<dt>\subsubsection, <a href="#sectioning">Sectioning</a></dt>
+<dt>\symbol, <a href="#special-characters">Special
+Characters</a></dt>
+<dt>\tableofcontents, <a href="#table-of-contents">Table of
+Contents</a></dt>
+<dt>\telephone, <a href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\textbf, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\textit, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\textmd, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\textnormal, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\textrm, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\textsc, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\textsf, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\textsl, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\texttt, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\textup, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\thanks, <a href="#page-styles">Page Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>\thispagestyle, <a href="#page-styles">Page Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>\tiny, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\title, <a href="#page-styles">Page Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>\today, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\totalheight, <a href="#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>\ttfamily, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\twocolumn, <a href="#layout">Layout</a></dt>
+<dt>\typearea,
+<a href="#komascript-page-layout">Page-Layout</a></dt>
+<dt>\typein, <a href="#terminal-input-slash-output">Terminal
+Input/Output</a></dt>
+<dt>\typeout, <a href="#terminal-input-slash-output">Terminal
+Input/Output</a></dt>
+<dt>\unboldmath, <a href="#bm-package">bm</a></dt>
+<dt>\underbrace, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\underline, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\upDelta, <a href="#upDelta-upOmega">\upDelta /
+\upOmega</a></dt>
+<dt>\upOmega, <a href="#upDelta-upOmega">\upDelta /
+\upOmega</a></dt>
+<dt>\upshape, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\usebox, <a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp;
+Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\usecounter, <a href="#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\usefont, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\usepackage, <a href="#document-classes">Document
+Classes</a></dt>
+<dt>\value, <a href="#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\vdots, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\vector, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\verb, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\vfill, <a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\vline, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\vpageref, <a href="#varioref">varioref</a></dt>
+<dt>\vpagerefrange, <a href="#varioref">varioref</a></dt>
+<dt>\vref, <a href="#varioref">varioref</a></dt>
+<dt>\vrefrange, <a href="#varioref">varioref</a></dt>
+<dt>\vspace, <a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp;
+Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\width, <a href="#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>\[, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\\, <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page
+Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\], <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\` (tabbing), <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>^, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>_, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt></dl></div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>A</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>About this Document, <a href="#about">About this
+Document</a></dt>
+<dt>Accents, <a href="#special-symbols">Special Symbols</a></dt>
+<dt>Accessing any character of a font,
+<a href="#special-characters">Special Characters</a></dt>
+<dt>Aligning Equations, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>amsmath, <a href="#amsmath">amsmath</a></dt>
+<dt>ansinew, <a href="#inputenc">inputenc</a></dt>
+<dt>Appendix, creating, <a href="#sectioning">Sectioning</a></dt>
+<dt>applemac, <a href="#inputenc">inputenc</a></dt>
+<dt>array, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Arrays, math, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Arrows, <a href="#special-symbols">Special Symbols</a></dt>
+<dt>article class, <a href="#document-classes">Document
+Classes</a></dt>
+<dt>Author, for titlepage, <a href="#page-styles">Page
+Styles</a></dt></dl></div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>B</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>BCOR, <a href="#komascript-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>Bibliography, creating (automatically),
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Bibliography, creating (manually),
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>BibTeX, <a href="#bibtex">BibTeX</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>bib files, <a href="#bibtex-bib-files">bib files</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>@STRING command, <a href="#bibtex-string-command">@STRING
+command</a></dt>
+<dt>Entry Format, <a href="#bibtex-entry-format">Entry
+Format</a></dt>
+<dt>Entry Types, <a href="#bibtex-entry-types">Entry Types</a></dt>
+<dt>Field Text, <a href="#bibtex-field-text">Field Text</a></dt>
+<dt>Field Types, <a href="#bibtex-field-types">Field
+Types</a></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt>bst files, <a href="#bibtex-bst-files">bst files</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>ABBRV.BST, <a href="#bibtex-bst-abbr">ABBRV.BST</a></dt>
+<dt>ALPHA.BST, <a href="#bibtex-bst-alpha">ALPHA.BST</a></dt>
+<dt>PLAIN.BST, <a href="#bibtex-bst-plain">PLAIN.BST</a></dt>
+<dt>SAMPLE.BST, <a href="#bibtex-bst-sample">SAMPLE.BST</a></dt>
+<dt>UNSRT.BST,
+<a href="#bibtex-bst-unsrt">UNSRT.BST</a></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt>Command Qualifiers,
+<a href="#bibtex-command-qualifiers">Command Qualifiers</a></dt>
+<dt>Entry Types</dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>article entry, <a href="#bibtex-entry-types-article">article
+entry</a></dt>
+<dt>book entry, <a href="#bibtex-entry-types-book">book
+entry</a></dt>
+<dt>booklet entry, <a href="#bibtex-entry-types-booklet">booklet
+entry</a></dt>
+<dt>conference entry,
+<a href="#bibtex-entry-types-conference">conference entry</a></dt>
+<dt>inbook entry, <a href="#bibtex-entry-types-inbook">inbook
+entry</a></dt>
+<dt>incollection entry,
+<a href="#bibtex-entry-types-incollection">incollection
+entry</a></dt>
+<dt>inproceedings entry,
+<a href="#bibtex-entry-types-inproceedings">inproceedings
+entry</a></dt>
+<dt>manual entry, <a href="#bibtex-entry-types-manual">manual
+entry</a></dt>
+<dt>mastersthesis entry,
+<a href="#bibtex-entry-types-mastersthesis">mastersthesis
+entry</a></dt>
+<dt>misc entry, <a href="#bibtex-entry-types-misc">misc
+entry</a></dt>
+<dt>phdthesis entry,
+<a href="#bibtex-entry-types-phdthesis">phdthesis entry</a></dt>
+<dt>proceedings entry,
+<a href="#bibtex-entry-types-proceedings">proceedings
+entry</a></dt>
+<dt>techreport entry,
+<a href="#bibtex-entry-types-techreport">techreport entry</a></dt>
+<dt>unpublished entry,
+<a href="#bibtex-entry-types-unpublished">unpublished
+entry</a></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt>Field Text</dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>Abbreviations,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-text-abbr">Abbreviations</a></dt>
+<dt>Names, <a href="#bibtex-field-text-names">Names</a></dt>
+<dt>Titles,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-text-titles">Titles</a></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt>Field Types</dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>address field, <a href="#bibtex-field-types-address">address
+field</a></dt>
+<dt>annote field, <a href="#bibtex-field-types-annote">annote
+field</a></dt>
+<dt>author field, <a href="#bibtex-field-types-author">author
+field</a></dt>
+<dt>booktitle field,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-booktitle">booktitle field</a></dt>
+<dt>chapter field, <a href="#bibtex-field-types-chapter">chapter
+field</a></dt>
+<dt>edition field, <a href="#bibtex-field-types-edition">edition
+field</a></dt>
+<dt>editor field, <a href="#bibtex-field-types-editor">editor
+field</a></dt>
+<dt>howpublished field,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-howpublished">howpublished
+field</a></dt>
+<dt>institution field,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-institution">institution
+field</a></dt>
+<dt>journal field, <a href="#bibtex-field-types-journal">journal
+field</a></dt>
+<dt>key field, <a href="#bibtex-field-types-key">key field</a></dt>
+<dt>month field, <a href="#bibtex-field-types-month">month
+field</a></dt>
+<dt>note field, <a href="#bibtex-field-types-note">note
+field</a></dt>
+<dt>number field, <a href="#bibtex-field-types-number">number
+field</a></dt>
+<dt>organization field,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-organization">organization
+field</a></dt>
+<dt>pages field, <a href="#bibtex-field-types-pages">pages
+field</a></dt>
+<dt>publisher field,
+<a href="#bibtex-field-types-publisher">publisher field</a></dt>
+<dt>school field, <a href="#bibtex-field-types-school">school
+field</a></dt>
+<dt>series field, <a href="#bibtex-field-types-series">series
+field</a></dt>
+<dt>title field, <a href="#bibtex-field-types-title">title
+field</a></dt>
+<dt>type field, <a href="#bibtex-field-types-type">type
+field</a></dt>
+<dt>volume field, <a href="#bibtex-field-types-volume">volume
+field</a></dt>
+<dt>year field, <a href="#bibtex-field-types-year">year
+field</a></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt>Parameters, <a href="#bibtex-parameters">Parameters</a></dt>
+<dt>using, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt>Binary Operators, <a href="#special-symbols">Special
+Symbols</a></dt>
+<dt>bm, <a href="#bm-package">bm</a></dt>
+<dt>book class, <a href="#document-classes">Document
+Classes</a></dt>
+<dt>Boxes, <a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp;
+Boxes</a></dt></dl></div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>C</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Cc list, <a href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>center, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Centering text, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Centering text, environment for,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Characters, reserved, <a href="#special-characters">Special
+Characters</a></dt>
+<dt>Characters, special, <a href="#special-characters">Special
+Characters</a></dt>
+<dt>cite.sty, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Classes of document, <a href="#document-classes">Document
+Classes</a></dt>
+<dt>Commands, defining new ones,
+<a href="#definitions">Definitions</a></dt>
+<dt>Computer programs, typesetting,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>ConTeXt, <a href="#context">ConTeXt (tbd.)</a></dt>
+<dt>Counters, a list of, <a href="#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>Counters, creating, <a href="#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>Counters, getting the value of,
+<a href="#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>Counters, setting, <a href="#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>cp850, <a href="#inputenc">inputenc</a></dt>
+<dt>Creating letters, <a href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>Creating pictures, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Creating tables, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Credits, <a href="#credits">Credits</a></dt>
+<dt>Cross referencing, <a href="#cross-references">Cross
+References</a></dt>
+<dt>Cross referencing using page number,
+<a href="#cross-references">Cross References</a></dt>
+<dt>Cross referencing using section number,
+<a href="#cross-references">Cross References</a></dt></dl></div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>D</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Date, for titlepage, <a href="#page-styles">Page
+Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>dcolumn, <a href="#dcolumn">dcolumn</a></dt>
+<dt>Defining a new command,
+<a href="#definitions">Definitions</a></dt>
+<dt>Defining new environments,
+<a href="#definitions">Definitions</a></dt>
+<dt>Defining new fonts, <a href="#definitions">Definitions</a></dt>
+<dt>Defining new theorems,
+<a href="#definitions">Definitions</a></dt>
+<dt>Delimiters, <a href="#special-symbols">Special Symbols</a></dt>
+<dt>description, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Displaying quoted text,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>DIV, <a href="#komascript-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>Document Classes, <a href="#document-classes">Document
+Classes</a></dt></dl></div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>E</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Ellipsis, <a href="#special-symbols">Special Symbols</a></dt>
+<dt>Enclosed material, <a href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>Ending &amp; Starting, <a href="#starting-and-ending">Starting
+&amp; Ending</a></dt>
+<dt>Enlarge current page, <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line
+&amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>enumerate, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Environments, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Environments, defining,
+<a href="#definitions">Definitions</a></dt>
+<dt>eqnarray, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>equation, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Equations, aligning, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Equations, environment for,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>exponent, <a href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt></dl></div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>F</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>figure, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Figures, footnotes in,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>float, <a href="#float">float</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>\floatname, <a href="#float">float</a></dt>
+<dt>\floatplacement, <a href="#float">float</a></dt>
+<dt>\floatstyle, <a href="#float">float</a></dt>
+<dt>\listof, <a href="#float">float</a></dt>
+<dt>\newfloat, <a href="#float">float</a></dt>
+<dt>\restylefloat, <a href="#float">float</a></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt>Flushing a page, <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp;
+Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>flushleft, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>flushright, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Font commands, low-level,
+<a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>Font Sizes, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>Font Styles, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>fontenc, <a href="#fontenc">fontenc</a></dt>
+<dt>fontinst, <a href="#fontinst">fontinst (tbd.)</a></dt>
+<dt>Fonts, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>Fonts, new commands for,
+<a href="#definitions">Definitions</a></dt>
+<dt>footexclude, <a href="#komascript-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>footinclude, <a href="#komascript-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>Footnotes in figures,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Footnotes, creating, <a href="#footnotes">Footnotes</a></dt>
+<dt>Formatting Text, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Formulae, environment for,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Formulae, maths, <a href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt></dl></div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>G</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>german, <a href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>!-, <a href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>"", <a href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>"=, <a href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>"a, <a href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>"ck, <a href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>"ff, <a href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>"|, <a href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>"~, <a href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>&lt;, <a href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>\-, <a href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>\dq, <a href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>\flq, <a href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>\flqq, <a href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>\frq, <a href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>\frqq, <a href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>\glq, <a href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>\glqq, <a href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>\grqq, <a href="#german">german</a></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt>Global options, <a href="#document-classes">Document
+Classes</a></dt>
+<dt>graphics, <a href="#graphics">graphics</a></dt>
+<dt>Greek letters, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>Greek Letters, <a href="#special-symbols">Special
+Symbols</a></dt></dl></div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>H</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>headexclude, <a href="#komascript-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>headinclude, <a href="#komascript-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>hyperref, <a href="#hyperref">hyperref</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>commands</dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>\autoref, <a href="#hyperref-commands">Commands</a></dt>
+<dt>\href, <a href="#hyperref-commands">Commands</a></dt>
+<dt>\hyperbaseurl, <a href="#hyperref-commands">Commands</a></dt>
+<dt>\hyperimage, <a href="#hyperref-commands">Commands</a></dt>
+<dt>\hyperlink, <a href="#hyperref-commands">Commands</a></dt>
+<dt>\hyperref, <a href="#hyperref-commands">Commands</a></dt>
+<dt>\hypertarget, <a href="#hyperref-commands">Commands</a></dt>
+<dt>\nolinkurl, <a href="#hyperref-commands">Commands</a></dt>
+<dt>\texorpdfstring,
+<a href="#hyperref-commands">Commands</a></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt>options</dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>4, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>a4paper, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>a5paper, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>anchorcolor, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>b5paper, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>backref, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>baseurl, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>bookmarks, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>bookmarksnumbered, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>bookmarksopen, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>bookmarksopenlevel,
+<a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>bookmarkstype, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>breaklinks, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>citebordercolor, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>citecolor, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>colorlinks, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>debug, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>draft, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>dvipdf, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>dvipdfm, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>dvips, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>dvipsone, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>dviwindo, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>executivepaper, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>extension, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>filebordercolor, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>filecolor, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>frenchlinks, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>hyperfigures, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>hyperindex, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>hypertex, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>hypertexnames, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>implicit, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>latex2html, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>legalpaper, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>letterpaper, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>linkbordercolor, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>linkcolor, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>linktocpage, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>menubordercolor, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>menucolor, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>naturalnames, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>nesting, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pageanchor, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pagebackref, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pagebordercolor, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pagecolor, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfauthor, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfborder, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfcenterwindow, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfcreator, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdffitwindow, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfhighlight, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfkeywords, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfmenubar, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfnewwindow, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfpagelayout, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfpagemode, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfpagescrop, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfpagetransition, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfproducer, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfstartpage, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfstartview, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfsubject, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdftex, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdftitle, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdftoolbar, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfview, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfwindowui, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>plainpages, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>raiselinks, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>runbordercolor, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>tex4ht, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>textures, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>unicode, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>urlbordercolor, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>urlcolor, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>verbose, <a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>vtex,
+<a href="#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt></dl></dd></dl></dd>
+<dt>Hyphenation, defining, <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line
+&amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>Hyphenation, forcing, <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line
+&amp; Page Breaking</a></dt></dl></div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>I</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Indent, forcing, <a href="#making-paragraphs">Making
+Paragraphs</a></dt>
+<dt>Indent, suppressing, <a href="#making-paragraphs">Making
+Paragraphs</a></dt>
+<dt>Input file, splitting, <a href="#splitting-the-input">Splitting
+the Input</a></dt>
+<dt>Input/Output, <a href="#terminal-input-slash-output">Terminal
+Input/Output</a></dt>
+<dt>inputenc, <a href="#inputenc">inputenc</a></dt>
+<dt>Inserting figures, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>itemize, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt></dl></div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>J</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Justification, ragged left,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Justification, ragged right,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt></dl></div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>K</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Known Issues, <a href="#issues">Bugs / Known Issues / Missing
+Features</a></dt>
+<dt>KOMA-Script, <a href="#komascript">KOMA-Script</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>scraddr, <a href="#komascript-scraddr">Address Files with
+scraddr</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>\Address{}, <a href="#komascript-scraddr">Address Files with
+scraddr</a></dt>
+<dt>\Comment{}, <a href="#komascript-scraddr">Address Files with
+scraddr</a></dt>
+<dt>\FirstName{}, <a href="#komascript-scraddr">Address Files with
+scraddr</a></dt>
+<dt>\FreeIII{}, <a href="#komascript-scraddr">Address Files with
+scraddr</a></dt>
+<dt>\FreeII{}, <a href="#komascript-scraddr">Address Files with
+scraddr</a></dt>
+<dt>\FreeIV{}, <a href="#komascript-scraddr">Address Files with
+scraddr</a></dt>
+<dt>\FreeI{}, <a href="#komascript-scraddr">Address Files with
+scraddr</a></dt>
+<dt>\InputAddressFile, <a href="#komascript-scraddr">Address Files
+with scraddr</a></dt>
+<dt>\LastName{}, <a href="#komascript-scraddr">Address Files with
+scraddr</a></dt>
+<dt>\Name{}, <a href="#komascript-scraddr">Address Files with
+scraddr</a></dt>
+<dt>\Telephone{}, <a href="#komascript-scraddr">Address Files with
+scraddr</a></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt>scrlttr2, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>address, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>address files, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>backaddress, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>backaddressseparator, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter
+Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>business line, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>carbon copy, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>ccseparator, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>circular letters, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>Closing, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>Closing Part, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>customer, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>date, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>emailseparator, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>enclosure, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>enclseparator, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>faxseparator, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>font options, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>font selection, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>footer, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>footnotes, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>format options, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>fromaddress, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>frombank, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>fromemail, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>fromfax, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>fromlogo, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>fromname, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>fromphone, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>fromurl, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>general document properties,
+<a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>invoice, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>language selection, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>language support, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>letter class option files,
+<a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>letter declaration, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>letterhead, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>lists, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>location, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>margin notes, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>myref, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>Opening, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>options, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>options for letterhead and address,
+<a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>other layout, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>page layout, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>page style, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>phoneseparator, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>place, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>placeseparator, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>postscript, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>pseudo lengths, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>sender's extension, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>signature, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>specialmail, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>subject, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>subject line, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>subjectseparator, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>text, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>text emphasis, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>title, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>title line, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>toaddress, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>toname, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>variables, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>yourmail, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>yourref, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>\addtoreffields, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>\ifkomavarempty, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>\KOMAoptions{}, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>\newkomavar, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>\setkomavar, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>\usekomavar, <a href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class
+scrlttr2</a></dt></dl></dd></dl></dd></dl></div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>L</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Labelled lists, creating,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>LaTeX</dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>Options, <a href="#opt-latex">Options</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>-file-line-error-style,
+<a href="#opt-latex-file-line-error-style">-file-line-error-style</a></dt>
+<dt>-fmt=FMTNAME, <a href="#opt-latex-fmt">-fmt=FMTNAME</a></dt>
+<dt>-help, <a href="#opt-latex-help">-help</a></dt>
+<dt>-ini, <a href="#opt-latex-ini">-ini</a></dt>
+<dt>-interaction=STRING,
+<a href="#opt-latex-interaction%20mode">-interaction=STRING</a></dt>
+<dt>-ipc, <a href="#opt-latex-ipc">-ipc</a></dt>
+<dt>-ipc-start, <a href="#opt-latex-ipc-start">-ipc-start</a></dt>
+<dt>-jobname=STRING,
+<a href="#opt-latex-jobname-name">-jobname=STRING</a></dt>
+<dt>-kpathsea-debug=NUMBER,
+<a href="#opt-latex-kpathsea-debug">-kpathsea-debug=NUMBER</a></dt>
+<dt>-mltex, <a href="#opt-latex-mltex">-mltex</a></dt>
+<dt>-output-comment=STRING,
+<a href="#opt-latex-output-comment">-output-comment=STRING</a></dt>
+<dt>-parse-first-line,
+<a href="#opt-latex-parse-first-line">-parse-first-line</a></dt>
+<dt>-progname=STRING,
+<a href="#opt-latex-progname">-progname=STRING</a></dt>
+<dt>-recorder, <a href="#opt-latex-recorder">-recorder</a></dt>
+<dt>-shell-escape,
+<a href="#opt-latex-shell-escape">-shell-escape</a></dt>
+<dt>-src-specials,
+<a href="#opt-latex-src-specials">-src-specials</a></dt>
+<dt>-src-specials=WHERE,
+<a href="#opt-latex-src-specials-where">-src-specials=WHERE</a></dt>
+<dt>-translate-file=TCXNAME,
+<a href="#opt-latex-translate-file-tcxname">-translate-file=TCXNAME</a></dt>
+<dt>-version,
+<a href="#opt-latex-version">-version</a></dt></dl></dd></dl></dd>
+<dt>LaTeX overview, <a href="#overview">Overview of LaTeX and Local
+Guide</a></dt>
+<dt>LaTeX Packages, <a href="#latex-packages">LaTeX
+Packages</a></dt>
+<dt>latin1, <a href="#inputenc">inputenc</a></dt>
+<dt>latin9, <a href="#inputenc">inputenc</a></dt>
+<dt>Layout commands, <a href="#document-classes">Document
+Classes</a></dt>
+<dt>Left-justifying text,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Left-justifying text, environment for,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Left-to-right mode, <a href="#modes">Modes</a></dt>
+<dt>Lengths, adding to, <a href="#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>Lengths, defining a new, <a href="#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>Lengths, defining and using,
+<a href="#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>Lengths, predefined, <a href="#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>Lengths, setting value of, <a href="#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>letter, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>letter class, <a href="#document-classes">Document
+Classes</a></dt>
+<dt>Letters, <a href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>Letters, ending, <a href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>Letters, starting, <a href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>Line Breaking, <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp;
+Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>Line breaks, <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page
+Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>Lines in tables, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Lining text up in columns using tab stops,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Lining text up in tables,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>list, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Lists of items, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Lists of items, generic,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Lists of items, numbered,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Loading additional packages,
+<a href="#document-classes">Document Classes</a></dt>
+<dt>Low-level font commands,
+<a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>LR mode, <a href="#modes">Modes</a></dt>
+<dt>lrbox, <a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp;
+Boxes</a></dt></dl></div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>M</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Make-Index, <a href="#makeindex">Make-Index</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>Example, <a href="#makeindex-example">Example</a></dt>
+<dt>Input Style Specifiers, <a href="#makeindex-style">Input Style
+Specifiers</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>actual, <a href="#makeindex-actual-char">actual
+&lt;char&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>arg_close, <a href="#makeindex-arg-close">arg_close
+&lt;char&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>arg_open, <a href="#makeindex-style-arg-open">arg_open
+&lt;char&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>encap, <a href="#makeindex-encap-char">encap
+&lt;char&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>escape, <a href="#makeindex-escape-char">escape
+&lt;char&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>keyword, <a href="#makeindex-style-string">keyword
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>level, <a href="#makeindex-level-char">level
+&lt;char&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>quote, <a href="#makeindex-quote-char">quote
+&lt;char&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>range_close, <a href="#makeindex-range-close">range_close
+&lt;char&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>range_open, <a href="#makeindex-range-open">range_open
+&lt;char&gt;</a></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt>Options, <a href="#makeindex-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>-c, <a href="#makeindex-option-c">-c</a></dt>
+<dt>-g, <a href="#makeindex-option-g">-g</a></dt>
+<dt>-i, <a href="#makeindex-option-i">-i</a></dt>
+<dt>-l, <a href="#makeindex-option-l">-l</a></dt>
+<dt>-L, <a href="#makeindex-option-L">-L</a></dt>
+<dt>-o ind, <a href="#makeindex-option-o-ind">-o ind</a></dt>
+<dt>-p no, <a href="#makeindex-option-p-no">-p no</a></dt>
+<dt>-q, <a href="#makeindex-option-q">-q</a></dt>
+<dt>-r, <a href="#makeindex-option-r">-r</a></dt>
+<dt>-s sty, <a href="#makeindex-option-s-sty">-s sty</a></dt>
+<dt>-T, <a href="#makeindex-option-T">-T</a></dt>
+<dt>-t log, <a href="#makeindex-option-t-log">-t
+log</a></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt>Ordering, <a href="#makeindex-ordering">Ordering</a></dt>
+<dt>Output Style Specifiers,
+<a href="#makeindex-output-style-specs">Output Style
+Specifiers</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>delim_0, <a href="#makeindex-output-delim-0">delim_0
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>delim_1, <a href="#makeindex-output-delim-1">delim_1
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>delim_2, <a href="#makeindex-output-delim-2">delim_2
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>delim_n, <a href="#makeindex-output-delim-n">delim_n
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>delim_r, <a href="#makeindex-output-delim-r">delim_r
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>delim_t, <a href="#makeindex-output-delim-t">delim_t
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>encap_infix,
+<a href="#makeindex-output-encap-infox">encap_infix
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>encap_prefix,
+<a href="#makeindex-output-encap-prefix">encap_prefix
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>encap_suffix,
+<a href="#makeindex-output-encap-suffix">encap_suffix
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>group_skip, <a href="#makeindex-output-group-skip">group_skip
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>headings_flag,
+<a href="#makeindex-output-headings-flag">headings_flag
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>heading_prefix,
+<a href="#makeindex-output-heading-prefix-string">heading_prefix
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>heading_suffix,
+<a href="#makeindex-output-heading-suffix-string">heading_suffix
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>indent_length,
+<a href="#makeindex-output-indent-length">indent_length
+&lt;number&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>indent_space,
+<a href="#makeindex-output-indent-space">indent_space
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>item_0, <a href="#makeindex-output-item-0">item_0
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>item_01, <a href="#makeindex-output-item-01">item_01
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>item_1, <a href="#makeindex-output-item-1">item_1
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>item_12, <a href="#makeindex-output-item-12">item_12
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>item_2, <a href="#makeindex-output-item-2">item_2
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>item_x1, <a href="#makeindex-output-item-x1">item_x1
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>item_x2, <a href="#makeindex-output-item-x2">item_x2
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>line_max, <a href="#makeindex-output-line-max">line_max
+&lt;number&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>numhead_negative,
+<a href="#makeindex-output-numhead-negative">numhead_negative
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>numhead_positive,
+<a href="#makeindex-output-numhead-positive">numhead_positive
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>page_compositor,
+<a href="#makeindex-page-compositor">page_compositor
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>postamble,
+<a href="#makeindex-output-postamble-string">postamble
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>preamble, <a href="#makeindex-output-preamble-string">preamble
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>setpage_prefix,
+<a href="#makeindex-output-setpage-prefix">setpage_prefix
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>setpage_suffix,
+<a href="#makeindex-output-setpage-suffix">setpage_suffix
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>suffix_2p, <a href="#makeindex-output-suffix-2p">suffix_2p
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>suffix_3p, <a href="#makeindex-output-suffix-3p">suffix_3p
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>suffix_mp, <a href="#makeindex-output-suffix-mp">suffix_mp
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>symhead_negative,
+<a href="#makeindex-output-symhead-negative">symhead_negative
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>symhead_positive,
+<a href="#makeindex-output-symhead-positive">symhead_positive
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt>Special Effects, <a href="#makeindex-special-effects">Special
+Effects</a></dt>
+<dt>Style File, <a href="#makeindex-style-file">Style
+File</a></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt>Making a title page, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Making paragraphs, <a href="#making-paragraphs">Making
+Paragraphs</a></dt>
+<dt>Margin Notes, <a href="#margin-notes">Margin Notes</a></dt>
+<dt>Math Formulae, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>Math Functions, <a href="#special-symbols">Special
+Symbols</a></dt>
+<dt>Math Miscellany, <a href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>Math mode, <a href="#modes">Modes</a></dt>
+<dt>Math mode, entering, <a href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>Math mode, spacing, <a href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>Math Symbols, Variable Size, <a href="#special-symbols">Special
+Symbols</a></dt>
+<dt>mathpazo, <a href="#mathpazo">mathpazo</a></dt>
+<dt>Maths symbols, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>Metafont, <a href="#metafont">Metafont (tbd.)</a></dt>
+<dt>MetaPost, <a href="#metapost">MetaPost</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>Environment,
+<a href="#metapost-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>MFINPUTS, <a href="#metapost-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dt>MPEDIT, <a href="#metapost-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dt>MPINPUTS, <a href="#metapost-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dt>MPSUPPORT, <a href="#metapost-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dt>MPXCOMMAND,
+<a href="#metapost-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dt>TEX, <a href="#metapost-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dt>TROFF,
+<a href="#metapost-environment">Environment</a></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt>Options, <a href="#metapost-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>--file-line-error-style,
+<a href="#metapost-option-file-line-error-style">--file-line-error-style</a></dt>
+<dt>--help, <a href="#metapost-option-help">--help</a></dt>
+<dt>--ini, <a href="#metapost-option-ini">--ini</a></dt>
+<dt>--interaction mode,
+<a href="#metapost-option-intercation">--interaction mode</a></dt>
+<dt>--jobname name, <a href="#metapost-option-jobname">--jobname
+name</a></dt>
+<dt>--kpathsea-debug bitmask,
+<a href="#metapost-option-kpathsea-debug">--kpathsea-debug
+bitmask</a></dt>
+<dt>--mem mem, <a href="#metapost-option-mem">--mem mem</a></dt>
+<dt>--parse-first-line,
+<a href="#metapost-option-parse-first-line">--parse-first-line</a></dt>
+<dt>--progname name, <a href="#metapost-option-progname">--progname
+name</a></dt>
+<dt>--recorder,
+<a href="#metapost-option-recorder">--recorder</a></dt>
+<dt>--translate-file tcxname,
+<a href="#metapost-option-translate-file">--translate-file
+tcxname</a></dt>
+<dt>--troff, <a href="#metapost-option-troff">--troff</a></dt>
+<dt>--version,
+<a href="#metapost-option-version">--version</a></dt>
+<dt>-T,
+<a href="#metapost-option-T">-T</a></dt></dl></dd></dl></dd>
+<dt>minipage, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Minipage, creating a,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Modes, <a href="#modes">Modes</a></dt>
+<dt>Multicolumn text, <a href="#layout">Layout</a></dt></dl></div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>N</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>New line, starting, <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line
+&amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>New line, starting (paragraph mode),
+<a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>New Page, <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page
+Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>Notes in the margin, <a href="#margin-notes">Margin
+Notes</a></dt></dl></div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>O</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Operators</dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>Binary, <a href="#special-symbols">Special Symbols</a></dt>
+<dt>Relational, <a href="#special-symbols">Special
+Symbols</a></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt>Options, global, <a href="#document-classes">Document
+Classes</a></dt>
+<dt>overcite.sty, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Overview of LaTeX, <a href="#overview">Overview of LaTeX and
+Local Guide</a></dt></dl></div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>P</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Packages</dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>amsmath, <a href="#amsmath">amsmath</a></dt>
+<dt>bm, <a href="#bm-package">bm</a></dt>
+<dt>bm.sty, <a href="#bm-package">bm</a></dt>
+<dt>dcolumn, <a href="#dcolumn">dcolumn</a></dt>
+<dt>german, <a href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>graphics, <a href="#graphics">graphics</a></dt>
+<dt>hyperref, <a href="#hyperref">hyperref</a></dt>
+<dt>KOMA-Script, <a href="#komascript">KOMA-Script</a></dt>
+<dt>mathpazo, <a href="#mathpazo">mathpazo</a></dt>
+<dt>Several Small Packages, <a href="#small-packages">Several Small
+Packages</a></dt>
+<dt>url, <a href="#url-package">url</a></dt>
+<dt>varioref, <a href="#varioref">varioref</a></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt>Packages, loading, <a href="#document-classes">Document
+Classes</a></dt>
+<dt>Page break, forcing, <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line
+&amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>Page Breaking, <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp;
+Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>Page Formatting, <a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp;
+Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>Page numbering, <a href="#page-styles">Page Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>Page styles, <a href="#page-styles">Page Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>Paragraph mode, <a href="#modes">Modes</a></dt>
+<dt>Paragraph, starting a new, <a href="#making-paragraphs">Making
+Paragraphs</a></dt>
+<dt>Paragraphs, <a href="#making-paragraphs">Making
+Paragraphs</a></dt>
+<dt>Parameters, <a href="#parameters">Parameters</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfTeX, <a href="#pdftex">pdfTeX</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>Environment, <a href="#pdftex-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>TEXEDIT, <a href="#pdftex-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dt>TEXFONTS, <a href="#pdftex-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dt>TEXFORMATS, <a href="#pdftex-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dt>TEXINPUTS, <a href="#pdftex-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dt>TEXMFOUTPUT, <a href="#pdftex-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dt>TEXPOOL,
+<a href="#pdftex-environment">Environment</a></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt>Options, <a href="#pdftex-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>--file-line-error-style,
+<a href="#pdftex-option-file-line-error-style">--file-line-error-style</a></dt>
+<dt>--fmt format, <a href="#pdftex-option-fmt">--fmt
+format</a></dt>
+<dt>--help, <a href="#pdftex-option-help">--help</a></dt>
+<dt>--ini, <a href="#pdftex-option-ini">--ini</a></dt>
+<dt>--interaction mode,
+<a href="#pdftex-option-interaction%20mode">--interaction
+mode</a></dt>
+<dt>--ipc, <a href="#pdftex-option-ipc">--ipc</a></dt>
+<dt>--ipc-start,
+<a href="#pdftex-option-ipc-start">--ipc-start</a></dt>
+<dt>--jobname name, <a href="#pdftex-option-jobname-name">--jobname
+name</a></dt>
+<dt>--kpathsea-debug bitmask,
+<a href="#pdftex-option-kpathsea-debug">--kpathsea-debug
+bitmask</a></dt>
+<dt>--maketex fmt, <a href="#pdftex-option-maketex">--maketex
+fmt</a></dt>
+<dt>--no-maketex fmt,
+<a href="#pdftex-option-no-maketex">--no-maketex fmt</a></dt>
+<dt>--output-comment string,
+<a href="#pdftex-option-output-comment">--output-comment
+string</a></dt>
+<dt>--parse-first-line,
+<a href="#pdftex-option-parse-first-line">--parse-first-line</a></dt>
+<dt>--progname name, <a href="#pdftex-option-progname">--progname
+name</a></dt>
+<dt>--recorder,
+<a href="#pdftex-option-recorder">--recorder</a></dt>
+<dt>--shell-escape,
+<a href="#pdftex-option-shell-escape">--shell-escape</a></dt>
+<dt>--translate-file tcxname,
+<a href="#pdftex-option-translate-file">--translate-file
+tcxname</a></dt>
+<dt>--version, <a href="#pdftex-option-version">--version</a></dt>
+<dt>[-no]-maketex=FMT,
+<a href="#opt-latex-no-maketex">[-no]-maketex=FMT</a></dt></dl></dd></dl></dd>
+<dt>People</dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>Bausum, David, <a href="#plaintex-ovw">Overview</a></dt>
+<dt>Berry, Karl, <a href="#credits">Credits</a></dt>
+<dt>Borgert, Wolfgang, <a href="#credits">Credits</a></dt>
+<dt>Casellas, Ramon, <a href="#credits">Credits</a></dt>
+<dt>Danielsson, Holger, <a href="#credits">Credits</a></dt>
+<dt>Devenish, James, <a href="#credits">Credits</a></dt>
+<dt>Gaesslein, Hubert, <a href="#credits">Credits</a></dt>
+<dt>Goossens, Michel, <a href="#overview">Overview of LaTeX and
+Local Guide</a></dt>
+<dt>Hagen, Hans, <a href="#context">ConTeXt (tbd.)</a></dt>
+<dt>Karp, Peter, <a href="#credits">Credits</a></dt>
+<dt>Lamport, Leslie, <a href="#overview">Overview of LaTeX and
+Local Guide</a></dt>
+<dt>Mittelbach, Frank, <a href="#overview">Overview of LaTeX and
+Local Guide</a></dt>
+<dt>Niepraschk, Rolf, <a href="#credits">Credits</a></dt>
+<dt>Nordhaug, Hans Fredrik, <a href="#credits">Credits</a></dt>
+<dt>Pepping, Simon, <a href="#credits">Credits</a></dt>
+<dt>Samarin, Alexander, <a href="#overview">Overview of LaTeX and
+Local Guide</a></dt>
+<dt>Stayton, Bob, <a href="#credits">Credits</a></dt>
+<dt>van Zandt, Timothy, <a href="#pstricks-ovw">Overview</a></dt>
+<dt>Voss, Herbert, <a href="#credits">Credits</a></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt>PiCTeX, <a href="#pictex">PiCTeX (tbd.)</a></dt>
+<dt>picture, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Pictures, creating, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>PlainTeX, <a href="#plaintex">PlainTeX</a></dt>
+<dt>Poetry, an environment for,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Predefined lengths, <a href="#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>Programs, typesetting,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>PSTricks, <a href="#pstricks">PSTricks</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>commands</dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>\aput, <a href="#pstricks-attaching">Attaching labels to node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\Aput, <a href="#pstricks-attaching">Attaching labels to node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\arrows, <a href="#hackers">For hackers only</a></dt>
+<dt>\bput, <a href="#pstricks-attaching">Attaching labels to node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\Bput, <a href="#pstricks-attaching">Attaching labels to node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\circlenode, <a href="#pstricks-nodes">Nodes</a></dt>
+<dt>\clipbox, <a href="#pstricks-clipping">Clipping</a></dt>
+<dt>\closedshadow, <a href="#safe-tricks">Safe tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\closepath, <a href="#safe-tricks">Safe tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\cnode, <a href="#pstricks-nodes">Nodes</a></dt>
+<dt>\cnodeput, <a href="#pstricks-nodes">Nodes</a></dt>
+<dt>\code, <a href="#hackers">For hackers only</a></dt>
+<dt>\coor, <a href="#hackers">For hackers only</a></dt>
+<dt>\cput, <a href="#pstricks-framed">Framed boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\curveto, <a href="#pretty-safe-tricks">Pretty safe
+tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\dataplot, <a href="#pstricks-plots">Plots</a></dt>
+<dt>\degrees, <a href="#pstricks-dimensions">Dimensions,
+coordinates and angles</a></dt>
+<dt>\dim, <a href="#hackers">For hackers only</a></dt>
+<dt>\endpspicture, <a href="#pictures">Pictures</a></dt>
+<dt>\everypsbox, <a href="#pstricks-boxes">Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\file, <a href="#hackers">For hackers only</a></dt>
+<dt>\fileplot, <a href="#pstricks-plots">Plots</a></dt>
+<dt>\fill, <a href="#safe-tricks">Safe tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\grestore, <a href="#safe-tricks">Safe tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\gsave, <a href="#safe-tricks">Safe tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\lineto, <a href="#pretty-safe-tricks">Pretty safe
+tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\listplot, <a href="#pstricks-plots">Plots</a></dt>
+<dt>\lput, <a href="#pstricks-attaching">Attaching labels to node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\movepath, <a href="#safe-tricks">Safe tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\moveto, <a href="#safe-tricks">Safe tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\mput, <a href="#pstricks-attaching">Attaching labels to node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\mrestore, <a href="#safe-tricks">Safe tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\msave, <a href="#safe-tricks">Safe tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\multips, <a href="#pstricks-repetition">Repetition</a></dt>
+<dt>\multirput, <a href="#pstricks-repetition">Repetition</a></dt>
+<dt>\ncangle, <a href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\ncangles, <a href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\ncarc, <a href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\ncbar, <a href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\nccircle, <a href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\nccoil, <a href="#pstricks-coils">Coils and zigzags</a></dt>
+<dt>\nccurve, <a href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\ncdiag, <a href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\ncdiagg, <a href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\ncline, <a href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\ncLine, <a href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\ncloop, <a href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\nczigzag, <a href="#pstricks-coils">Coils and zigzags</a></dt>
+<dt>\newcmykcolor, <a href="#pstricks-color">Color</a></dt>
+<dt>\newgray, <a href="#pstricks-color">Color</a></dt>
+<dt>\newhsbcolor, <a href="#pstricks-color">Color</a></dt>
+<dt>\newpath, <a href="#safe-tricks">Safe tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\newpsobject, <a href="#pstricks-custom">Custom styles</a></dt>
+<dt>\newpsstyle, <a href="#pstricks-custom">Custom styles</a></dt>
+<dt>\newrgbcolor, <a href="#pstricks-color">Color</a></dt>
+<dt>\NormalCoor, <a href="#pstricks-coordinates">Special
+coordinates</a></dt>
+<dt>\openshadow, <a href="#safe-tricks">Safe tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\ovalnode, <a href="#pstricks-nodes">Nodes</a></dt>
+<dt>\overlaybox, <a href="#pstricks-overlays">Overlays</a></dt>
+<dt>\parabola, <a href="#pstricks-curves">Curves</a></dt>
+<dt>\parametricplot, <a href="#pstricks-plots">Plots</a></dt>
+<dt>\pcangle, <a href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\pcarc, <a href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\pcbar, <a href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\pccoil, <a href="#pstricks-coils">Coils and zigzags</a></dt>
+<dt>\pccurve, <a href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\pcdiag, <a href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\pcline, <a href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\pcloop, <a href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\pczigzag, <a href="#pstricks-coils">Coils and zigzags</a></dt>
+<dt>\pnode, <a href="#pstricks-nodes">Nodes</a></dt>
+<dt>\psarc, <a href="#pstricks-arcs">Arcs, circles and
+ellipses</a></dt>
+<dt>\psarcn, <a href="#pstricks-arcs">Arcs, circles and
+ellipses</a></dt>
+<dt>\psaxes, <a href="#pstricks-axes">Axes</a></dt>
+<dt>\psbezier, <a href="#pstricks-curves">Curves</a></dt>
+<dt>\psccurve, <a href="#pstricks-curves">Curves</a></dt>
+<dt>\pscharclip, <a href="#pstricks-stroking">Stroking and filling
+character paths</a></dt>
+<dt>\pscharpath, <a href="#pstricks-stroking">Stroking and filling
+character paths</a></dt>
+<dt>\pscircle, <a href="#pstricks-arcs">Arcs, circles and
+ellipses</a></dt>
+<dt>\pscirclebox, <a href="#pstricks-framed">Framed boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\psclip, <a href="#pstricks-clipping">Clipping</a></dt>
+<dt>\pscoil, <a href="#pstricks-coils">Coils and zigzags</a></dt>
+<dt>\psCoil, <a href="#pstricks-coils">Coils and zigzags</a></dt>
+<dt>\pscurve, <a href="#pstricks-curves">Curves</a></dt>
+<dt>\pscustom, <a href="#pstricks-basics">The basics</a></dt>
+<dt>\psdblframebox, <a href="#pstricks-framed">Framed
+boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\psdots, <a href="#pstricks-dots">Dots</a></dt>
+<dt>\psecurve, <a href="#pstricks-curves">Curves</a></dt>
+<dt>\psellipse, <a href="#pstricks-arcs">Arcs, circles and
+ellipses</a></dt>
+<dt>\psframe, <a href="#pstricks-lines">Lines and polygons</a></dt>
+<dt>\psframebox, <a href="#pstricks-framed">Framed boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\psgrid, <a href="#pstricks-grids">Grids</a></dt>
+<dt>\pslabelsep, <a href="#placing">Placing and rotating
+whatever</a></dt>
+<dt>\pslbrace, <a href="#pstricks-tricks">Tips and More
+Tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\psline, <a href="#pstricks-lines">Lines and polygons</a></dt>
+<dt>\pslongbox, <a href="#pstricks-boxes">Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\psmathboxfalse, <a href="#pstricks-boxes">Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\psmathboxtrue, <a href="#pstricks-boxes">Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\psovalbox, <a href="#pstricks-framed">Framed boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\psoverlay, <a href="#pstricks-overlays">Overlays</a></dt>
+<dt>\pspicture, <a href="#pictures">Pictures</a></dt>
+<dt>\psplot, <a href="#pstricks-plots">Plots</a></dt>
+<dt>\pspolygon, <a href="#pstricks-lines">Lines and
+polygons</a></dt>
+<dt>\psrbrace, <a href="#pstricks-tricks">Tips and More
+Tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\psset, <a href="#pstricks-setting">Setting graphics
+parameters</a></dt>
+<dt>\pssetlength, <a href="#pstricks-dimensions">Dimensions,
+coordinates and angles</a></dt>
+<dt>\psshadowbox, <a href="#pstricks-framed">Framed boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\pstextpath, <a href="#pstricks-path">Typesetting text along a
+path</a></dt>
+<dt>\PSTtoEPS, <a href="#pstricks-exporting">Exporting EPS
+files</a></dt>
+<dt>\psverbboxfalse, <a href="#pstricks-boxes">Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\psverbboxtrue, <a href="#pstricks-boxes">Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\pswedge, <a href="#pstricks-arcs">Arcs, circles and
+ellipses</a></dt>
+<dt>\psxlabel, <a href="#pstricks-axes">Axes</a></dt>
+<dt>\psylabel, <a href="#pstricks-axes">Axes</a></dt>
+<dt>\pszigzag, <a href="#pstricks-coils">Coils and zigzags</a></dt>
+<dt>\putoverlaybox, <a href="#pstricks-overlays">Overlays</a></dt>
+<dt>\qline, <a href="#pstricks-lines">Lines and polygons</a></dt>
+<dt>\radians, <a href="#pstricks-dimensions">Dimensions,
+coordinates and angles</a></dt>
+<dt>\rcoor, <a href="#hackers">For hackers only</a></dt>
+<dt>\rcurveto, <a href="#pretty-safe-tricks">Pretty safe
+tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\readdata, <a href="#pstricks-plots">Plots</a></dt>
+<dt>\rlineto, <a href="#pretty-safe-tricks">Pretty safe
+tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\rnode, <a href="#pstricks-nodes">Nodes</a></dt>
+<dt>\Rnode, <a href="#pstricks-nodes">Nodes</a></dt>
+<dt>\RnodeRef, <a href="#pstricks-nodes">Nodes</a></dt>
+<dt>\rotate, <a href="#safe-tricks">Safe tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\rotatedown, <a href="#pstricks-rotation">Rotation and scaling
+boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\rotateleft, <a href="#pstricks-rotation">Rotation and scaling
+boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\rotateright, <a href="#pstricks-rotation">Rotation and scaling
+boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\rput, <a href="#placing">Placing and rotating
+whatever</a></dt>
+<dt>\savedata, <a href="#pstricks-plots">Plots</a></dt>
+<dt>\scale, <a href="#safe-tricks">Safe tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\scalebox, <a href="#pstricks-rotation">Rotation and scaling
+boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\scaleboxto, <a href="#pstricks-rotation">Rotation and scaling
+boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\setcolor, <a href="#hackers">For hackers only</a></dt>
+<dt>\SpecialCoor, <a href="#pstricks-coordinates">Special
+coordinates</a></dt>
+<dt>\stroke, <a href="#safe-tricks">Safe tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\swapaxes, <a href="#safe-tricks">Safe tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\TeXtoEPS, <a href="#pstricks-exporting">Exporting EPS
+files</a></dt>
+<dt>\translate, <a href="#safe-tricks">Safe tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\uput, <a href="#placing">Placing and rotating
+whatever</a></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt>parameter</dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>angle, <a href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>arcangle, <a href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>arcsep, <a href="#pstricks-arcs">Arcs, circles and
+ellipses</a></dt>
+<dt>arcsepA, <a href="#pstricks-arcs">Arcs, circles and
+ellipses</a></dt>
+<dt>arcsepB, <a href="#pstricks-arcs">Arcs, circles and
+ellipses</a></dt>
+<dt>arm, <a href="#pstricks-connections">Node connections</a></dt>
+<dt>arrowinset, <a href="#pstricks-arrowheads">Arrowheads and
+such</a></dt>
+<dt>arrowlength, <a href="#pstricks-arrowheads">Arrowheads and
+such</a></dt>
+<dt>arrows, <a href="#pstricks-arrowheads">Arrowheads and
+such</a></dt>
+<dt>arrowscale, <a href="#pstricks-arrowheads">Arrowheads and
+such</a></dt>
+<dt>arrowsize, <a href="#pstricks-arrowheads">Arrowheads and
+such</a></dt>
+<dt>axesstyle, <a href="#pstricks-axes">Axes</a></dt>
+<dt>bbllx, <a href="#pstricks-exporting">Exporting EPS
+files</a></dt>
+<dt>bblly, <a href="#pstricks-exporting">Exporting EPS
+files</a></dt>
+<dt>bburx, <a href="#pstricks-exporting">Exporting EPS
+files</a></dt>
+<dt>bbury, <a href="#pstricks-exporting">Exporting EPS
+files</a></dt>
+<dt>border, <a href="#pstricks-line-styles">Line styles</a></dt>
+<dt>bordercolor, <a href="#pstricks-line-styles">Line
+styles</a></dt>
+<dt>boxsep, <a href="#pstricks-framed">Framed boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>bracketlength, <a href="#pstricks-arrowheads">Arrowheads and
+such</a></dt>
+<dt>coilheight, <a href="#pstricks-coils">Coils and
+zigzags</a></dt>
+<dt>coilinc, <a href="#pstricks-coils">Coils and zigzags</a></dt>
+<dt>coilwidth, <a href="#pstricks-coils">Coils and zigzags</a></dt>
+<dt>cornersize, <a href="#pstricks-lines">Lines and
+polygons</a></dt>
+<dt>curvature, <a href="#pstricks-curves">Curves</a></dt>
+<dt>dash, <a href="#pstricks-line-styles">Line styles</a></dt>
+<dt>dimen, <a href="#pstricks-line-styles">Line styles</a></dt>
+<dt>dotangle, <a href="#pstricks-dots">Dots</a></dt>
+<dt>dotscale, <a href="#pstricks-dots">Dots</a></dt>
+<dt>dotsep, <a href="#pstricks-line-styles">Line styles</a></dt>
+<dt>dotsize, <a href="#pstricks-arrowheads">Arrowheads and
+such</a></dt>
+<dt>dotstyle, <a href="#pstricks-dots">Dots</a></dt>
+<dt>doublecolor, <a href="#pstricks-line-styles">Line
+styles</a></dt>
+<dt>doubleline, <a href="#pstricks-line-styles">Line
+styles</a></dt>
+<dt>doublesep, <a href="#pstricks-line-styles">Line styles</a></dt>
+<dt>fillcolor, <a href="#pstricks-fill-styles">Fill styles</a></dt>
+<dt>fillstyle, <a href="#pstricks-fill-styles">Fill styles</a></dt>
+<dt>framearc, <a href="#pstricks-lines">Lines and polygons</a></dt>
+<dt>framesep, <a href="#pstricks-framed">Framed boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>gradangle, <a href="#pstricks-overlays">Overlays</a></dt>
+<dt>gradbegin, <a href="#pstricks-overlays">Overlays</a></dt>
+<dt>gradend, <a href="#pstricks-overlays">Overlays</a></dt>
+<dt>gradlines, <a href="#pstricks-overlays">Overlays</a></dt>
+<dt>gradmidpoint, <a href="#pstricks-overlays">Overlays</a></dt>
+<dt>gridcolor, <a href="#pstricks-grids">Grids</a></dt>
+<dt>griddots, <a href="#pstricks-grids">Grids</a></dt>
+<dt>gridlabelcolor, <a href="#pstricks-grids">Grids</a></dt>
+<dt>gridlabels, <a href="#pstricks-grids">Grids</a></dt>
+<dt>gridwidth, <a href="#pstricks-grids">Grids</a></dt>
+<dt>hatchangle, <a href="#pstricks-fill-styles">Fill
+styles</a></dt>
+<dt>hatchcolor, <a href="#pstricks-fill-styles">Fill
+styles</a></dt>
+<dt>hatchsep, <a href="#pstricks-fill-styles">Fill styles</a></dt>
+<dt>hatchwidth, <a href="#pstricks-fill-styles">Fill
+styles</a></dt>
+<dt>headerfile, <a href="#pstricks-exporting">Exporting EPS
+files</a></dt>
+<dt>headers, <a href="#pstricks-exporting">Exporting EPS
+files</a></dt>
+<dt>labels, <a href="#pstricks-axes">Axes</a></dt>
+<dt>labelsep, <a href="#placing">Placing and rotating
+whatever</a></dt>
+<dt>liftpen, <a href="#pstricks-graphics-objects">Graphics
+objects</a></dt>
+<dt>linearc, <a href="#pstricks-lines">Lines and polygons</a></dt>
+<dt>linecolor, <a href="#pstricks-basic">Basic graphics
+parameters</a></dt>
+<dt>linestyle, <a href="#pstricks-line-styles">Line styles</a></dt>
+<dt>linetype, <a href="#pstricks-parameters">Parameters</a></dt>
+<dt>linewidth, <a href="#pstricks-basic">Basic graphics
+parameters</a></dt>
+<dt>loopsize, <a href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>ncurv, <a href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>nodesep, <a href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>offset, <a href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>origin, <a href="#pstricks-coordinate">Coordinate
+systems</a></dt>
+<dt>plotpoints, <a href="#pstricks-plots">Plots</a></dt>
+<dt>plotstyle, <a href="#pstricks-plots">Plots</a></dt>
+<dt>rbracketlength, <a href="#pstricks-arrowheads">Arrowheads and
+such</a></dt>
+<dt>runit, <a href="#pstricks-dimensions">Dimensions, coordinates
+and angles</a></dt>
+<dt>shadow, <a href="#pstricks-line-styles">Line styles</a></dt>
+<dt>shadowangle, <a href="#pstricks-line-styles">Line
+styles</a></dt>
+<dt>shadowcolor, <a href="#pstricks-line-styles">Line
+styles</a></dt>
+<dt>shadowsize, <a href="#pstricks-line-styles">Line
+styles</a></dt>
+<dt>showorigin, <a href="#pstricks-axes">Axes</a></dt>
+<dt>showpoints, <a href="#pstricks-basic">Basic graphics
+parameters</a></dt>
+<dt>subgriddots, <a href="#pstricks-grids">Grids</a></dt>
+<dt>subgridwidth, <a href="#pstricks-grids">Grids</a></dt>
+<dt>swapaxes, <a href="#pstricks-coordinate">Coordinate
+systems</a></dt>
+<dt>tbarsize, <a href="#pstricks-arrowheads">Arrowheads and
+such</a></dt>
+<dt>ticks, <a href="#pstricks-axes">Axes</a></dt>
+<dt>ticksize, <a href="#pstricks-axes">Axes</a></dt>
+<dt>tickstyle, <a href="#pstricks-axes">Axes</a></dt>
+<dt>unit, <a href="#pstricks-dimensions">Dimensions, coordinates
+and angles</a></dt>
+<dt>xunit, <a href="#pstricks-dimensions">Dimensions, coordinates
+and angles</a></dt>
+<dt>yunit, <a href="#pstricks-dimensions">Dimensions, coordinates
+and angles</a></dt></dl></dd></dl></dd></dl></div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>Q</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>quotation, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>quote, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Quoted text, displaying,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt></dl></div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>R</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Ragged left text, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Ragged left text, environment for,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Ragged right text, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Ragged right text, environment for,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Relational Operators, <a href="#special-symbols">Special
+Symbols</a></dt>
+<dt>Remarks in the margin, <a href="#margin-notes">Margin
+Notes</a></dt>
+<dt>report class, <a href="#document-classes">Document
+Classes</a></dt>
+<dt>Reserved Characters, <a href="#special-characters">Special
+Characters</a></dt>
+<dt>Right-justifying text,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Right-justifying text, environment for,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt></dl></div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>S</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Sectioning, <a href="#sectioning">Sectioning</a></dt>
+<dt>Several Small Packages, <a href="#small-packages">Several Small
+Packages</a></dt>
+<dt>Simulating typed text,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Sizes of text, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>Small Packages, <a href="#small-packages">Several Small
+Packages</a></dt>
+<dt>Space, inserting vertical, <a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces
+&amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>Spaces, <a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>Spacing, within Math mode, <a href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>Special Characters, <a href="#special-characters">Special
+Characters</a></dt>
+<dt>Splitting the input file,
+<a href="#splitting-the-input">Splitting the Input</a></dt>
+<dt>Starting &amp; Ending, <a href="#starting-and-ending">Starting
+&amp; Ending</a></dt>
+<dt>Starting on a right-hand page,
+<a href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>Styles of text, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>Styles, page, <a href="#page-styles">Page Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>Subscript, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>Superscript, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>Symbols, <a href="#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>Miscellaneous, <a href="#special-symbols">Special
+Symbols</a></dt>
+<dt>Special, <a href="#special-symbols">Special
+Symbols</a></dt></dl></dd></dl></div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>T</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Tab stops, using, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>tabbing, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>table, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Table of Contents, creating, <a href="#table-of-contents">Table
+of Contents</a></dt>
+<dt>Tables, creating, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>tabular, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Terminal Input/Output,
+<a href="#terminal-input-slash-output">Terminal
+Input/Output</a></dt>
+<dt>Texinfo, <a href="#texinfo">Texinfo (tbd.)</a></dt>
+<dt>Thanks, for titlepage, <a href="#page-styles">Page
+Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>thebibliography, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>theorem, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Theorems, defining, <a href="#definitions">Definitions</a></dt>
+<dt>Theorems, typesetting,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Title making, <a href="#page-styles">Page Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>Title pages, creating,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Title, for titlepage, <a href="#page-styles">Page
+Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>titlepage, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Typed text, simulating,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Typeface Sizes, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>Typeface Styles, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>Typefaces, <a href="#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt></dl></div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>U</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>url, <a href="#url-package">url</a></dt>
+<dt>Using BibTeX,
+<a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt></dl></div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>V</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Variables, a list of, <a href="#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>varioref, <a href="#varioref">varioref</a></dt>
+<dt>verbatim, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Verbatim text, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>verse, <a href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Vertical space, inserting, <a href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces
+&amp; Boxes</a></dt></dl></div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>X</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>xindy, <a href="#xindy">xindy</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>Command List, <a href="#xindy-command-list">Command
+List</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>Markup Commands, <a href="#xindy-command-list-markup">Markup
+Commands</a></dt>
+<dt>Raw Index Interface,
+<a href="#xindy-command-list-raw-index">Raw Index
+Interface</a></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt>Invoking, <a href="#xindy-invoking">Invoking xindy</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>Command Line Options, <a href="#xindy-invoking-cmdline">Command
+Line Options</a></dt>
+<dt>Search Path, <a href="#xindy-search-path">Search
+Path</a></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt>Processing Commands,
+<a href="#xindy-command-list-processing">Processing
+Commands</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>define-alphabet,
+<a href="#xindy-command-list-processing-define-alphabet">define-alphabet</a></dt>
+<dt>define-attributes,
+<a href="#xindy-command-list-processing-define-attributes">define-attributes</a></dt>
+<dt>define-crossref-class,
+<a href="#xindy-command-list-processing-define-crossref-class">define-crossref-class</a></dt>
+<dt>define-letter-group,
+<a href="#xindy-command-list-processing-define-letter-group">define-letter-group</a></dt>
+<dt>define-location-class,
+<a href="#xindy-command-list-processing-define-location-class">define-location-class</a></dt>
+<dt>define-location-class-order,
+<a href="#xindy-command-list-processing-define-location-class-order">
+define-location-class-order</a></dt>
+<dt>define-rule-set,
+<a href="#xindy-command-list-processing-define-rule-set">define-rule-set</a></dt>
+<dt>define-sort-rule-orientations,
+<a href="#xindy-command-list-processing-define-sort-rule-orientations">
+define-sort-rule-orientations</a></dt>
+<dt>merge-rule,
+<a href="#xindy-command-list-processing-merge-rule">merge-rule</a></dt>
+<dt>merge-to,
+<a href="#xindy-command-list-processing-merge-to">merge-to</a></dt>
+<dt>require,
+<a href="#xindy-command-list-processing-require">require</a></dt>
+<dt>searchpath,
+<a href="#xindy-command-list-processing-searchpath">searchpath</a></dt>
+<dt>sort-rule,
+<a href="#xindy-command-list-processing-sort-rule">sort-rule</a></dt>
+<dt>use-rule-set,
+<a href="#xindy-command-list-processing-use-rule-set">use-rule-set</a></dt></dl></dd></dl></dd></dl></div></div></div></div></div>
+</body>
+</html>